Home

Ford Powertrain Application 1981-2004

1. BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER E INE MODEL sth amp 6th VIN 8th NGEN TYPE LINK CONFIG F 150 Heritage FO F1 WO 2 42176 EECV SCP OBD 2 X1 SFI MAF W 4 6L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF 3 5 4L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD 2 SFI MAF M SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 CNG SFI MAF F Series 150 FO 3 SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 Heritage Supercharged Lightning SFI MAF Bi Fuel 7 SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 BIF F Super Duty F2 F3 F4 L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 250 550 F5 X2 X3 SFI MAF d a ee 5 6 8LSOHCV10 EECV SCP OBD 2 W4 SFI MAF D 6 8LSOHCV10 EECV SCP OBD 2 SFI MAF Excursion U4 L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD 2 SFI MAF 5 6 8LSOHCV10 EECV SCP OBD 2 SFI MAF Aviator U6 U7 U8 H 46LV8DOHC PTEC SCP OBD 2 SFI MAF Freestar 5 A2 6 39LOHVV6 EECV SCP OBD II C2 Monterey EFI 2 42LOHVV6 EECV SCP OBD II C2 EFI Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 68 4 GETTING STARTED This chapter provides information to assist you in operating your Vetronix tester and software application In addition to helping you identify vehicles covered by the software it shows you how to connect your tester to the vehicle and explains how to begin performing system diagnostic functions It is suggested that you read this manual completely before operating the test
2. 148 moneda IOS nerad Gad des uk depre desi gard ans 150 Submode F8 Review Service Codes Decode to Pinpoint Tests 152 oubmode FS Pur ally dare RADER dea dub qd qb AE daa ga 154 MODE F3 SNAPSHOT tele ewer bbs xe ga hee 156 Sele bee oes Cas quc 156 MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS GASOLINE 160 aubmode FU Output Tess anh eu hove ARR RROEERAERRASRXSTEST CURE A RHE NEES 160 SUDO cad Pus Puede dodi 171 Submogde F2 UR GR ERAS LOE ARERR LR RRR 174 MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS DIESEL 1 2 Inn 177 Dubmode TO Our SINS TEN G asawa kes r ere gam eua RRR Qs dea dra aca para P d we 177 Submdade da law Pius TSi ui ao eb Medd Hep eb REPRE E p P bI Heredes 178 T2 Medor HIE O ce cake hea ech bred FA 180 Subimode F3 Cylinder Balanca Tos eee debe CRG RAN 181 Submode Pd TES c bee D REA Ded A ea ERR ER WA ES 182 MODE FS INFORMATION Seep eee nemen 184 DINO TID DLG RR 184 Submode F2 OBD Information as 185 oubmode F4 Vehicle Information ois das
3. BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL ENGINE Y 5th amp 6th VIN 8th OIN TYPE LINK CONFIG Escort P1 P 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 3 2 0L SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Focus P3 P 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 3 2 0L SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Taurus P5 2 3 0L 2V V6 FFV EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Mustang P4 4 3 8L V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang GT P4 X 4 6L 2V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Mustang Cobra P4 Y 4 6L V8 DOHC EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Super Charged Mustang Mach 1 P4 R 4 6L DOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 Crown Victoria P7 W 4 6L V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 MAF 9 4 6L V8 CNG EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF V 4 6L DOHC EEC V SCP OBD II C2 2003 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL ENGINE 9 5th amp 6th VIN 8th NGEN TYPE LINK CONFIG Towncar M8 W 4 6L 2V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 62 3 Vehicle Coverage 2003 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL E INE 5th amp 6th VIN 8th AGIN TYPE LINK CONFIG Sable M5 S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF 2 3 0L 2V V6 FFV EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD I
4. ENGINE SPEED SELECTED YES SELECT 1 NO DE SELECT ENTER Additional parameter selection IDLE AIR CNTRL 1 HSF LOOP STATUS OPEN OFF If engine is started IDLE AIR CNTRL IDLE AIR CNTRL 1 HSF 1 HSF LOOP STATUS LOOP STATUS OPEN ON OPEN OFF o IDLE AIR CNTRL 1 HSF LOOP STATUS OPEN OFF ENGINE RUNNING OR OUTPUT CONTRL TEST NOT AVAIL EXIT FIGURE 5 31 High Speed Fan Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 170 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Select High Speed Fan output control test Turn test ON Turn test OFF NO Scroll through displayed diagnostic data parameters G GD Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Exit from Output Control test SUBMODE F1 ENGINE Engine tests are available on many 1996 and newer gasoline engine vehicles with EEC V powertrain control systems CAUTION These tests should only be performed with the Key ON Engine OFF KOEO or Key On Engine Running KOER with the vehicle in park To select Engine Tests do the following 1 Press G to enter Controls mode from the Select Test menu 2 Press GD to select ENGINE 3 Select the Engine component that you wish to test from the Engine Controls list ENGINE CONTROLS KEY DESCRIPTI
5. 117 Engine Coolant Temp ECT sensor circuit below minimum voltage 118 Engine Coolant Temp ECT sensor circuit above maximum voltage 121 Closed throttle voltage higher or lower than expected or throttle position voltage inconsistent with the MAF sensor 122 Throttle Position TP sensor circuit below minimum voltage 123 Throttle Position TP sensor circuit above maximum voltage 124 Throttle Position TP sensor voltage higher than expected 125 Throttle Position TP sensor voltage lower than expected 126 MAP BARO sensor higher or lower than expected 128 MAP sensor vacuum hose damaged disconnected 129 Insufficient MAP Mass Air Flow MAF change during dynamic response test 136 System indicates lean Bank 2 137 System indicates rich Bank 2 157 Mass Air Flow MAF sensor circuit below minimum voltage 158 Mass Air Flow MAF sensor circuit above maximum voltage 159 Mass Air Flow MAF higher or lower than expected 167 Insufficient throttle position change during dynamic response test KOER 171 Fuel system at adaptive limits Oxygen Sensor HEGO unable to switch 172 System indicates lean lack of Oxygen Sensor HEGO switches 173 System indicates rich lack of Oxygen Sensor HEGO switches 175 Fuel system at adaptive limits Bank 2 176 System indicates lean Bank 2 177 System indicates rich Bank 2 179 Fuel system at lean adaptive limit at part t
6. Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 56 3 Vehicle Coverage 2001 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED VEHICLE D ENGINES ECA EIS ADAPTER E F Series 2 4 2L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 M 5 4L SOHC V8 NGV SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF F 7 3L V8 TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E Series 6 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 6 8L V10 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 F Series Super L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 A S 6 8L V10 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 F 7 3L V8 TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Windstar 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 F Series Lighting 2 5 4L Super Charged V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Excursion L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 6 8L V10 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 F 7 3L V8 TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 F650 F750 5 7 3L V8 TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 6 7 3L V8 TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 2002 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2002 FORD PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL stn amp 6th vin sth ENGINE TYPE LINK CONFIG Escort P1 P 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 3 2 01 14 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Focus P3 P 2 01 14 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 3 2 0L DOHC 16V EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 57
7. BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL ENGINE 5th amp 6th VIN 8th LINK CONFIG Grand Marquis M7 W 46LSOHCV8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF 9 46LV8NGV EECV SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF Marauder M7 V 4 6L DOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 2004 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL ENGINE 5th amp 6th VIN 8th AGEN TYPE LINK CONFIG Ranger RO R1 R4 D 23LSOHC EECV SCP OBD Il C2 SFI MAF U 30LOHVV6 EECV SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF E 4 0L SOHC V6 EECV SCP OBD Il C2 SFI MAF Escape UO U9 B 20LDOHCI EECV SCP OBD II C2 Zetec SFI MAF 1 3 0LDOHC V6 EECV SCP OBD II C2 Duretec SFI MAF Explorer Sport U6 U7 K 4 0L SOHC V6 EECV SCP OBD II C2 Trac SFI MAF Expedition 01 W 46LSOHCV8 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF L 54L SOHC V8 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF R 54LDOHC4V PTEC SCP OBD Il C2 V8 SFI MAF Navigator U2 W 4 6L SOHC V8 PTEC SCP OBD Il C2 SFI MAF L 5 4L SOHC V8 SCP OBD Il C2 SFI MAF R 54LDOHC4V EECV SCP OBD II C2 V8 SFI MAF E Series C3 C4 C5 W 4 6L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 E1 E2 E3 EFI E4 E5 52 L 5 4L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD Il C2 53 M 54L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 CNG EFI 5 6 8LSOHCV10 EECV SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 67 3 Vehicle Coverage 2004 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED
8. a 2 8L Bronco II is in the 1984 table Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 19 3 Vehicle Coverage 1984 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1984 FORD PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Tempo R 2 3L FBC HSC EEC IV Ford Thunderbird TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford Escort 4 1 6L EFI EEC IV Ford 5 1 6L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford EXP 4 1 6L EFI EEC IV Ford 5 1 6L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford Mustang A 2 3L FBC EEC IV Ford TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F M 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford LTD A 2 3L FBC EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F M 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford Ford F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford 1984 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Continental F M 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford Mark VII 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford Lincoln 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford 1984 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Topaz R 2 3L FBC HSC EEC IV Ford Cougar TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 20 3 Vehicle Coverage 1984 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Capri A 2 3L FBC EEC IV Ford TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F M 5 0L CFI H O EEC IV Ford Ly
9. DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Escort J 1 9L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Tempo X 2 3L SFI SB HSC FED EEC IV DCL Ford S 2 3L SFI HSC CA EEC IV DCL Ford U 3 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Probe A 2 0L SFI EEC IV None Ford Taurus 1 3 0L FF EEC IV DCL Ford Y 3 0L SHO SFI M A EEC IV None Ford U 3 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford P 3 2L SHO EEC IV DCL Ford 4 3 8L SFI AXOD M A EEC IV DCL Ford Thunderbird 4 3 8L SFI RWD EEC IV DCL Ford R 3 8L SC SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford T 5 0L SFI H O M A EEC IV DCL Ford Mustang M 2 3L MFI OHC M A EEC IV DCL Ford E 5 0L SFI H O M A EEC IV None Ford Crown Victoria 4 6L SFI M A AOD E EEC IV DCL Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 37 3 Vehicle Coverage 1993 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Continental 4 3 8L SFI AXOD M A EEC IV DCL Ford Mark VIII V 4 6L SFI 4V AOD E EEC IV DCL Ford Town Car W 4 6L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford 1993 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Tracer J 1 9L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Topaz x 2 31 SFI M A HSC FED EEC IV DCL Ford 5 2 3L SFI M A HSC CA EEC IV DCL Ford U 3 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Sable 1 3 0L FF EEC IV DCL Ford U 3 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford 4 3 8L SFI AXOD EEC IV DCL Ford Cougar 4 3 8L SFIRWD EEC IV DCL Ford 5 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Grand Ma
10. Press S to return to the Test Selection menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 129 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE AV F1 QUICK TESTS F2 STAR MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS SELECT CONTROL AY F0 OUTPUT STATE F1 CYL BALANCE HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS YES TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN DONE YES YES AWAITING CODES ERROR NO CODES RETRY THEN DO EXIT FORD PPT QA1 MITCHELL D14 1 KOEO amp 11 2o ALL KOEO SLOW CODES ARE RECORDED CONTINUOUS 0 11 11 1 ALL CONTINUOUS SLOW CODES ARE RECORDED GOOSING THROTTLE GOOSING THROTTLE CHANGES STATE OF CHANGES STATE OF ENG ACTUATORS ENG ACTUATORS EXIT THROTTLE EXIT FULLY DEPRESSED AND RELEASED FIGURE 5 17 Output State TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT EXIT Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 130 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Select OBD Controls Select Output State test EXIT Return to Test Selection menu SUBMODE F1 CYLINDER BALANCE TEST This test is only available for vehicles equipped with Sequential Electronic Fuel Injection SEFI SEFI systems have one independently controlled fuel injector for each cylinder After performing KOEO and KOER tests the performance level of each fuel injector can be checked in the Cylinder Balance test Some Ford vehicles sold i
11. a Optional ARC diagnostics supported b Optional IVSC diagnostics supported Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 41 3 Vehicle Coverage 1995 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA e ADAPTER Town Car W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Continental V 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mark VIII V 4 6L V8 4V SFI EEC IV DCL Ford 1995 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Tracer J 1 91 14 SFI EEC IV DCL Ford Mystique 3 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford Sable U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford Cougar 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF RWD EEC IV DCL Ford W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II Grand Marquis W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 a Optional ARC diagnostics supported 1995 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Ranger A 2 3L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Bronco Y 4 9L I6 MFI MAP EEC IV DCL Ford Y 4 9L 16 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8L V8 MFI MAP EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8L V8 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford Explorer X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford Aerostar U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford X 4 0L V6 MFI EEC IV DCL Ford Windstar U 3 0L V6
12. HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS YES START ENGINE TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN DONE YES DONE YES INITIALIZING WIGGLE TEST 6 SECONDS LATER EXIT WIGGLE TEST 00 IF DONE EXIT 14 FAULTS LATER FAULT ACTIVE WIGGLE TEST Em HEE TAE Lidl IF DONE EXIT 15 FAULTS LATER WIGGLE TEST 15 IF DONE EXIT EXIT DO KOEO TEST TO TURN IGNITION SEE FAULT CODES KEY OFF GENERATED FROM BEFORE WIGGLE TEST EXIT EXIT EXIT FIGURE 5 9 Wiggle Test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 113 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F7 CLEAR CONTINUOUS CODES This mode allows you to clear Continuous Codes from the ECA memory The following is a description of how Continuous Codes get into memory what to do when they are present and how to erase them Remember that service codes stored in the tester memory are not cleared when performing F7 CLEAR CONTINUOUS CODES During the F1 KOEO and F6 F0 OUTPUT STATE tests sensors within the EEC IV system are continuously monitored by the Electronic Control Assembly ECA Any hard fault detected is stored in the ECA memory as a Continuous Code Continuous Codes are automatically erased after 80 or 40 depending on vehicle engine temperature warm up cycles from the last time the fault was detected Continuous codes are displayed during the KOEO test and should only be used for diagnosis after a
13. parameters defined by Ford Motor Company can be displayed Sensors actuators and ECA operating modes to support these parameters must be present on the vehicle for the displayed data to be valid For example if a MAP sensor is not present the displayed value is 0 0 Hz ABNORMAL DATA If any parameter data appears abnormal please verify that the vehicle is equipped with the component sensor or actuator before concluding that the device is faulty DATA LIST PARAMETERS NUMERIC PARAMETERS 3 2 PRES SWITCH ON OFF Third Second 3 2 Pressure Switch is an input to the ECA about the transmission 3 2 hydraulic circuit The hydraulic switch changes ON OFF depending on pressure in the 3 2 hydraulic circuit 4 3 PRES SWITCH ON OFF Fourth Third 4 3 Pressure Switch is an input to the ECA about the transmission 4 3 hydraulic circuit The hydraulic switch changes ON OFF depending on pressure in the 4 3 hydraulic circuit 4X4 LOW SWITCH Diesel Engine ON OFF For vehicles that have 4 wheel drive 4X4 LOW SWITCH parameter displays the output from the PCM and tells if the vehicle is in 4X4 low or not A TO C PARAMETERS AIC CYCLE SW Diesel Engine ON OFF The A C Cycling switch cycles compressor operation before the external temperature of the A C evaporator core gets low enough to cause the condensed water vapor excess humidity to turn to 1ce It does this by monitoring low side line pressure This parameter states
14. Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 128 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS SUBMODE F0 OUTPUT STATE TEST The Output State test enables you to check output actuators within the EEC IV system This test is available on EEC IV systems only after the last slow code has been received in the KOEO test The actual test involves fully depressing and releasing the throttle to change the state of all output solenoids at once You can then check to see if all actuators have changed state If not use a DVOM to trace back to where the activating circuit 1s failing NOTE Some vehicles use the Check Engine lamp or other dash lamps to show that the solenoids changed state Other vehicles such as some Continentals only change state once per test To select Output State do the following 1 Press to enter the OBD Controls mode from the Test Selection menu 2 Press G to select the Output State test 3 The tester goes through the KOEO tests receiving any slow codes sent by the EEC IV see Submode F1 Key On Engine Off Test on page 98 4 After all service codes have been received the screen informs you that GOOSING THROTTLE CHANGES STATE OF ENG ACTUATORS Fully depressing and releasing goosing the throttle changes the state of the output actuators from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF An asterisk in the lower right corner of the screen indicates the status change each time the throttle is goosed
15. 7 When you finish reviewing and decoding service codes press 419 8 TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT is displayed Turn the key off then press again This takes you back to the Test Selection menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 101 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST vA F0 PREP VEHICLE F1 K ON ENG OFF F3 K ON ENG RUN HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS YES TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN DONE YES PRESS SPEED CONTROL ON AVOID THROTTLE ON PRESSED PRESS SPEED CNTL OFF COAST ACCEL amp RESUME BUTTONS TAP BRAKES ONCE IVSC koeo X 0 11 AFTER ALL 1 FAST CODES ARE TRANSMITTED IVSC koeo yA 1ST CODE 1 FORD PPT PASS MITCHELL PASS TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT FIGURE 5 5 IVSC KOEO Page 102 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Ga Enter the Cruise Control Tests menu Do IVSC engine off tests YES Confirm that a test initialization action has been completed Move cursor left o Move cursor right Show next code received Stop auto display or show previous code Return to Test Selection menu SUBMODE F2 CHECK TIMING The Check Timing test is available on all Ford vehicles with EEC IV controllers and not on vehicles with an MCU or ISC E controller The Ford 1981 2004 Powertrain Application supports two versions of
16. Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Make sure that only one master cartridge 15 installed in the tester Remove all cartridges and see if MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING message is displayed If it is try installing another master cartridge APPLICATION CARTRIDGE NOT RECOGNIZED OR MALFUNCTIONING MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING Most Likely Cause Master cartridge is not installed Other Possible Causes Master cartridge is malfunctioning Recommendations Verify that a master cartridge is installed Disconnect then reconnect the power cord Clean contacts on master cartridge connector with alcohol Try a different master cartridge Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 197 Wrong Display after Power Is Applied B If You re Having a Problem WRONG DISPLAY AFTER POWER IS APPLIED ALL 81 86 ECM ALL 87 90 ECM PLUS SELECT SELECT MODEL YEAR 198 MODEL YEAR 19 Most Likely Cause Wrong master cartridge is installed Other Possible Causes Cartridge is mislabeled Recommendations Install 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain application Try another cartridge KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY LOCKED OR PROGRAM INTERMITTENTLY RETURNS TO TITLE SCREEN FORD POWERTRAIN 1981 2004 v X X ENTER Most Likely Cause fusing cigarette lighter for power the vehicle is intermittently turning off cigarette lighter during ig
17. 3 Vehicle Coverage 2002 FORD PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL Sth amp 6th VIN 8th ENGINE TYPE LINK CONFIG Taurus P5 2 3 0L 2V V6 FFV EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Mustang P4 4 3 8L V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang GT P4 X 4 6L 2V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Mustang P4 V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Cobra MAF Crown P7 4 6L V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Victoria MAF 9 4 6L V8 CNG EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF Thunderbird P6 A 3 9L SFI MAF PTEC SCP OBD II C2 2002 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODE 5th amp 6th VIN 8th ENOTNE TYPE LINK CONFIG Continental M9 V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Towncar M8 4 6L 2V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF LS M8 S 3 0L SFI MAF PTEC SCP OBD II C2 3 9L SFI MAF PTEC SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 58 3 Vehicle Coverage 2002 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL E INE 9 5th amp 6th VIN 8th LINK CONFIG Cougar M6 3 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Sable M5 S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI EEC V
18. 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Ga Enter the Cruise Tests menu Do IVSC engine running tests Confirm that a test initialization action has been completed YES Move cursor left o Move cursor right Show next code received Stop auto display or show previous code Return to Test Selection menu SUBMODE F4 WIGGLE TESTS The Wiggle Test is used to detect faulty wiring connectors and intermittently operating sensors associated with the EEC IV engine controllers The test can be done with the engine either off or on By wiggling wires and connections and tapping lightly on sensors intermittent wiring problems may be located You should do the Wiggle Tests when directed to do so by a Pinpoint Test or after KOEO Timing Check and KOER codes have been corrected If any Continuous codes remain unfixed or you think something 15 intermittently malfunctioning use these clues as a beginning point for the Wiggle Test During wiggling the intermittent faults result in an output pulse on the STO line The tester highlights these pulses with a FAULT display The tester also displays a count of all wiggle pulses If faults are detected rerun KOEO and read the Continuous codes to determine which system caused the wiggle faults The Pinpoint Test then helps you determine which part of the system 15 faulty NOTE A few vehicles such as the 1989 Merkur do not save C
19. The Barometric Absolute BARO Pressure is an indication of current atmospheric pressure that the ECA uses to determine altitude In some cases the BARO value is updated during key on engine off Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter 1s pressure related BARO P Diesel Engine UNITS RANGE ECA PSI 14 16 EEC V Barometric Pressure is a variable capacitance sensor that measures barometric pressure so that the PCM can determine altitude then calculating proper injection timing and quantity Barometric Pressure is also used to calculate glow plug on time Expected values for this parameter are 14psi KOEO and 14psi while driving with low to medium load Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter 1s pressure related Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 219 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions BARO V Diesel Engine Volts 0 5V Barometric Pressure sensor measures ambient pressure allowing the PCM to compensate for altitudes The PCM uses this information to calculate injection timing and glow plug control Note that the V in parenthesis indicates the parameter is voltage related With 1999 1 2 model year trucks the BARO sensor is no longer a stand alone component but has been incorporated into the PCM as a calculated value BRAKE PRESS SW ON OFF EEC V Brake Pressure Applied Switch is a pressure switch used to determine brake pressure as a result from t
20. To select Freeze Frame Data do the following 1 Press al to select Quick Test from the Select Test menu 2 Press a3 to select Freeze Frame Data 3 WAITING FOR DATA appears followed by Freeze Frame data information If an error or reminder message appears perform the action presented by the display refer to the error screen definition within this section of the manual 4 Use the and keys to scroll through the parameters The data can be displayed as described in the Mode FO Data List description of this manual 5 The diagnostic data parameters can be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible serial printer Refer to the tester operator s manual if you are using the MTS 3100 or Tech 1A If you are using a Tech 1 refer to the RS232C I F Operator s Manual 6 Press IB to return to the Test Mode Menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 148 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F3 CHECK TIMING F4 KOER F5 FREEZE DATA FRZ FRAME DTC P1504 ENGINE SPEED 489 RPM ENGINE LOAD 63 1 ECT 92 C VEHICLE SPEED 0 KPH FUEL STATUS B1 OPEN LOOP More Freeze Data FIGURE 5 24 Freeze Frame Data ACTIVE KEYS FREEZE FRAME DATA MODE NO Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs G Select Freeze Frame Dat
21. YES NO MITCHELL D13 1 YES TIMING OK NOW DO KOER TEST EXIT FIGURE 5 6 Timing Check 1981 91 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 104 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 4 The tester now displays HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS and START ENGINE Answer to both of these displays when the action is completed 5 The display changes to AWAITING CODES When the KOER codes are received they are displayed on the screen Follow all of the prompts during the test as described in KOER Submode Key On Engine Running Test on page 106 This reduces the time it takes to read the KOER slow codes prior to rechecking the timing 6 After the last KOER code is transmitted you are prompted to recheck the timing If operating properly the EEC IV has advanced the timing 17 to 23 degrees more than the base timing you just measured Remember that anything that was disconnected to measure base timing needs to be reconnected When you are finished press If you do not finish checking the timing within 2 minutes the tester shows a new display indicating that the timing advance has stopped This is because the EEC IV controller does not advance timing indefinitely By pressing you can repeat the timing advance portion of the test starting at Step 4 Pressing Qe puts the tester into the Test Selection mode 7 After reading the timing advance you are again asked if the engine stalled This is the same as Step
22. or E To respond when the tester asks for information just press the appropriate key on the tester keypad Although there are exceptions pressing 241 generally takes you back to the previous screen or to the beginning of a process Please read Chapter 2 before beginning diagnostics for the first time Table of Contents 1 FORD POWERTRAIN APPLICATION DESCRIPTION 1 FORD 1981 2004 POWERTRAIN APPLICATION FEATURES 2 PUES oae didus VEHICLE COVERAGE SUMMARY 3 OPERATING MODES eria erret m cm ORE Rr k ree 4 Dag Dist E a cruces t bad rob bs dud ate ead bed esq he duh quis 4 C ONS ke Akad SEALER he eee bh de dds 4 BAGUE d DEW eee Ra 5 dda dad dad dei 5 OBD LOSS Mode Wadd Ded odes dob edoke ded 5 POPNOW 2244 bab Ld ead POR 6 DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY cece scene eed dade todas hee uo de en 7 GENERAL KEY FUNCTIONS nude better ble E b ER een addled 9 TESTS AVAILABLE occ dies cn t de e ade eae pc eat 10 2 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS AO E RR dene 12 INTRODUCTION s nh2d0eacheau hia ceed ea hehe n duci erre e ORO queden 12 PRECAUTIONS FOR ALL APPLICATIONS luas e eR ne eh ba 12 Protect Against Reverse
23. ENG COOL TEMP XXX X INTAKE AIR TEMP XXX X More Data List Parameters FIGURE 5 2 Data List Mode Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 94 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes VIEWING ECA DIAGNOSTIC DATA PARAMETERS In order to maximize the information that can be seen at one time the Tech 1 displays data parameters in preassigned pairs The first data pair is displayed after you press a You can scroll through the Data List with the and keys See Create Your Own Data Pairs for creating your own data pairs with the and keys To see other preassigned pairs press either the or key The key causes the Tech 1 to scroll forward through the list of preassigned pairs while the Qe key causes scrolling backwards Appendix D contains descriptions of all engine data parameters CREATE YOUR OWN DATA PAIRS You can create data parameter pairs which are different from the preassigned pairs Any two parameters can be displayed as a pair by simply scrolling either the bottom or top display parameter while the other display parameter is fixed To fix the top parameter press a and an asterisk appears by the fixed parameter Press to fix the lower parameter The Tech 1 does not allow both the top and bottom parameters to be fixed at the same time As an example let s say you wish to create a pair with ENGINE SPEED and BRAKE SWITCH To do so scroll through the preassigned pairs with the and key
24. Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 43 3 Vehicle Coverage 1996 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Continental V 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC IV SCP OBD II C2 Mark VIII V 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC IV SCP OBD II C2 Town Car W 4 6L V8 2V SFI EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 1996 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Tracer J 1 9L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mystique 3 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Sable U 3 0L V6 2V SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 3 0L V6 4V SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Cougar 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L V8 2V SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Grand Marquis W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 1996 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Ranger A 2 3L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Bronco N 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 H 5 8L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Explorer X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 P 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Aerostar U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Windstar U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 44 3 Vehicle Coverage 19
25. ZAD to return to the code screen Used to move the cursor left or right to service code you would like to decode to Pinpoint YES lt G9 Test in Star Mode and to cycle select engine Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 9 Tests Available 1 Ford Powertrain Application Description TESTS AVAILABLE The application is capable of performing the following diagnostic tests on vehicles equipped with EEC V EEC IV ISC E and MCU engine controllers Cruise Antilock Brake Systems and Air Suspension Systems ENGINE CONTROLLER TESTS MCU ISC E EEC IV TEST MODE MCU ISC E EEC IV Data List Select 1989 98 vehicles gt Quick Tests Prepare Vehicle KOEO X Check Timing KOER X X Wiggle Tests Clear Continuous DTCs Review DTCs Print Summary x x X X X X X x gt Snapshot Select 1989 98 vehicles OBD Controls Output State Cylinder Balance SFI SEFI engines ENGINE CONTROLLER TESTS EEC V amp PTEC SYSTEMS TEST MODE EEC V Data List Select 1994 2004 Vehicles Quick Tests Prep Vehicle Gas Engine Continuous DTC KOEO Check Timing KOER Freeze Data Clear Continuous DTC Review DTCs Print Summary x KKK X X X X x gt x Snapshot Select 1994 2004 vehicles Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 10 Tests Available 1 Ford Powertrain Application Description ENGINE CONTROLLER TESTS EEC V amp PTEC SYSTEMS
26. 15 PCM Keep Alive Memory KAM test failed 16 RPM too low to perform HO2S test 18 SPOUT circuit open Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 202 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions PASSENGER CAR DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 18 IDM circuit failure SPOUT circuit grounded 19 Failure in PCM internal voltage 21 ECT or Flex Fuel sensor out of Self Test range 22 MAP BARO out of Self Test range 23 TP out of Self Test range 24 IAT out of Self Test range 26 MAF out of Self Test range 29 Insufficient input from the Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS 31 EVP circuit below minimum voltage 32 EVP voltage below closed limit 33 EGR valve opening not detected 34 EVP voltage above closed limit 35 EVP circuit above maximum voltage 41 HO2S circuit indicates system lean right HO2S 41 No HO2S switch detected right HO2S 42 HO2S circuit indicates system rich right HO2S 44 Secondary Air Injection system inoperative right side 45 Secondary Air Injection upstream during Self Test 46 Secondary Air Injection not bypassed during Self Test 51 ECT indicated 40 C 40 F circuit open 53 TP circuit above maximum voltage 54 IAT indicated 40 C 40 F circuit open 56 MAF circuit above maximum voltage 61 ECT indicated 123 C 254 F circuit grounded 63 TP circuit below minimum voltage 64 IAT indicated 123 C 254 F circuit grounded 6
27. 529 Data Communication Link DCL or PCM circuit failure 532 Cluster Control Assembly CCA circuit failure 533 Data Communication Link DCL or Electronic Instrument Cluster EIC circuit failure 536 Brake On Off BOO circuit failure not actuated during KOER 538 Insufficient RPM change during KOER dynamic response test Invalid cylinder balance test due to throttle movement during test SFI only or CID circuit failure 539 A C on Defrost on during Self Test or Neutral Drive Switch NDS circuit OPEN 542 Fuel pump secondary circuit failure or Fuel Pump circuit OPENPCM to motor ground 543 Fuel pump secondary circuit failure or Fuel Pump circuit OPENBattery to PCM 551 Idle Air Control circuit failure 552 Secondary Air Injection Bypass circuit failure or Air Management 1 AM1 circuit failure 553 Secondary Air Injection Diverter AIRD circuit failure 554 Fuel Pressure Regulator Control FPRC circuit failure 556 Fuel pump relay primary circuit failure 557 Low speed fuel pump primary circuit failure 558 EGR Vacuum Regulator EVR circuit failure Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 207 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions PASSENGER CAR DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 559 Air Conditioning On ACON relay circuit failure 563 High Fan Control HFC or High Speed Electro Drive Fan HEDF circuit failure 564 Fan Contr
28. A C systems N A O2 sensor YES MONITOR STATUS t O2S Heater YES EGR systems YES FIGURE 5 36 OBD II Monitor CTIVE KEYS G Select OBD Monitor Scroll through displayed data parameters Return to Test Mode menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 189 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 Diagnostic System Diagnostic System mode displays the type of OBD or system for the vehicle The different systems are OBD I OBD II OBD II California ARB OBD Federal EPA or OBD and OBD II To select Diagnostic System do the following 1 Press G to select the INFORMATION from the Select Test menu 2 Press G to select INFO mode from the Select Information menu 3 Press to select DIAG SYSTEM mode from OBD Information Select Information menu The tester displays the On Board Diagnostic system available for the vehicle 4 Press CB to return to the OBD Information Select Information menu SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION SELECT INFO F1 DLC LOCATION F2 OBD INFO F4 VEHICLE INFO SELECT INFO F0 MIL STATUS F1 OBD MONITOR F2 DIAG SYSTEM VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH OBD II CARB SYSTEM FIGURE 5 37 Diagnostic System Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 190 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F4 VEHICLE INFORMATION The Vehicle Information mode provides information about the vehicle This i
29. Begin process of erasing stored STAR codes Does not erase codes stored in the vehicle YES Erase codes if in ERASE CODES query From ERASE CODES return to the code display Scroll code lines up ED Scroll code lines down Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 124 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The Snapshot test mode provides a diagnostic data parameter storage feature on Ford s Diagnostic Communication Link DCL Using Snapshot can help to isolate intermittent circuit failure or invalid component operation in the service bay or out on a road test Once the Snapshot is saved in the tester the DCL diagnostic data parameters can be reviewed later for Snapshot replay or hardcopy print options To start the Snapshot process the tester waits for a keypress But first you should select the trigger point The 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain Application has the capability to start a Snapshot sequence at the beginning center or end of data capture If you set up your trigger point to match the type of driveability fault that you are observing this function can be a great diagnostic time saver After the data has been captured you can scroll through all of the stored data for display Data parameters are displayed in a manner identical to that of the Data List mode You can also specify the data sample you wish to display In addition the 1981 2004
30. CONTINUED TEST MODE EEC V OBD Controls Gas Engine All On All Off Low Speed Fan High Speed Fan Idle Speed EGR Evap Purge O2 B1 S1 Htr O2 S2 Htr O2 B2 S1 Htr O2 B2 S2 Htr OBD Controls Transmission Shift Sol 1 Shift Sol 2 Shift Sol 3 Shift Sol 4 TCC Lockup OBD Controls 7 3L Powerstroke Diesel Output State Glow Plug Injector Buzz Cylinder Balance Switch Test Hi Speed Fan x x x x KK KK x gt x gt x x x x gt x x x x Information DLC Location MIL Status OBD II Monitors Diagnostic System VIN if available Configuration if available x x x x gt INTEGRATED VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL TEST Engine Off X Engine Running X MAZDA ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM AND 4EAT TRANSAXLE STAR TEST MODE MODE Engine Off X Engine Running X Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 11 2 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS INTRODUCTION This chapter explains precautions that are very important when using Vetronix testers and application software with a vehicle Failure to observe these precautions could affect the operation of the tester the accuracy of data and tests and at times your safety Read all of this chapter before you operate the tester and application software cartridges Safeguards have been built into the tester to protect you the vehicle and the tester from any hazards Misuse or improper securing of the vehicle could lead to unsafe conditions PR
31. Clear Continuous Codes ACTIVE KEYS Select Clear Continuous Codes from the Test Selection menu YES Confirm that requested test sequence is done Return to Test Selection menu SUBMODE F8 REVIEW SERVICE CODES DECODE TO PINPOINT TESTS IVSC This function enables you to review service code number and title plus provides service code to Pinpoint Test decoding The tester stores all service codes recorded while performing KOEO includes Continuous KOER IVSC and STAR tests The tester has the capability to review Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs obtained in the Quick Test Mode or DTCs obtained in the STAR MODE To review codes obtained in the STAR Mode press af from the QUICK TESTS test selection menu then a from the REVIEW and DECODE menu To review codes obtained in the QUICK TESTS mode press G from the QUICK TESTS test selection menu then from the REVIEW and DECODE menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 115 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes In F1 Quick Test code review press a to change the code type from KOER KOEO and CONTINUOUS and answer the IS ENGINE RUNNING ROUGH screen with a or reply this changes the pinpoint strategy Then use Ge and 9 to move through the KOER KOEO and CONTINUOUS code displays to view other codes See the following procedure for more guidance Note that when the Output State test 15 run KOEO codes are updated since you must ru
32. Codes stored in the tester memory are erased by pressing E and selecting to the query ERASE CODES If you erase codes all code lines are erased at once returning you to the code screen with lines 0 and 1 visible and blank You may want to do this before testing any new vehicle so codes from the previous vehicle tested are not confused with codes from the present vehicle tests This function has no effect on any Continuous codes saved within the ECA 7 Pressing 248 once or twice depending on the present display allows you to return to the Test Mode Menu 8 Decoding of service codes to Pinpoint Tests is possible in the STAR MODE Simply do your Quick Tests in the STAR MODE then exit from the STAR MODE and enter the Quick Test Mode then select Review Codes Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 123 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SERVICE CODE DISPLAYS FAST SLOW CODES TOGGLE TEST HOLD BUTTON STAR TESTER TECH 1 FIGURE 5 15 Tester Service Code Display NOTE Remember that the Star Mode emulates a Star II tester If you need help on how to read DTCs in the Star Mode for any Ford system the diagnostic procedures in the Ford Service Manual can be followed ACTIVE KEYS EXIT Return to Test Mode menu or return to Help menu Go to the codes display Toggle STI line between TEST and HOLD Star Tester push button Toggle between reading fast and slow service codes
33. Powertrain Control Emission Diag nostics manual Powertrain Control Module Positive Crankcase Ventilation Crankcase fumes are vented to the combustion chambers to reduce emis sions Pressure Feedback Pressure Feedback EGR Valve Parameter ID Step by step directions to aid in diag nosing the unit responsible for caus ing an ECA to transmit a service code during a Quick Test Profile Ignition Pickup Park Neutral Position Pinpoint Test Prepare Pressure Power Steering Pounds per Square Inch Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 264 Glossary and Abbreviations PSIA PSIG PSOM PSP PSPS PTEC PW QCK TST Quick Test RCM REST ROM RPM RS 232 or RS232 RS232 I F Cartridge RSRVD RWD 5 SAE SC or S C SCP SCVAC SCVNT SEFI SFI Pounds per Square Inch Absolute Pounds per Square Inch Gauge Programmable Speedometer Odome ter Module Power Steering Pressure Power Steering Pressure Sensor Powertrain Electronic Control Mod ule Pulse Width Quick Test A diagnostic self test mode that an ECA can be forced to enter Intended to assist servicing and repair of elec trical systems in Ford vehicles Restraint Control Module Restrictor Right Front Read Only Memory Revolutions per Minute A serial data transmission standard between computers and accompany ing systems which uses one signal line for data An auxiliary cartridge that works in conjunct
34. XT W6 W7 210 HP Diesel 6 7 3L Navistar EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 210 HP Diesel Excursion U4 L 5 4L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 SFI MAF S 6 8L V10 SFI EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 MAF F 7 3L V8 TC EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 Diesel 2 6 8L SOHC EFI EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 NGV Blackwood WO A 5 4L 4V EFI V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Aviator U6 U7 U8 H 4 6L V8 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 65 3 Vehicle Coverage 2004 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2004 FORD PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL ENGINE 5th amp 6th VIN 8th METY TYPE LINK CONFIG Focus P3 P 2 0L SOHC 14 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SPI SFI MAF 3 2 0L DOHC 14 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Zetec SFI MAF Mustang P4 4 3 8L OHV V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang GT P4 X 4 6L DOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF Mustang Cobra P4 Y 4 6L V8 DOHC EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Supercharged SFI MAF Mustang Mach 1 P4 R 4 6L DOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 SFI MAF Crown Victoria P7 W 4 6L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI 9 4 6L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 NGV SFI MAF 2004 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEM Sth amp 6th VIN st ENGINE TYPE LINK CONFIG Towncar M8 4 6L 2V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 66 3 Vehicle Coverage 2004 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS
35. in the same diagnostic trouble code 6 Press Qp to return to the Select Test Menu 7 If a DTC is not applicable for a vehicle under test the message IS NOT A KNOWN DTC FOR THIS VEHICLE is displayed NOTE If a different vehicle is selected or the same vehicle is selected without using LAST VEH YES all Review DTCs information is erased Make sure to press from the select model year screen to select the last vehicle tested when reviewing DTCs from previous tests TEST RESULT ACTION OR REFERENCE IS NOT A KNOWN DTC FOR Diagnostic trouble code not applicable for the vehicle under test THIS VEHICLE IGNORE P1000 IN KOEO amp Ignore if DTC P1000 is received when performing KOEO and KOER tests KOER SELF TEST amp CONTINUE GO TO SERVICE MANUAL For diagnostic information refer to the Module Communication Network SECTION MOD COMM section of the Service Manual for the vehicle under test Applicable to NETWORK Ulxxx DTCs GO TO TRANS SERV MANUAL For diagnostic information refer to the Diagnosis By Symptom chart in the DIAGN BY SYMPTOM CHART Transmission Service Manual for the vehicle under test Applicable to P17xx DTCs G Selects Review DTCs from the Select Test menu Ga Selects Review and Decode Quick Test DTCs from the Review and Decode menu Scroll left or right when in DTC list screen Scroll or down when DTC list screen changes DTC information display Select te
36. or water pump housing Typical ECT is 200 F warm engine at idle Note that the degrees indicates the parameter is temperature related ENGINE LOAD 0 100 Engine load is derived by the ECU from a measure of current engine airflow divided by engine peak airflow Engine load directly increases with throttle angle and drive conditions and is an indicator of percent engine capacity in any given operating mode Engine load is typically 20 at engine idle and 8096 or greater during Wide Open Throttle warm engine ENGINE SPD RPM 0 8000 Engine Speed is an indication of crankshaft revolutions per minute The ECU uses input engine speed to make determinations about current engine operating conditions and the operation of various engine management system output components FRZ FRAME DTC DTC NUMBER Freeze Frame DTC is the type and number of the DTC that caused Freeze Frame data to be stored in the vehicle Powertrain Control Module PCM Examples are DTC P0500 or DTC P1549 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 243 Freeze Frame Parameter Descriptions D Data List Parameter Descriptions FUEL STATUS B1 FUEL STATUS B2 STATES OPEN LOOP CLOSED LOOP OL DRIVE OL FAULT CL FAULT RSRVD UNUSED Fuel Status Bank 1 Bank 2 represents fuel control status of the feedback loop between the vehicle ECU and the oxygen sensor The states of fuel status can be Open Loop OL Closed Loop CL Open Loop due to vehicle being D
37. to obtain engine temperature information On these applications the Powertrain Control Module supports the CHT and CHT V diagnostic data parameters Refer to those parameters for reading engine temperature data To select Data List do the following 1 Press to select DATA LIST mode from the Test Mode Menu 2 The message WAITING FOR DATA appears After 6 10 seconds the SELECT DATA menu is displayed If an error or reminder message appears perform the action that is presented by the display refer to the communication error message screen definition within this section of the manual 3 Select one of the Data Lists Press Gf for ENGINE G for TRANSMISSION for FUEL or G for EMISSION Each Data List has different data parameters to view While in the Data List mode press to go to the next Data List 4 Select F0 ALL DATA or F1 CUSTOM LIST from the SELECT LIST menu If F1 CUSTOM LIST is selected choose the parameters for display and press The message BUILDING DATA LIST is displayed The tester displays either All Data parameters or Custom List parameters depending on which selection was made Refer to the Data List Setup section for instruction on how to select the data list next section Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 134 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 5 Use the and keys to scroll through the parameters 6 The diagnostic data parameters can be printed if the tester is con
38. 1 28 gt 1 25 0 45 gt lt 0 45 40s ae Digit muc 2nd Digit FIGURE E 2 Example of MECS AEAT KOEO KOER Service Codes Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 252 Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics E 9 FORD ADAPTER The Ford Adapter allows the standard cable to operate with Ford ECAs This adapter connects to Ford s 6 and 7 pin Self Test Connectors Table E 3 shows how the Ford Adapter connects the DLC cable to the Ford vehicle DLC CABLE FORD ADAPTER VEHICLE A rm ls VEHICLE GROUND Masses rm STO men E 4 STI 6 PIN pa ane TE STI 7 PIN TABLE E 3 Tester to Ford Vehicle Electrical Connection E 10 USING JUMPER CABLES TO CONNECT MECS VEHICLES TO THE TESTER CAUTION Be careful not to touch any jumpers to the pin marked VPWR as damage to the tester may result DATA STI FUEL PUMP GND FIGURE E 3 Standard Connection DATA GND FIGURE E 4 1 9L with 4EAT Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 253 Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics DATA GND DATA GND FIGURE E 6 1 8L with 4EAT MECS Jumpers E 11 MECS JUMPER CONNECTIONS FESTIVA PROBE TRACER CAPRI When connecting jumper wires to a Festiva Probe Tracer or Capri it is possible to connect to the incorrect STI connector This is because the STI connector is NOT the connector closes
39. 2 5L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 48 3 Vehicle Coverage 1998 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Sable U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 3 0L 2V V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Grand Marquis w 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 1998 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS 8TH DATA VEHICLE ENGINE ECA ADAPTER VIN NGINES s LINK Ranger 2 5L 14 SFI SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF SCP OBD II C2 X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF SCP OBD II C2 Explorer X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Explorer E 4 0LSOHC V6 SFIMAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mountaineer P 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Expedition W 4 6L SOHC V8 SFIMAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Navigator L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFIMAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E F Series 2 4 2L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 6 4 6L SOHC V8 SFIMAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 4 6L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFIMAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 M 5 4L SOHC V8 NGV SCP OBD II C2 F 7 3L TC Diesel SCP OBD II C2 S 6 8LSOHC V10 SFIMAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 F Series H 5 8L V8 SFI MAF8 EEC V SCP OBD II OBD II Cll H b EEC IV DCL Ford 5 8L V8 MFI MAR E oL Bale G 7 0L V8 MFI MAP EEC V SCP OBD 1 2 G 7 5L V8 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford G 7 5L V8 SFI MAP EEC IV DCL Fo
40. 255 Transmission Oil Temperature TOT displays the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid Available on selected Ford vehicles only the TOT can be used to determine proper transmission operation TOTAL CYL EVENTS Counts 0 65535 Total Cyl Events displays a count of the total number of cylinder misfire events TP MODE CLOSED PARTIAL EEC V Wide Open Throttle WOT Error Throttle Position TP Mode displays the operating mode of the throttle position sensor the sensor range is divided into three operating modes The three modes are Closed Partial Wide Open Throttle WOT and Error Error occurs when the PCM cannot determine the current TP position from the TPS data Normal values are Closed at engine idling Partial during cruise operation and WOT for wide open throttle TPS V AP SENSOR V Volts 0 5 Throttle Position TP Gasoline engine and Accelerator Pedal AP Diesel engine Sensor are voltage inputs to the ECA and represent throttle position TP or AP sensor voltage changes with the movement of the accelerator pedal Typical TP sensor voltage at idle is below 1 volt Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 239 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions TPS MODE STATES CLOSED PARTIAL WOT Throttle Position Sensor TPS Mode displays the operating mode of the throttle position sensor closed partial and wide open throttle WOT TR SELECTOR PARK REVERS
41. 3 8 You are then asked if the timing advanced 17 to 23 degrees If it did not press Qe and the appropriate Pinpoint Test is displayed Press if the timing advanced properly 9 If the timing advance operated properly you are prompted to continue the Quick Test procedures by doing the Key On Engine Running KOER test Press dip to return to the Test Selection menu NOTE If the Check Timing passes and you get a passing KOER code 11 there is EH no need to do KOER the next test To select Check Timing 1992 1998 vehicles do the following 1 Select Check Timing test by pressing from the test selection menu 2 The tester display indicates the type of test DI or EI sequence EI systems do not have adjustable timing After performing the request on each display press 11959 to advance each screen 3 For DI equipped engines the tester asks you if the timing changed from initial check Press or C depending on your result 4 If there is a check timing problem the tester displays which section of the Ford s Powertrain Control and Emission Diagnosis manual to reference Press to return to the Quick Test selection menu s ACTIVE KEYS Return to test menus or iilii Confirm that a test query is true or that a prompt for action has been completed o Confirm that a test query is false Select Timing Check test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 105
42. 4 2L V6 SFI EECV SCP OBD II C2 FO F1 F2 MAF A W 46L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF L 5 4LSOHCV8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF M 54LSOHCV8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 NGV SFI MAF F 73LV8 TC EEC V SCP OBD II C2 DIESEL E Series E2 52 6 4 6L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 3 SFI MAF S 6 8LV10SFI_ EECV SCP OBD II C2 MAF F Series Super F2 F3 F4 L 54LSOHCV8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 Duty Bi Fuel F5 F6 F7 SFI MAF L S W2 3 S 6 8LVIOSFI EECV SCP OBD II C2 WA W5 W6 cea W7 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 5 7 3L Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 7 3L V8 TC EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Diesel 7 5 4 SFIMAF EECV SCP OBD II C2 Bi Fuel 7 3L EECV SCP OBD II C2 Windstar A5 3 8L V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF F Series FO 3 5 4L Super EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Lightning Charged V8 Harley Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 60 3 Vehicle Coverage 2002 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL 5th amp 6th VIN 8th ENGINE TYPE LINK CONFIG Excursion U4 L 5 4L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF S 6 8L V10 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF F 7 3L V8 TC EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Diesel Blackwood WO A 5 4L SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 61 3 Vehicle Coverage 2003 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2003 FORD PASSENGER CARS
43. 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F3 KEY ON ENGINE RUNNING TEST The Key On Engine Running Test KOER is a Quick Test that checks for engine faults during actual operating conditions This test is available for engines with EEC IV MCU and ISC E engine controllers Where KOEO and Timing Check are available KOER should be done after the vehicle passes these preceding tests If you want results from both KOER and Cylinder Balance tests do the Cylinder Balance test then review KOER results from the Review Codes function To select KOER Test do the following The following description is for an EEC IV engine controller Some prompts vary for 4 6 and 8 cylinder MCUs but the procedure is very similar The prompts are related to specific features that change from vehicle to vehicle Not all vehicles request a Dynamic Response N A Do not touch the throttle unless instructed to do so This can result in unwanted service codes Select test from the Test Selection menu by pressing az Answer to prompts for warming the engine turning the ignition off and starting the engine when each is done It is important to warm the engine sufficiently to assure that the exhaust manifold oxygen sensor is operating correctly Press after the engine is running The tester uses these prompts to assure that the KOER test is initiated properly AWAITING CODES is the next
44. A EEC IV DCL Ford Mark VII E 5 0L SEFI H O EEC IV None Ford Town Car W 4 6L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford a 2 valve engine only 1991 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Tracer J 1 9L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Topaz X 2 3L EFI HSC BASE EEC IV None Ford S 2 3L EFI HSC PLUS EEC IV None Ford Sable 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD EEC IV DCL Ford Cougar 4 3 8L SEFI RWD EEC IV DCL Ford R 3 8L SC SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford T 5 0L SEFI H O M A EEC IV DCL Ford Grand Marquis 4 6L SEFI EEC IV None Ford F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV None Ford F 5 0L SEFI M A EEC IV None Ford G 5 8L CARB MCU None Ford 1991 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Ranger A 2 3L EFl OHC M A EEC IV DCL Ford T 2 9L EFI EEC IV None Ford U 3 0L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford x 4 0L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Bronco Y 4 9L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford Explorer x 4 0L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Aerostar U 3 0L EFI EEC IV None Ford X 4 0L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 34 3 Vehicle Coverage 1991 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS VEHICLE E F Series VIN G c Z lt ENGINES 4 9L EFI 5 0L EFI 5 8L EFI 7 01 EFI 7 3L Diesel 7 51 EFI ECA EEC IV EEC IV EEC IV EEC IV EEC IV EEC IV DA
45. Command Switch Voltage is the voltage value that is input to the ECA Since speed control systems have different settings on off set resume depending on what setting the speed control switch is in a different voltage value is sent to the ECA Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 235 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions S C CMD SW V Diesel Engine Volts 0 10 EEC V Speed Control Command Switch voltage is a representation of the momentary speed control switch position Approximate expected values for this parameter are 6 59 volts with no switch depressed 10 00 volts with On depressed 4 64 volts with Resume depressed 2 80 volts with Accel depressed 0 77 volts with Coast depressed and 0 01 volts with Off depressed S C COMMAND SW ON PUSH SWITCH EEC V RESUME ACCEL COAST OFF Speed Control Command Switch is a state representation of the momentary speed control switch position Approximate expected values for this parameter are Push Switch with no switch depressed On with On switch depressed Resume with Resume switch depressed Accel with Accel switch depressed Coast with Coast switch depressed and Off with Off switch depressed S C ENGINE SPD RPM 0 5000 EEC V Speed Control Engine Speed is a measurement of the engine speed required to maintain the current cruise control conditions This value is dependent on cruise control operation and displays 0 RPM when cruise is not engage
46. Control Air suspension control module Automatic Transmission Atmospheric Pressure Ford automatic transaxle with over drive Ford electronic transaxle with over drive Barometric Barometer Brake On or Off switch Vehicle spark timing before top dead center Continuous Codes California Controller Area Network Canister Purge Auxiliary Canister Purge California Air Resource Board A Tech 1 module that contains vehi cle specific software or other special ized features Cluster Control Assembly Converter Clutch Control Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 261 Glossary and Abbreviations CCS CES CFI CHK CHT CID CL CMD CNG CONN CONT CPP CSI CTE Cursor CYL BAL Cylinder Balance Test CYLIN DER ID Cylinder Identifica tion Code DC DCL DEP REL DI Display DJC DLC Coast Clutch Solenoid Clutch Engage Switch Central Fuel Injection Check Cylinder Head Temperature Cylinder Identification Closed Loop Command Compressed Natural Gas Connector Continuous Clutch Pedal Position Cold Start Injector Closed Throttle Position To move up down left or right on a display Typically a highlighted ser vice code is being changed Cylinder Balance Test A Quick Test available on EEC IV engine with SEFI systems The test is available after KOER codes have been transmitted The test determines the operating state of each fuel injec tor Cylinder Iden
47. DTCs read from the PCM the and keys change the DTC information display saves time from exiting out Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 178 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes selecting another DTC then entering back in Pressing EXIT returns you to the Glow Plug Key On Engine Running On Demand OD DTC list screen Pressing EXIT again returns you to the Test Selection menu 8 When you are finished decoding the service codes press You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT Turn the ignition key off then press again to return to the Test Selection Menu 9 If no messages are received within approximately 60 seconds an error message is displayed with a Pinpoint Test number to perform refer to error screen definition within this section of the manual 10 If operating properly the PCM runs through a series of glow plug circuit tests and then begins DTC transmission ACTIVE KEYS Return to Test Selection Menu Advance through test screens or change to DTC description display YES Confirm that requested test sequence has been finished and page down when in DTC number screen Scroll left or right when in DTC list screen Scroll up or down when in DTC list screen or changes to DTC information display Ga Select Glow Plug Test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 179 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F2 INJECTOR BUZZ TEST Perf
48. Data List EXIT Return to Test Mode menu DATA LIST SETUP The data list can be set up to view All Data parameters or Custom List parameters The two types of data list set up are defined as follows F0 ALL DATA The selection of F0 ALL DATA monitors all of the diagnostic data parameters available from the PCM Depending on the number of diagnostic data parameters in the data list the update rate can be 3 seconds or longer F1 CUSTOM LIST The selection of F1 CUSTOM LIST displays a list of parameters from which to select F1 CUSTOM LIST parameters allows you to select any combination of diagnostic data parameters to monitor from one parameter to all parameters A single parameter can be sampled at a high rate and selecting more parameters reduces the update rate Parameters are selected by scrolling through the list using and keys and then pressing and to select and deselect the listed parameter When the parameters have been selected press to go to the display mode The tester remembers the selected parameters until another vehicle is selected or the tester is powered down so you won t have to re select them every time If a different vehicle is selected or the same vehicle is selected without NOTE using LAST VEH YES all parameters selected in Custom List are erased Make sure to press from the select model year screen to select the last vehicle tested to keep the current Custom List parameter set
49. EECV Fuel Temperature Bank 1 Bank 2 is a thermistor voltage input to the PCM It represents the thermistor voltage signal which indicates the temperature of the fuel contained inside the fuel system This information is used for alternative fueled Ford vehicles and may not appear on every Ford vehicle Note that the V in parenthesis indicates the parameter is voltage related FUEL TEMP B1 FUEL TEMP 2 Degrees F 0 240 EEC V Fuel Temperature Bank 1 Bank 2 is a temperature value based on a thermistor voltage input to the PCM It represents the temperature of the fuel contained inside the fuel system This information is used for alternative fueled Ford vehicles and may not appear on every Ford vehicle Note that the in parenthesis indicates the parameter 1s temperature related FUEL TNK SNSR V FUEL TNK SNSR P UNITS RANGE ECA H20 16 EEC V Volts 0 5 EEC V Fuel Tank Voltage V is a reading of the pressure in the fuel tank supply system that is measured by a transducer Fuel Tank Pressure P is a gage measure of the pressure in the fuel tank supply system Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter is pressure related and the V in parenthesis indicates the parameter is voltage related G TO I PARAMETERS GLOW PLUG CNTRL s on 0 50 EEC V Glow Plug Control represents the ON time that the glow plug relay is being energized by the PCM The Glow Plug Control is an output con
50. EEEE 121 Connection to Electronic Suspension MECS and 4EAT Systems 121 uuo go sae beh ny eget cen 121 MODE SNAPSHOT ERROR n DIC Uma ord 125 Selecting Snapshot Mode EA HORREA EROR TERED 125 MODE FA OBD CONTROLS llulla sapa yaa yusa CREER da Ernte ec erras 129 Sube TE ONON SIGS TENE dias kid Hale n BSH CEN CR CAT aA eT eae 129 Submode Fir Cylinder Balance Test ee do dd qaa ka 131 EEC V Test Modes 14 hie ives cera thee Tux VERRE ARAM E RE E Rd 134 MODE FO DATA UST HU Rel ob e ir tcp 134 Ford SCP Diagnostie Data Parameter Noles biden sta AR REA RA RA AE 134 JANE DI l hw Bubs 136 Viewing PCM Diagnostic Data Parameters a bh AAA REL RA E EE 136 PRONE DGGE Qusquq aqusapa passa Ree m den cud dudo odd d quce Ed Ea ded ped Me qd 137 NIGDE PACK TEST RUE EIS HT Rr tete Renee 138 Submode F0 Prepare Vehicle and Engine ssec 138 Fi Continuons DIC JO caniesdgxesdas dad apap dadqedR e Een Kei weed 140 oubmode F2 Key On Engine OG Test s Rar EAR Cale ua 142 Aubmode F3 Check TOMBE carteri rkt ue ENG ERR ROI RUE 145 Submode F4 Key On Engine Running Test 146 Submode F5 Freeze Frame Data Ford SCP oo
51. ENG COOL TEMP 40 40 F ENGINE SPEED ORPM 3 4 The sample time display gives the time in seconds relative to the trigger sample at which the tester received the currently displayed sample For example a sample time of 3 4 means the sample was received 3 4 seconds after the trigger sample A sample time of 0 6 seconds means the sample was received 0 6 seconds before the trigger Pressing 1959 toggles between the sample index and sample time displays 11 The data parameters can be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible printer For instructions on connecting the printer to the tester and printing the data parameters refer to the tester operator s manual if you are using a Tech 1 or MTS 3100 If you are using a Tech 1 refer to the RS232C I F Operator s Manual 12 When you are finished viewing the sampled data press yp to return to the Snapshot options menu If you are finished with the SNAPSHOT mode press again to return to the test mode menu ACTIVE KEYS SNAPSHOT DATA REPLAY PHASE Scroll through displayed data parameters Scroll through selected samples G GD Fix top or bottom display parameter respectively Select Snapshot Replay Advance to first earliest sample G Advance to trigger sample sample 0 F6 Advance to last most recent sample Toggle between sample index and sample time display Return to trigger select menu
52. Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 TOC v 1 FORD POWERTRAIN APPLICATION DESCRIPTION The Ford Powertrain application is used to efficiently diagnose and troubleshoot the Powertrain Electronic Control Module PTEC Electronic Engine Control version 5 EEC V Electronic Engine Control version 4 EEC IV Microprocessor Control Unit MCU and Idle Speed Control Electronic ISC E Electronic Control Assemblies ECAs used in 1981 2004 computer equipped Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicles Additionally diagnostics for Integrated Vehicle Speed Control systems used on 1986 1995 Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicles are supported The application provides extensive test prompts and code reading capability for performing Quick Tests and other diagnostic tests on MCU EEC IV EEC V ISC E and cruise control IVSC Also this application supports STAR MODE diagnostics on vehicles with Mazda Engine Control System MECS and 4 Speed Electronic Automatic Transaxle 4 For instruction on ABS Electronic Suspension and Electronic Variable Orifice Steering Systems that can be diagnosed with this application please refer to the Ford Chassis application Operator s Manual In addition to MCU ISC E and EEC IV the Ford Powertrain application supports diagnosis on OBD II compliant EEC V electronic control units Refer to the Vehicle Coverage tables in Chapter 3 see the column titled ECA or ECU TYPE in the 1994 and newer passenger cars and trucks vans s
53. LIST from the SELECT LIST menu If Fl CUSTOM LIST is selected choose the parameters for display then press The message BUILDING DATA LIST is displayed The tester displays either All Data parameters or Custom List parameters depending on which selection was made F0 ALL DATA The selection of F0 ALL DATA displays all of the diagnostic data parameters available from the PCM Depending on the number of diagnostic data parameters in the data list the update rate can be 3 seconds or longer F1 CUSTOM LIST The selection of F1 CUSTOM LIST displays a list of parameters from which to select F1 CUSTOM LIST parameters allows you to select any combination of diagnostic data parameters to monitor from one parameter to all parameters A single parameter can be sampled at a high rate and selecting more parameters reduces the update rate Parameters are selected by scrolling through the list using the and keys and then pressing and to select and deselect the listed parameter When the parameters have been selected press to go to the display mode The tester remembers the selected parameters until another vehicle 1s selected or the tester is powered down so you won t have to re select them every time All data captured during Snapshot is retained in the tester memory until another vehicle is selected or it 18 overwritten by a new Snapshot or if the tester power is disconnected for more than 24 hours Press GE to Replay Data from a p
54. OFF BEFORE EXIT If there are DTCs to report the tester displays DTCs in a column list format This screen shows the total number of DTCs and the DTC numbers read from the vehicle PCM Using the O C and keys the cursor can be scrolled through the list of reported DTCs When the cursor is next to DTC number pressing displays the DTC order as received from the PCM DTC number text description and applicable Pinpoint Test If there are multiple DTCs read from the PCM the and keys change the DTC information display saves time from exiting out selecting another DTC then entering back in Pressing returns you to the Key On Engine Running DTC list screen Pressing again returns you to the Test Selection menu m When you are finished decoding the service codes press 2348 You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT Turn the ignition key off then press again to return to the Test Selection Menu oo If no messages are received within approximately 60 seconds an error message is displayed with a Pinpoint Test number to perform refer to the communication error message screen definition within this section of the manual 9 If operating properly the PCM goes through a series of tests and then begins DTC transmission ACTIVE KEYS Return to Select Test menu ENTER Select test or change to DTC description display YES Confirms that requested test sequence has been finish
55. PONT ia esa eas quoe i ear dcr Gen Onn Cae Eua 12 Protect Against Voltage Spies 13 Install Remove Cartridges with Tester OFF oo occ cece enn enn nee 13 Apply Parkina BLANC EER n 13 Protect ctw in idly Dances qais Sed Sad pad Can Saw Rer qud ow 13 Check Tester Indeed gerd ip Pan PERL AAPL REE db Eu Ear AKER ROBE 14 PRECAUTIONS FOR FORD POWERTRAIN APPLICATION 14 Dont Disconnect while Running coc ccacnncaaea de toda eae bea 14 BS FUGLE COVLEAGC eee eres ene 15 PIEC Donen VORA ods wad one whe EJEECREDQEQM E Rd 15 BEC V Eguipped Vehicles 2684 6 tueaus ous ERS on in er LDR AREARE 15 Eguibped socks dr ede bab Medak eke dae hh eee we RAE 15 Dala IPE i hides deep dc SEAGER DER CHEWED A ERO QA ERED RGAE MAS 16 IRSE DOE OB pose dia sr eit qt dtt erdd odpad Voce aa Edd Pa ewes 16 Ford Maazda Vehicle Diagnostics 4 ian 445 4405 dnb OA 16 PhD Sie Seon Yay yuq det dg AERE T Ad Rb Ewa d dd apa qp ied 16 NEHICLECOVERAGE ctetu pP eer bees er edades bete 16 79387 1982 Vehicle Coverage chi deh bedded I dae dd 16 TEDUEFEREE odassesenddtisi iteddezrzedzcidesdvd rade Re deeds d 18 1994 JODIE
56. REPEAT TEST YES NO Check the mechanical or fuel system condition for the cylinders listed on C N CHECK FUEL INJ the screen Press to repeat the test You don t have to repeat the REPEAT TESTS KOER test YES NO a ABORTED Ifthe throttle is moved during the Cylinder Balance Test a code 7 7 is THROTTLE MOVED sent to the tester and the test is aborted Press the qyp key and you are DURING TEST returned to the Test Selection Menu EXIT CYL BAL TIMEOUT Over two minutes elapsed since the last test and a new test was not TURN OFF initiated or over four minutes elapsed since the last test was initiated and ex no codes were received The throttle tap to start the test may not have been a strong enough CB then do the Cylinder Balance test again Select OBD Controls Ga Select Cylinder Balance test Return to Test Selection menu Affirm that requested test sequence is done o Do not repeat Cylinder Balance Test Returns you to Test Selection menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 133 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes EEC V TEST MODES MODE F0 DATA LIST The DATA LIST mode monitors diagnostic data parameters available from the vehicle Powertrain Control Module PCM on Ford s Standard Corporate Protocol Ford SCP communication link This mode does not affect vehicle operation and diagnostic data parameters can be read fro
57. SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 55 3 Vehicle Coverage 2001 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED Sable S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Grand Marquis W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 9 4 6L V8 CNG SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 2001 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Ranger 2 5L SOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 D 2 5L SOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 V 3 0L FFV SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Escape B 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 1 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Explorer Sport E 4 0L SOHC V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Trac MAF Explorer X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E 4 0L SOHC V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 P 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mountaineer E 4 0L SOHC V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 P 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Expedition W 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 6 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 A 5 4L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 M 5 4L SOHC V8 NGV SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Navigator A 5 4L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 R 5 4L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2
58. SCP OBD II C2 MAF Grand M7 W 4 6L V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Marquis MAF 9 4 6L V8 CNG EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF 2002 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL E INE 9 5th amp 6th VIN 8th NUN TYPE LINK CONFIG Ranger RO R1 R4 2 5L SOHC 4 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF D 2 3L SOHC 14 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF V 3 OL FFV SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF U 3 0L SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E 4 0L V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Escape UO B 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 3 0L V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Explorer Sport U7 E 4 0L SOHC V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Trac SFI MAF Explorer U6 U7 E 4 0L SOHC V6 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF W 4 6L V8 SFI PTEC SCP OBD II C2 MAF Mountaineer U6 U8 E 4 0L SOHC V6 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF W 4 6L V8 SFI PTEC SCP OBD II C2 MAF Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 59 3 Vehicle Coverage 2002 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER ENGINE MODEL 5th amp 6th VIN 8th NGEN TYPE LINK CONFIG Expedition 01 W 4 6L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF 6 4 6L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF L 54LSOHCV8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF M 5 4L SOHC V8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 NGV SFI MAF Navigator U2 A 54L4VV8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF R 5 4L 4V V8SFI EECV SCP OBD II C2 MAF E F Series E1 E2 S2 2
59. TEST TAP THROTTLE ONCE TO ACTIVATE DONE YES TO ACTIVATE DONE YES 1986 VEHICLES ONLY AWAITING CODES 4 MINUTES AFTER LAST TEST WITH NO NEW CODES YES CODES 10 30 amp 50 90 l CODE 77 CHECK FUEL INJ PASS ABORTED CYL BAL TIMEOUT 113355 GOOD RPM DROPS THROTTLE MOVED TURN OFF REPEAT TEST REPEAT TEST DURING TEST IGNITION YES NO YES NO EXIT EXIT FIGURE 5 18 Cylinder Balance Test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 132 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To select Cylinder Balance do the following 1 From the Test Selection Menu press to enter OBD Controls Tests 2 Press Gp to select the Cylinder Balance Test 3 Answer after performing each of the preparatory steps for the Cylinder Balance Test The tester goes through the KOER test then displays any slow codes that were transmitted 4 The screen changes to the CYLINDER BALANCE TEST and asks you to TAP THROTTLE ONCE TO ACTIVATE Tap the throttle then press the key to begin the Cylinder Balance Test You have two minutes to run a cylinder balance test after the last KOER code or the last Cylinder Balance test code was received 5 Depending on the results of the Cylinder Balance Test you see one of the following displays on the screen PASS All fuel injectors passed the Cylinder Balance Test Press to repeat GOOD RPM DROP the test You don t have to repeat the KOER test
60. a printer with the Tech 1 before If you are using a Tech 1A or MTS 3100 refer to the tester operator s manual and the printer operator s manual for printer setup The order of DTC display is KOER KOEO Continuous or On Demand tests if the tester has read DTCs from each test as a result of performing the KOER KOEO Continuous or On Demand tests On Demand DTCs stored in the tester are the result of performing the 7 3L NOTE Diesel engine s Output State Glow Plug Injector Buzz Cylinder Balance or Switch Test with DTCs read from the PCM The tester always displays EH DTC results from the most recent On Demand test performed and if no DTCs are received after performing an On Demand test the tester does not display On Demand DTCs in Review Codes mode Tech 1 Users Only Be sure the Tech 1 power is off before installing the RS232 Cartridge The NOTE RS232 Cartridge can remain in the Tech 1 during normal operation In this case you may always plug into the Tech 1 Printer with the power on EH However installation of a cartridge while power is applied often causes abnormal operation of the Tech 1 Therefore it 1s important that after installing the cartridge you reset the Tech 1 by removing the power connector from the cigarette lighter and reconnecting it SUBMODE F9 PRINT SUMMARY IVSC To select Print Summary do the following From the Power up screen 1 Select to get to the Model Year selecti
61. and OBD I calibration m gt Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 47 3 Vehicle Coverage 1998 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1998 FORD PASSENGER CARS 8TH DATA VEHICLE ENGINE ECA ADAPTER VIN SEINES LINK Escort P 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Escort ZX2 3 2 0L DOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Contour GFP Z Z 2 0L DOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Contour GFP 3 2 0L DOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Taurus 1 3 0L 2V V6 FFV SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 2 3 0L 2V V6 FFV SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Taurus SHO N 3 4L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang GT X 4 6L 2V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang Cobra V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Crown Victoria 9 4 6L V8 CNG SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 1998 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS 1998 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE M ENGINES ECA ERU ADAPTER Continental V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mark VIII V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Town Car W 4 6L 2V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Tracer P 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 Mystique 3 2 0L DOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L
62. available Engine system is automatically selected Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 75 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 4 Example of Vehicle Selection Process SELECT 8TH DIGIT 4AEGHJMNRSTUWXY YES keypress 11 times gt 92 3 01 SEFI FORD POWERTRAIN 1981 2004 v X X ENTER IF DATA SAVED FROM PREVIOUS VEHICLE TESTED IF NO DATA SELECT MODEL YEAR SAVED FROM aE at PREVIOUS TEST 4 LAST VEH YES SELECT MODEL YEAR 2004 4 AV ENTER SELECT TYPE RESELECT ENGINE F0 VIN 92 3 0L SEFIMA F1 CAR TAURUS amp SABLE F2 TRUCK VIN U oR SELECT ENGINE 92 1 9LSEFI MA ESCORT amp TRACER SELECT SYSTEM F0 ENGINE SELECT ENGINE 2 3L EFI OHC MUSTANG F0 DATA LIST F1 QUICK TESTS F2 STAR MODE F3 SNAPSHOT 92 SELECT ENGINE 2 3L HSC BASE TEMPO amp TOPAZ VIN X 92 SELECT ENGINE YES TAURUS amp SABLE VIN U SELECT ENGINE 92 5 0L SEFI HO MARK VII VIN E Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 76 4 Getting Started 8 When the appropriate system has been selected the tester displays the Test Selection menu of tests available for the vehicle you have selected In the example you would be ready to begin testing a 1992 Ford Taurus Sable with a 3 0L SEFI MA engine Different tests are av
63. by the delta pressure feedback EGR sensor DPF EGR is supplied with an upstream pressure value and a downstream pressure value which are above and below a calibrated metering orifice Monitoring these pressures enables the ECA to determine EGR flow rate DPF EGR sensor signal is an input to the ECA ECT V Volts 0 5V Engine Coolant Temperature ECT is an analog input to the ECA This parameter provides a voltage indication of the engine coolant sensor which changes with the change in engine coolant temperature ECT UNITS RANGE 0 255 Engine Coolant Temperature ECT is an analog input to the ECA This parameter provides a temperature indication of engine coolant near the ECT sensor EGR VACUUM REG 0 100 Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Vacuum Regulator displays the amount in percentage that the vacuum supply to the EGR is being regulated or vented to atmosphere EGR VLV POSITION Volts 0 1 25 Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Valve Position voltage is an input to the ECA to give the controller information about the EGR valve pintle position The ECA uses this information to compute EGR flow value Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 223 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions ELEC PRES CONT UNITS RANGE PSI 0 128 Electronic Pressure Control EPC is a measure of transmission hydraulic pressure controlled by the electronic pressure control solenoid The EPC solenoid is used
64. check timing test 145 cigarette lighter polarity 12 clear continuous codes 114 clear continuous DTCs test 150 code description 249 continuous DTC test 140 cylinder balance test 131 181 D data list 134 data list mode 4 93 data pairs 95 137 display locked up error 198 drive cycle 247 DTCs EEC V 215 INDEX DTCs passenger car EEC IV 202 DTCs truck EEC IV 210 E engine selection does not match cylinder ID error 199 error codes 201 error status messages 194 F freeze frame data mode 148 G garbage display error 201 glow plug test 178 H high speed fan 168 information mode 6 184 injector buzz test 180 install cartridge 13 IVSC 101 109 119 J jumper cables Festiva Probe Tracer Capri 254 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Index 267 MECS vehicles 253 K key functions Tech 1 9 key on engine off IVSC 101 key on engine off test 98 142 key on engine running IVSC 109 key on engine running test 106 146 keyboard locked up error 198 KOEO 98 142 KOEO IVSC 101 KOEO testing 14 KOER 106 146 L low speed fan 165 mass storage cartridge 73 MECS codes 250 Mercury Villager 258 N new features 2 O OBD controls 129 all outputs off 163 all outputs on 160 cylinder balance 131 cylinder balance test 181 gasoline 160 glow plug test 178 high speed fan 168 injector buzz test 180 low speed fan 165 output state test 129 177 switch test 182 OBD contro
65. control smoke by limiting injection timing during acceleration until a specified boost pressure is reached Expected values for this parameter are 14psi KOEO and 14psi while driving with low to medium load Note that the P in parentheses indicates the parameter is pressure related SHORT TERM FT B1 SHORT TERM FT B2 UNITS RANGE 100 Short Term Fuel Trim Bank 1 Bank 2 is the measure of adaptive or feedback fuel correction strategy for the injection of fuel into the engine Short term fuel trim represents the ECUs dynamic short term adjustment to fuel strategy determined from a lookup table in its memory This parameter is continually changing over time at a rate faster than long term fuel trim and varies with engine design and engine operating conditions The numeric character in SHORT TERM FT B1 and SHORT TERM FT B2 define the cylinders that are grouped as a bank for fuel feedback correction Bank 1 is the bank which contains cylinder number 1 Expected values for this parameter can be 20 warm engine at idle Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 244 Freeze Frame Parameter Descriptions D Data List Parameter Descriptions VEHICLE SPD km h 0 255 Vehicle Speed is an indication of vehicle speed in mile per hour The ECU uses vehicle speed to make determinations about current engine operating conditions and the operation of various engine management system output components Ford Powertrain Application 19
66. diagnostic codes to service manual Pinpoint Tests References Pinpoint Tests for both Ford and Mitchell manuals during Quick Test diagnostics Prevents misinterpretation of service code meaning Automatically checks for special exception codes that affect the interpretation of the KOEO KOER or CONTINUOUS codes Saves up to 24 diagnostic codes in each test mode Capable of printing a summary of all test results Retains data even when power is disconnected Allows selection of all tests from easy to read test menus Provides basic STAR MODE or advanced QUICK TEST MODE guided test diagnostics Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 2 Vehicle Coverage Summary 1 Ford Powertrain Application Description VEHICLE COVERAGE SUMMARY ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL Control Unit Idle Speed Control Electronic ISC E 4 Speed Electronic Automatic Transaxle 4EAT 6 and 17pin DLC SYSTEM VEHICLES PTEC Select 2000 2004 Lincoln LS Thunderbird Explorer Mountaineer Aviator Expedition and Navigator EEC V All 1996 2004 Passenger cars and Light Duty trucks selected 1994 95 Passenger Cars and Light Duty trucks EEC IV Selected 1983 95 Passenger Cars and Light Duty trucks selected 1996 97 Light Duty trucks Microprocessor All 1981 82 selected 1983 91 Passenger MCU Cars 1985 88 Ranger 1990 95 Probe 1991 95 Escort Tracer 1991 94 Capri a Read codes in STAR MODE only no QUICK TES
67. display During this time the engine controller initializes the KOER test The tester is waiting for the cylinder identification code If no code is received within a minute the tester displays an error message that directs you to retry the test and then perform the indicated Pinpoint Test if the message reoccurs To retry the test press to return to the Test Selection menu Recheck the connections on the ALDL cable the Ford Adapter and Ford Self test connector Retry the KOER test If the error message is displayed again refer to the designated Pinpoint Test The first code received during the KOER test is the cylinder identification code There are four possible responses to this code each requesting a different action All models without TCS OCS This is the display if the correct DE CREA cylinder identification occurs Performing these actions allows the ECA TURN WHEEL 1 2 to verify the operation of the Brake Off On Switch BOO and the CIRCLE amp RELEASE Power Steering Pressure Sensor PSPS Do so promptly and wait for the next prompt described in Step 6 After 20 seconds an AWAITING CODES message is displayed All models with TCS OCS These vehicles may have a Transmission RN WHEN ED Control Switch or Overdrive Cancel Switch If the vehicle does not CIRCLE amp RELEASE have a TCS or OCS you should ignore the prompt If it has one flip the TOGGLE OCS TCS switch both directions and wait for the next prompt descri
68. do dd db dide dai d and 50 2000 Vehicle Coverage ERA ESD ESD ARRA ARA A AAA CARA 52 ZOOL TENES ONE dai dud qe dd ud uqu a 55 2002 Vehicle CoVEF BB sesatuess xo uS DEORE AREER RES SRE RACE ARRA NOR 57 Sa psig ab xb ad dh qued pd Mad a Wa irae M Rok 62 2004 Poni Coverdge 4544856 84h 2408 isht PER MRE ROR ERA FERAE AC RES 66 os oes ee ee RR cd ees 69 SETTING UP THE TESTER Suter erem E erre tn 70 MES ta iG ASG bb HORE bash de dd 70 QU AEN dd Eod de dace ique qu qa dde 71 IBGET 72 POWERING UP THE TESTER cessere eee teeta eae eee meee 73 SELECTING THE APPLICATION ERR EEG Mad ber RR 73 PERFORM VEHICLE AND OR SYSTEM SELECTION 74 Selecting Usine POP PIN asa esc leh die b CR abe E aA E EAR CE 74 Selecting Vehicle Using FI CAR or P2 TRUCK 77 ADAPTER AND ADAPTER CABLE CONFIGURATIONS 79 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN 87 3 SELECTING AND OPERATING TEST 88 TEST MODES SUMMARY RR etn 88 SELECTING A TEST MODE eRembeRE RESP m
69. failure 536 Brake On Off BOO circuit failure not actuated during KOER 538 Insufficient RPM change during KOER dynamic response test Invalid cylinder balance test due to throttle movement during test Invalid cylinder balance test due to CID circuit failure 539 A C on Defrost on during KOEO 542 Fuel pump circuit open PCM to motor ground 543 Fuel pump circuit open battery to Powertrain Control Module PCM 551 Idle Air Control circuit failure 552 Secondary Air Injection Bypass AIRB circuit failure 553 Secondary Air Injection Diverter AIRD circuit failure 556 Fuel pump relay primary circuit failure 558 EGR Vacuum Regulator EVR circuit failure 565 Canister Purge CANP circuit failure 566 Shift solenoid circuit failure 569 Auxiliary Canister Purge CANP2 circuit failure 617 1 2 shift error 618 2 3 shift error 619 3 4 shift error 621 Shift Solenoid 1 SS1 circuit failure 622 Shift Solenoid 2 SS2 circuit failure 624 Electronic Pressure Control EPC circuit failure Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 214 EEC V DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions TRUCK DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 625 Electronic Pressure Control EPC driver open in PCM 626 Coast Clutch Solenoid CCS circuit failure 628 Excessive torque converter clutch slippage 629 Torque Converter Clutch TCC Clutch Converter Over
70. has to work with any OBD II compliant vehicle and that it must be able to automatically determine all information required to communicate with the vehicle The operator cannot be required to enter such vehicle specific information as the vehicle manufacturer model year or engine The OBD II Scan Tool must determine what protocol the vehicle uses what diagnostic parameters can be read from the vehicle and what tests are supported by the vehicle When used with Generic OBD II software Tech 1 Tech 1A and MTS 3100 testers support the basic requirements of the SAE s J1978 document including automatic determination of vehicle protocol and data parameters display of Current Diagnostic Data Parameters display of Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs display of Freeze Frame Data captured by the vehicle PCM along with a DTC clear DTCs and Freeze Frame Data from the on board electronic control module s memory and the capability to display results of various on board monitoring tests e g oxygen sensor tests In addition to these required OBD II Scan Tool functions the Tech 1 Tech 1A and MTS 3100 testers provide a number of enhancements to the OBD II diagnostic functions including Road Test support through Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 246 E Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics the capture of sequences of data parameters Snapshot user selectable parameter list allowing the user to trade off update rate for amount of
71. intermittent problems recorded by the EEC IV during normal operation It is imperative to run the KOEO Test before doing any other diagnostic Quick Test procedures especially Wiggle testing because of the possibility of erasing or creating additional Continuous codes hard faults should be corrected before servicing Continuous codes This means that all KOEO Timing Check and KOER codes should be fixed before trying to diagnose Continuous codes You will often find that the Continuous code repairs have already been serviced and a driveability problem has been eliminated Ford recommends that you repair the first KOEO service code received and then rerun the KOEO test to be sure you have eliminated that problem before repairing any other service codes The first code may create other service codes following it These often disappear after fixing the first service code and rerunning KOEO It is also recommended that you use the first set of Continuous codes read in KOEO for later intermittent repair problems because the originals might be erased during subsequent testing You should get a KOEO code 11 that decodes to a pass before continuing on to other Quick Tests Do not assume code 11 always means the system has passed the KOEO test Certain Continuous codes when received override KOEO code 11 to a Pinpoint Test Also on some MCU vehicles with altitude sensors code 11 may be a fail above a certain altitude The tester makes the right interpret
72. is pressure related Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 225 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions EXHAUST P Diesel Engine UNITS RANGE PS The Exhaust Back Pressure sensor is an analog signal that indicates the exhaust back pressure in the RH exhaust manifold A normal operation range of exhaust back pressure is 0 PSI for idle to low loads Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter is pressure related EXHAUST V Diesel Engine PSI 1 50 The Exhaust Back Pressure sensor is an analog voltage signal that indicates the exhaust back pressure in the RH exhaust manifold A normal operation range for exhaust back pressure sensor is 4 5 5 0 volts for idle to low loads Note that the V in parenthesis indicates the parameter 1s voltage related EXHAUST BP REG 0 100 EEC V Exhaust Backpressure Regulator is a measure of the percent on or open time for the Exhaust Backpressure Regulator valve The Exhaust Backpressure Regulator valve is an output controlled by the PCM and it controls exhaust back pressure during cold ambient temperatures to increase cab heat and decrease windshield defrost time Expected values for this parameter are 0 KOEO or idle hot engine and 0 20 while driving with low to medium load FUEL PRESS P UNITS RANGE PSI Fuel Injection Pressure diagnostic data parameter is a gage measure of the engine fuel rail pressure The fuel pressure parameter may or
73. less than the PCM calibrated PASS FAIL criteria a cylinder identification code or codes is sent from the PCM to the tester indicating which cylinders are weak or noncontributing Examples of cylinder ID codes are 1 for cylinder 1 2 for cylinder 2 etc The cylinder ID number is displayed twice like 1 1 If all cylinders pass a pass message is displayed If an injector fails all three tests it is considered to be a noncontributing cylinder If it fails two tests but passes the third it is considered a very weak cylinder If it fails only one test it is considered to be a weak cylinder While performing the Cylinder Balance test the throttle must not be touched unless the tester instructs you to TAP THROTTLE ONCE TO ACTIVATE Touching the throttle at any other time during the test causes the test to abort sending Code 7 7 and require that you return to the Test Selection menu to rerun the Cylinder Balance test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 131 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST Y F1 QUICK TESTS F2 STAR MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS SELECT CONTROL Ay F0 OUTPUT STATE F1 CYL BALANCE WARM ENGINE ARE RADIATOR HOSES FIRM YES HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS YES START ENGINE DONE YES AWAITING CODES DEPRESS RELEASE BRAKE PEDAL TURN WHEEL 1 2 CIRCLE amp RELEASE ALL KOER SLOW CODES RECORDED CYL BALANCE TEST ONE HARD THROTTLE CYL BALANCE
74. link circuit may have failed and Pinpoint Test QA1 should be performed ECU NOT READY RETRYING VERYIFY TEST CONDITIONS Displayed if the test conditions are not correct e g PCM not ready to respond engine not running etc ENGINE RUNNING OR OUTPUT CONTROL TEST NOT AVAIL EXIT Displayed if the Output Control test conditions are not correct e g PCM does not support the test or engine is started or running during the test RETRY TEST FRROR TEST CONDITIONS NOT CORRECT Displayed if the test conditions are not correct e g PCM already performing another test PCM not ready to respond or conditions to perform test are not set up properly Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 194 Communication Message Definition A Vehicle Network Communication Status MESSAGE DESCRIPTION FRROR TEST REJECTED BY VEHICLE ECU Displayed ifthe PCM does not respond to a request e g PCM will not respond to the tester ERROR ECU NOT CAPABLE OF Displayed if the PCM cannot perform a requested test PERFORMING TEST e g PCM is incapable of turning the Low Speed Fan relay on and off ERROR ECU TEST OR DATA FORMAT Displayed if while performing a test GENE pO DS SSE an error occurred and test results DTCs are available no test results are available aborted test PCM is not ready to respond SCP data message format is incomplete thereque
75. maximum voltage 124 Throttle Position TP sensor voltage higher than expected 125 Throttle Position TP sensor voltage lower than expected 126 MAP BARO sensor higher or lower than expected 128 MAP sensor vacuum hose damaged disconnected 129 Insufficient MAP Mass Air Flow MAF change during dynamic response test 136 Lack of Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S 2 switch during KOER indicates lean Bank 2 137 Lack of Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S 2 switch during KOER indicates rich Bank 2 138 Cold Start Injector CSI flow insufficient 139 No Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S 2 switches detected Bank 2 141 Fuel System indicates lean Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 204 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions PASSENGER CAR DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 144 No Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S 1 switches detected 157 Mass Air Flow MAF sensor circuit 158 Mass Air Flow MAF sensor circuit 159 Mass Air Flow MAF sensor circuit 167 Insufficient throttle position change during dynamic response test 171 Fuel system at adaptive limits Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S 1 unable to switch 172 Lack of Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S 1 switches indicates lean 173 Lack of Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S 1 switches indicates rich 175 Fuel system at adaptive limits Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S 2 unable to switch 176 Lack of Heated Oxygen Sensor
76. messages are received within approximately 60 seconds an error message is displayed with a Pinpoint Test number to perform refer to error screen definition within this section of the manual 10 If operating properly the PCM runs through a series of injector circuit 1995 1998 engines or crankshaft trigger 1999 2004 engines tests and then begins DTC transmission ACTIVE KEYS Return to Test Selection Menu Advance through test screens or change to DTC description display Confirm that requested test sequence has been finished and page down when in DTC number screen Scroll left or right when in DTC list screen Scroll up or down when in DTC list screen or changes to DTC information display Select Cylinder Balance Test S UBMODE F4 SWITCH TEST Performing the Switch Test key on engine running On Demand test causes the PCM to perform a switch test to determine the operation of the PCMs switched inputs If the PCM detects a problem with any switch S ervice Brake Parking Brake Transmission Control Clutch or Cruise Control then the PCM outputs Fo rd Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 182 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes related key on engine running DTCs For a Switch Test DTC to occur a fault must be present while performing the Switch Test on demand test Switch Test related KOER DTCs are not stored in the PCM memory The Switch Test test should be performed
77. of the selected output to the EEC V PCMs Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 166 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION AY CONTROL TYPE Y F0 OUTPUT TESTS F1 ENGINE F2 TRANSMISSION SELECT CONTROL Ay F0 ALL ON F1 ALL OFF F2 LOW SPD FAN WAITING FOR DATA SELECT LIST AV F0 ENGINE Fi TRANSMISSION FUEL EMISSION SELECT LIST F0 ALL DATA F1 CUSTOM LIST IDLE AIR CNTRL 1 LSF LOOP STATUS OPEN OFF IDLE AIR CNTRL 190 LSF LOOP STATUS OPEN ON IDLE AIR CNTRL 1 LSF LOOP STATUS OPEN OFF ENTER Additional parameter IDLE AIR CNTRL LOOP STATUS ENGINE SPEED SELECTED YES SELECT 1 NO DE SELECT selection If engine is started 1 LSF OFF OPEN ENGINE RUNNING OR OUTPUT CONTRL TEST NOT AVAIL EXIT FIGURE 5 30 Low Speed Fan Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 167 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Select Low Speed Fan Output Control test Turn test ON Turn test OFF NO Scroll through displayed diagnostic data parameters G GD Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Exit from Output Control test Submode F3 High Speed Fan This test is available on all 1994 and newer vehicles with gasol
78. perform certain actions to initiate KOEO Press after completing each request Requests vary depending on the vehicle under test but usually you are asked HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS and then instructed to TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN The tester then begins reading service codes Codes are displayed as KOEO and CONTINUOUS You can toggle between these displays after all codes are received by the tester If no codes are received within approximately 2 minutes an error message is displayed prompting you to retry the test or to perform a specified Pinpoint Test Pressing returns you to the Test Selection menu Before repeating KOEO recheck your ALDL cable connections Ford adapter plug and the Ford self test connector If the tester still fails to communicate with the vehicle perform the tester self test procedures before performing the recommended Pinpoint Tests If operating properly the ECA goes through a series of tests for 15 to 60 seconds and then begins service code transmission Fast codes are read on EEC IVs and slow codes are read on MCUs The ECA transmits slow codes twice When all codes are read the KOEO codes are displayed and the first service code received is displayed This is the recommended code to begin servicing All other codes are automatically displayed 1 every 3 seconds until a key is pressed When you are finished decoding the service codes press You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KE
79. pin P N 02002042 Figure 4 6 Tech 1 Tech 1 14 12 VIM adapter Figure 4 7 P N 02001198 and 7 14 pin P N 02002042 1990 1995 MECS and FORD MTS 3100 7 14 pin P N 02002042 Figure 4 5 4EAT Syst 6 or 17 p pin DLO oe Tech 1A 7 14 pin P N 02002042 Figure 4 6 Tech 1 Tech 1 14 12 VIM adapter Figure 4 7 P N 02001198 and 7 14 pin P N 02002042 All 1994 and newer with OBD II C2 MTS 3100 Controller Area Network Figure 4 8 16 pin DLC OBD VIM P N F 00K 108 115 plus 2002 and newer and 16 24 pin DLC Adapter Body Systems UBP Cable P N 02001744 MS CAN Select 1994 1998 andall OBD II C5 MTS 3100 Controller Area Network Figure 4 9 1999 and newer VIM P N 02003211 and Powertrain Systems 16 16 24 pin adapter cable P pin DLC N 02001744 or P N 3000081 OBD II Tech 1A OBD II Interface cartridge Figure 4 10 P N 02002178 and 16 14 pin adapter cable P N 02001969 Tech 1 OBD II Vehicle Interface Figure 4 11 Module and 16 24 pin adapter cable P N 02000177 Tech 1 OBD II Interface P N 01002172 a Jumper wires are required and not included Refer to Appendix E of this manual b OBD II and OBD II C are early adapter cable configurations utilized by the tester to communicate with systems connected to the OBD II DLC If you have one of these configurations please reference OBD II C2 in the Adapter Config column of the vehicle coverage tables for the vehicle you are diagnosing Ford Powe
80. primarily for the technician who is used to performing diagnostic procedures on Ford vehicles using Ford s STAR Tester It allows you to test EEC IV MCU IVSC Antilock Brake and Electronic Suspension Systems STAR MODE allows you to read Ford service codes If you are familiar with doing Ford Quick Tests in this manner you will find STAR MODE very useful Service codes can be decoded to specific Pinpoint Tests unique to the vehicle being tested CONNECTION TO ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION MECS AND 4EAT SYSTEMS STAR MODE is used to read DTCs on Electronic Suspension Mazda Engine Control System MECS Four Speed Electronic Automatic Transmission 4EAT systems and Mazda ABS When diagnosing the Electronic Suspension system the Ford 7 14 pin adapter is used When diagnosing the MECS 4EAT or Mazda ABS system the Ford 7 14 pin adapter and jumper leads are used For jumper lead connection information on MECS and 4EAT systems refer to Using Jumper Cables to Connect MECS Vehicles to the Tester on page 253 STAR MODE Press to enter the STAR MODE If you are testing an EEC IV MCU or IVSC system press Gp If you are testing a MECS 4EAT Mazda ABS equipped vehicle press aij The tester displays the STAR MODE options NOTE To access STAR MODE a vehicle needs to be selected While it is not required to select the actual vehicle under test it is the recommended practice There are two basic displays in STAR MODE The fi
81. reservoir The resistance of the sensor decreases as engine oil temperature increases The engine oil temperature signal is used by the PCM to calculate fuel quantity injector timing glow plug operation and exhaust back pressure Note that the V in parenthesis indicates the parameter is voltage related EPC P Diesel Engine PSI 1 100 The Electronic Pressure Control EPC solenoid is a variable force type solenoid that regulates transmission line pressure Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter 1s pressure related Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 224 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions EPC V Diesel Engine Volts 0 14 Electronic Pressure Control EPC Voltage is a measure of the PCMs commanded voltage that is driving the Electronic Pressure Control Solenoid The EPC Solenoid is used on AXODE AX4S AODE 4R70W 4R100 and E4OD electronic transmissions that are used on selected Ford Cars and Trucks EPC V Gasoline Engine Volts 0 5 EEC V Electronic Pressure Control EPC Voltage is a measure of the PCMs commanded voltage that is driving the Electronic Pressure Control Solenoid The EPC Solenoid is used on AXODE AX4S AODE 4R70W 4R100 and E4OD electronic transmissions that are used on selected Ford Cars and Trucks EVAP PURGE DC 0 50 Evaporative Purge Duty Cycle is a measure of the percent on or open time for the Evaporative Canister P
82. the codes are KOEO service codes and the Pinpoint Tests for these codes are in the Engine Emissions Diagnosis manuals not the manuals containing IVSC diagnostics To select KOEO IVSC Test do the following 1 Press a from the Select System menu to select Cruise Control tests 2 From the Select Mode menu press to perform the IVSC engine off test 3 Answer to the test initialization prompts after each action is completed 4 After turning the ignition on PRESS SPEED CONTROL ON and AVOID THROTTLE are displayed Pressing the speed control ON button must occur within 10 seconds after turning the ignition on The tester then asks that all IVSC buttons located on the steering wheel be pressed once and that the brakes be tapped This sequence must also be done within approximately 10 seconds or the IVSC switch related service code is set The tester awaits service codes at the completion of these actions 5 The tester reads and displays IVSC fast codes 6 Usually the next display is the service codes display The codes and associated Pinpoint Tests are automatically displayed one every 3 seconds until a key is pressed Refer to Submode F9 Review Service Codes Decode to Pinpoint Tests IVSC on page 115 NOTE A bad connection or not receiving codes condition results in an error display containing a Pinpoint Test designation As stated earlier always EH recheck connections and repeat the test before performing the Pinpoint Test
83. the check timing test Version one supports EEC IV controllers through 1991 vehicles while version two supports 1992 98 EEC IV controllers Version one 15 a Quick Test procedure that checks the EEC IVs ability to properly advance ignition timing Information on the tester display guides you through the test and gives you the proper Pinpoint Tests or Quick Test to perform next for example after performing KOEO test the check timing test should be performed Version two is also a guided test where information on the tester display guides you through performing the test This test is not a Ford Quick Test but represents the method of checking ignition timing on DI distributor ignition and EI electronic or distributorless ignition as described in Ford s Powertrain Control and Emission Diagnosis manual Note that an inductive timing lamp is required to perform the version two Check Timing test NOTE The 1989 94 7 3 liter truck engines are diesel and do not have timing check even though they have EEC IV engine control To select Timing Check 1981 1991 vehicles do the following 1 Select Timing Check by pressing from the Test Selection menu Run this test only after getting a pass in the KOEO test for EEC IV engine controllers 2 The tester prompts you to ADJUST TIMING TO VECI DECAL SPECS The Vehicle Emission Control Information VECI decal is present under the hood of all Ford vehicles The decal is usually found on or ne
84. the vehicle and system under test This information may include MIL Status System Status VIN Identification and Calibration Identification SUBMODE F1 DLC LOCATION The DLC Location mode provides the location of the vehicle mounted Data Link Connector DLC This mode displays DLC location information on EEC V vehicles which assist in fast DLC location when performing EEC V diagnostics To select DLC Location do the following 1 Press G to select INFORMATION from the Select Test menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 184 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 2 Press G to select DLC LOCATION mode from the Select Information menu The tester displays the location of the DLC for the selected vehicle Two examples of DLC Location information are shown below Displays for other vehicles may be different 3 Press to return to the Select Information menu Operation of the DLC Location mode is summarized in Figure 5 34 SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION SELECT MODE F1 DLC LOCATION F2 OBD INFO F4 VEHICLE INFO UNDER DASH DRIVER SIDE RIGHT SIDE UNDER DASH DRIVER SIDE FIGURE 5 34 DLC Location ACTIVE KEYS DLC LOCATION G3 Select Information Ga Select DLC Location Return to Select Information mode menu SUBMODE F2 OBD INFORMATION The OBD Information mode provides the On Board Diagnostic OBD information of the vehicl
85. until you find a pair with ENGINE SPEED Fix the ENGINE SPEED by pressing the af key if ENGINE SPEED is the top parameter or the key if it is the bottom Then scroll the other half of the display with either the or key until BRAKE SWITCH is displayed ENGINE SPEED FIXES TOP 1750 RPM PARAMETER BRAKE SWITCH OFF ENGINE SPEED 1750 RPM BRAKE SWITCH FIXES BOTTOM OFF PARAMETER Figure A Figure B ACTIVE KEYS FOR CREATING DATA PAIRS NO Scroll through displayed data parameters Return to the select mode menu FIX the upper lower parameter PRINTING DATA The currently displayed sample may be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible printer Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 95 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F1 QUICK TEST SUBMODE F0 PREPARE VEHICLE AND ENGINE The Ford diagnostic procedures specify that before performing any of the Quick Tests certain vehicle and engine preparations must be performed The Prepare Vehicle and Engine function provides screen prompts to aid you in this procedure Properly preparing the vehicle may prevent receiving service codes that are not related to a fault condition An example of this is engine coolant temperature that is not hot enough to prevent the vehicle ECA from setting a service code related to the Engine Coolant Temperature ECT sensor Also there are engine modifications for certain
86. 0L SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 V 3 0L FFV SFI MAF EED V SCP OBD II C2 X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Explorer x 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E 4 0L SOHC V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 P 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EED V SCP OBD II C2 Mountaineer E 4 0L SOHC V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 P 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Expedition 6 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 M 5 4L SOHC V8 NGV SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF A 5 4L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 53 3 Vehicle Coverage 2000 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED VEHICLE SN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Navigator 6 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 M 5 4L SOHC V8 NGV SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF A 5 4L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E F Series 2 4 2L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 6 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 M 5 4L SOHC V8 NGV SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF F 7 3L V8 TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 2 5 4L SFI MAF Bi Fuel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 F Series 3 5 4L Super Charged V8 EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 Lightning F Series Super L 5
87. 1 camshaft The error is the difference between the desired and actual camshaft position CAM POS ERROR 2 Degrees The camshaft position error bank 2 displays the Variable Cam Timing VCT advance or retard error of the bank 1 camshaft The error is the difference between the desired and actual camshaft position CAM POS SOLENOID ON OFF The camshaft position solenoid displays the state of the Variable Cam Timing VCT solenoid CLOSED TP V Volts 0 5 EEC V The closed Throttle Position TP voltage is a voltage range valid for idle conditions only Closed Throttle Position voltage has increased accuracy than TPS Voltage and the ECA uses this data for determination of TPS operation CLUTCH PEDAL SW Diesel Engine ON OFF The Clutch Pedal Position Switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position The clutch pedal position switch sends battery voltage to the PCM when the clutch is engaged foot off of pedal and zero voltage when the clutch is disengaged pedal depressed COAST CLUTCH SOL ON OFF The Coast Clutch Solenoid indicates the state of the Coast Clutch Solenoid in the transmission COMMANDED GEAR Diesel Engine 1 2 3 4 ERROR Commanded Gear displays the gear that the automatic transmission is being commanded to be in from the PCM The PCM controls the shift strategy and commands gear operation during Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 221 Data List Parameter
88. 1981 2004 Page 157 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To select Snapshot Setup Phase do the following 1 2 6 7 Press to select SNAPSHOT from the Select Test menu Press to select Trigger Point then select the desired point beginning center or end of data When the trigger point 1s selected the tester automatically returns to the Select Test menu Select one of the trigger options by pressing the Function Key displayed to the left of the desired trigger conditions Press to select ANY DTC The tester continues to store data until any trouble code is detected in the PCM or until you press the G GUB or key Press to select SINGLE DTC When the tester screen displays ENTER DTC Pxxx use the numeric key 0 9 to enter DTC number that you have selected then press GIMME Press the up arrow key to change the type of DTC etc U B P or C see EEC V DTCs on page 215 The tester continues to store data until the specified trouble code is detected in the PCM or until you press the Need or UD key Press to select a MANUAL TRIGGER The tester continues to store data until you press the a key Select one of the Data Lists Press Gf for ENGINE for TRANSMISSION for FUEL or G for EMISSION Each Data List has different data parameters to view While in the Data List mode press to go to the next Data List Select ALL DATA or ai CUSTOM
89. 255 On Board Diagnostics version II OBD II Trips is a numeric count for the number of OBD II Trips An OBD II Trip refers to a drive cycle which after completion satisfies the requirement for diagnostic monitor test execution Certain diagnostic monitor tests are executed and completed after one trip while others are performed and completed more than once per trip OBD II diagnostic monitor tests that are completed once per trip are Heated O2S Monitor Secondary Air Monitor Catalyst Efficiency Monitor and Evaporative Purge Monitor Expected values are 0 for no completed OBD II Trips and 1 or higher for completed OBD II Trips OD CANCEL SW ON OFF Overdrive Cancel Switch is a two state input to the ECA about transmission overdrive on off condition This switch 18 controlled by the vehicle operator OUTPUT SHAFT RPM 0 5000 Output Shaft is an indication of transmission output shaft speed in revolutions per minute The Output Shaft signal is an input to the PCM The input signal is used by the PCM to determine shift and torque convertor clutch schedules and electronic pressure control values Expected values are 0 RPM at idle and 2200 2500 RPM at 55 MPH depends on current transmission gear and type Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 234 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions P TO R PARAMETERS P S PRESS SW ON OFF Power Steering P S Pressure Switch is an input to the ECA and provid
90. 3L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Explorer X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Explorer E 4 0L SOHC V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mountaineer P 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Expedition 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Navigator L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E F Series 2 4 2L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 6 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E Series 5 6 8L SOHC V10 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 F Series H 5 8L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 H 5 8L V8 MFI MAP EEC IV DCL Ford J 7 0L V8 MFI MAPS EEC IV DCL Ford OBD II C2 F 7 3L TC Diesel EEC IV SCP pepe G 7 5L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP ies G 7 5L V8 MFI MAP EEC IV DCL ae G 7 5L V8 MFI EEC IV DCL Series J 7 0L V8 MFI MAPS EEC IV DCL Ford Aerostar U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 X 4 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Windstar U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 OBD II C2 CAL FED emissions and OBD II calibration less than 8500 Ibs GVWR CAL FED emissions and OBD I calibration greater than 8500 Ibs GVWR CAL FED emissions and OBD I calibration CAL emissions and OBD II calibration less than 14000 Ibs GVWR CAL emissions and I calibration greater than 14000 lbs GVWR FED emissions
91. 3L SEFI M A HSC BASE EEC IV DCL Ford S 2 3L SEFI M A HSC PLUS EEC IV DCL Ford V 3 0L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford U 3 0L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Sable U 3 0L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD EEC IV DCL Ford Cougar 4 3 8L SEFI RWD EEC IV DCL Ford T 5 0L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Grand Marquis 4 6L SEFI AOD E EEC IV DCL Ford 4 6L SEFI M A AOD EEC IV DCL Ford a 2 valve engine only 1992 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Ranger A 2 3L EFI OHC M A EEC IV DCL Ford T 2 9L EFI EEC IV None Ford U 3 0L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford X 4 0L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Bronco Y 4 9L EFI Manual Trans EEC IV DCL Ford Y 4 9L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 36 3 Vehicle Coverage 1992 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Explorer x 4 0L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Aerostar U 3 0L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford X 4 0L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford E F Series Y 4 9L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford J 7 01 EFI EEC IV DCL Ford M 7 3L Diesel EEC IV None Ford G 7 51 EFI EEC IV None Ford a E4OD Transmission only b GVWR 8500 lbs or less only 1993 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1993 FORD PASSENGER CARS
92. 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang GT X 4 6L 2V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang Cobra V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Thunderbird 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L 2V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 45 3 Vehicle Coverage 1997 FORD PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED VEHICLE ENGINES ADAPTER Crown Victoria 4 6L V8 CNG SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 1997 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Continental V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD 1 2 Mark VIII V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 1 2 Town Car W 4 6L 2V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 1997 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Tracer P 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mystique 3 2 0L DOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Sable U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Cougar 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L 2V V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Grand Marquis W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 46 3 Vehicle Coverage 1997 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Ranger A 2
93. 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 6 8L V10 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 F 7 3L V8 TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Windstar U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Excursion L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 6 8L V10 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 F 7 3L V8 TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 54 3 Vehicle Coverage 2001 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2001 FORD PASSENGER CARS 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Escort P 2 01 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Escort ZX2 3 2 0L DOHC 16V SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Focus 3 2 01 14 SFI MAF PTEC SCP OBD II C2 P 2 0L DOHC 16V SFI MAF PTEC SCP OBD II C2 Taurus 2 3 0L 2V V6 FFV SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang 4 3 8L V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang GT X 4 6L 2V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang Cobra V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Crown Victoria 4 6L V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 9 4 6L V8 CNG SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Continental V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Towncar 4 6L 2V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 LS S 3 0L SFI MAF PTEC SCP OBD II C2 A 3 9L SFI MAF PTEC SCP OBD II C2 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Cougar 3 2 0L I4 SFI MAF EEC V
94. 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 M 5 4L SOHC V8 NGV SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF A 5 4L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Navigator 6 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 M 5 4L SOHC V8 NGV SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF A 5 4L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 E F Series 2 4 2L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 6 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 M 5 4L SOHC V8 NGV SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF F 7 3L V8 TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 Z 5 4L SFI MAF Bi Fuel EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 F Series 3 5 4L Super Charged V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Lightning F Series Super L 5 4L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 Duty S 6 8L V10 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 F 7 3L V8 TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 51 3 Vehicle Coverage 1999 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED 8TH DATA VEHICLE E ENGINES e LINK ADAPTER Windstar 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 A 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 2000 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2000 FORD PASSENGER CARS 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Escort P 2 0L I4 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Escort ZX2 3 2 0L DOHC 16V SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Focus 3 2 0L 14 SFI MAF P
95. 5 8L CARB MCU None Ford a California models only 1990 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA pete ADAPTER LINK Continental 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD EEC IV DCL Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 31 3 Vehicle Coverage 1990 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ae ADAPTER Mark VII E 5 0L SEFI EEC IV None Ford Town Car F 5 0L SEFI FED EEC IV DCL Ford F 5 0L SEFI M A CAL EEC IV DCL Ford a California models only 1990 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Topaz X 2 3L EFI HSC BASE EEC IV None Ford S 2 3L EFI HSC PLUS EEC IV None Ford Sable Y 3 0L SHO SEFI EEC IV None Ford 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD EEC IV DCL Ford Cougar 4 3 8L SEFI RWD EEC IV DCL Ford R 3 8L SC SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Grand Marquis F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV None Ford F 5 0L SEFI M A EEC IV None Ford G 5 8L CARB MCU None Ford Merkur Scorpio T 2 9L EFI EEC IV None Ford 1990 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Ranger A 2 3L EFI OHC EEC IV DCL Ford T 2 9L EFI EEC IV None Ford T 2 9L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford x 4 0L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Bronco Y 4 9L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8L EF EEC IV DCL Ford Bronco 11 T 2 9L EFI EEC IV None Ford T 2 9L EFI M A EEC IV DCL2 Ford Aerostar U 3 0L EF
96. 6 MAF circuit below minimum voltage 67 Park Neutral Position PNP switch circuit open A C ON during Self Test 77 Brief WOT not sensed during Self Test Operator error 79 A C on Defrost on during Self Test 81 Secondary Air Injection Diverter AIRD solenoid circuit failure Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 203 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions PASSENGER CAR DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 82 Secondary Air Injection Bypass AIRB solenoid circuit failure 84 EGR Vacuum Regulator EVR circuit failure 85 Canister Purge CANP circuit failure 87 Fuel pump primary circuit failure 91 HO2S circuit indicates system lean left HO2S 91 No HO2S switching detected left HO2S 92 HO2S circuit indicates system rich left HO2S 94 Secondary Air Injection system inoperative left side 95 Fuel pump secondary circuit failure 96 Fuel pump secondary circuit failure 98 Hard fault is present FMEM mode 111 System Pass 112 IAT ACT sensor circuit GROUNDED 113 IAT ECT sensor circuit OPEN 114 IAT ACT sensor circuit 116 Engine Coolant Temp ECT sensor circuit 117 Engine Coolant Temp ECT sensor circuit GROUNDED 118 Engine Coolant Temp ECT sensor circuit OPEN 121 Closed throttle voltage or throttle position voltage 122 Throttle Position TP sensor circuit below minimum voltage 123 Throttle Position TP sensor circuit above
97. 81 2004 Page 245 FORD MAZDA POWERTRAIN MODULES AND DIAGNOSTICS E 1 WHAT IS OBD II The California Air Resource Board CARB required that by 1996 all vehicles sold in California contain a certain minimum On Board Diagnostic capability to diagnose emissions related failures of the engine control system These diagnostic requirements have been designated as OBD II On Board Diagnostics Phase II with a goal of monitoring all of the emissions related components on board the vehicle for proper operation CARB s intent with the OBD II program is to permit the State s Inspection and Maintenance Program to evolve into a check of the on board computer for the presence of diagnostic trouble codes underhood and tailpipe inspections would no longer be required Part of the OBD II program is for the vehicle to provide a standard interface for off board diagnostic test equipment This standard interface includes a standard test connector referred to as the J1962 connector a standard communication protocol Ford SCP Ford 9141 or ISO 14230 and a standard set of diagnostic test modes defined by SAE J1979 The intention of CARB s OBD II program was that a single diagnostic tester could be used to read the diagnostic information from any OBD II compliant vehicle A tester which satisfies this requirement can be designated as an OBD II Scan Tool and is defined by the SAE document J1978 One of the requirements of the OBD II Scan Tool is that it
98. 9 C and keys the cursor can be scrolled through the list of reported DTCs When the cursor is next to a DTC number pressing displays the DTC order as received from the PCM DTC number text description and applicable Pinpoint Test If there are multiple DTCs read from the PCM the and keys change the DTC information display saves time from exiting out selecting another DTC then entering back in Pressing returns you to the Key On Engine Off DTC list screen Pressing again returns you to the Test Selection menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 142 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 6 When you are finished decoding the service codes press You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT Turn the ignition key off then press again to return to the Test Selection Menu 7 If no messages are received within approximately 60 seconds an error message is displayed with a Pinpoint Test number to perform refer to the communication error message screen definition within this section of the manual 8 If operating properly the PCM goes through a series of tests and then begins DTC transmission Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 143 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Ay F0 DATA LIST F1 QUICK TEST F3 SNAPSHOT SELECTTEST Ay F0 PREP VEHICLE F1 CONTINUOUS F2 KOEO PERFORM F0 PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST ENTER ENTER KOEO ON DEM
99. 92 EEC IV IVSC and STAR Test Modes 93 MODE FO DATA arb PR pde ped 93 Viewing ECA Diagnostic Data Parameters tank as ire aeta RE an 95 Create Tour Own Data Pals denne Ada aged Ded Sed kA REUS RA ER 95 DIE Athy debra evo eh eke Bah der dore qd 95 MODE PU OUICK TEST xis eet Ere oot 96 Submode FO Prepare Vehicle and Engine cease cus eas 96 oubmode FI Key On Engine OF Test con aan cae ma nae dew Cale ous 98 Submode F1 Key On Engine Off Test IVSC oo ccc rene 101 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 TOC ii UDINE For Cheek TME mak pd Frage dard rd ac Lew eae dor sees 103 Submode F3 Key On Engine Running Test 0 cc ccc 106 Submode Key On Engine Running Test IVSC _ 109 Submode F4 Wiggle OHS on kes band ARE Sane 111 Sabmode F7 Clear CONDO Coda sireisas tute dee Dad Cad ad CRUCE RO dE d 114 Submode F8 Review Service Codes Decode to Pinpoint Tests IV C 115 Bubmode FO PON SNA ak cigs nach das eddy hee dese hoy das PELO TM RR ES ES 119 Aubmode F9 Print Summary VSO aska saa qaa qaqampuasyanpukaaqauqakaqa 119 MODE F2 STAR MODE IVSC MECS 20000 cece eee eee i
100. 96 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK E F Series Y 4 9L 16 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 N 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 H 5 8L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 H 5 8L V8 SFI EEC IV DCL Ford F 7 3L TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 G 7 5L V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 G 7 51 V8 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford G 7 5L V8 MFI MAP EEC IV DCL Ford F Series Y 4 9L 16 MFI MAP EEC V SCP OBD II C2 J 7 01 V8 MFI EEC IV DCL Ford CAL FED emissions and OBD II calibration less than 8500 lbs GVWR CAL FED emissions and OBD I calibration greater than 8500 lbs GVWR CAL emissions and OBD II calibration less than 14000 lbs GVWR CAL emissions and OBD I calibration greater than 14000 lbs GVWR FED emissions and OBD I calibration CAL FED emissions and OBD I calibration m e o gt 1997 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1997 FORD PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Escort P 2 0L 14 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 OBD II C2 Contour GFP 2 2 0L DOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Contour 3 2 0L DOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Probe A 2 0L DOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Taurus 1 3 0L 2V V6 FFV SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Taurus SHO N 3 4L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang
101. AND QUICK TEST START YES NO TURN IGNITION KEY OFF DONE YES NO TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN DONE YES NO A SCROLL UP y SCROLL DOWN ENTER DTC DESC EXIT QUIT PCM Not Ready PCM NOT READY RETRYING 3Seconds VERIYTEST PCM Ready CONDITIONS TEST IN PROCESS No response after 60 No DTCs DTCs Stored seconds KOEO DTCs 2 KOEO DTC 1 P1401 NO DATA OR PCM NO DTCs gt P1401 DPFE SENSOR CKT RESPONSE CHECK P0103 HIGH INPUT IGN KEY ON DLC PPT HE10 CONN OR PPT QA1 Scrolling gt Cursor More Listed DTCs TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT EXIT FIGURE 5 23 Key On Engine Off Test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 144 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Return to Select Test menu Advance through test screens or change to DTC description display Confirms that requested test sequence has been finished and page down when in DTC number screen Scroll left or right when in DTC list screen Scroll up or down when in DTC list screen or changes DTC information display Selects Key On Engine Off test SUBMODE F3 CHECK TIMING Performing the Check Timing Test checks the PCMs ability to control computed timing advance This test is available on 1996 1998 engines with Distributor Ignition DI applications since EI systems do not have adjustable timing For gasoline engin
102. All Outputs On Bi directional control of a component or Gasoline F1 All Outputs Off device regardless of whether it is on or off F0 Output Tests F2 Low Speed Fan Examples include All Outputs Low Speed F3 High Speed Fan Fan and High Speed Fan F4 OBD Controls F0 EGR Control the state or value of specific Engine Gasoline 1 Evap Purge components F1 Engine F2 O2 B1 S1 Htr F3 O2 B1 S2 Htr F4 O2 B2 51 Htr F5 O2 B2 S2 Htr F4 OBD Controls F0 Shift Sol 1 Control the state of specific Transmission Gasoline F1 Shift Sol 2 components F2 Transmission F2 Shift Sol 3 F3 Shift Sol 4 F4 TCC Lockup F4 OBD Controls F0 Output State Test Perform diagnostic routines that return status Diesel F2 Glow Plug Test information after the function has been F2 Injector Buzz Test performed The results ofthe test function are F3 Cylinder Balance Test displayed F4 Switch Test F8 Information F1 DLC Location Displays useful information about the vehicle F2 F4 OBD Information Vehicle Information and or the tested system This may consist of data link connector DLC location ECU Software identification or system identification information Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 90 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes The following table summarizes the test modes by system TEST MODE EEC IV EEC V ELECTRONIC MAZDA PTEC SUSPENSION MECS 4EAT Data List 1989 98
103. Balance DTCs when the ignition key is on and the engine is running which makes it valuable when diagnosing hard failures This is possible because the PCM is commanded to perform the Cylinder Balance On Demand test NOTE Some 1995 96 7 3L Powerstroke Diesel engines may not support this test J Consult Ford Service information for test application To select Cylinder Balance Test do the following 1 Press GJ to select the Cylinder Balance test from the Test Selection Menu You are reminded to PERFORM F0 PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST Press GMB 2 You are prompted to initiate the Cylinder Balance test Press to perform or QY 9 to exit to the Test Selection Menu 3 START ENGINE and press An information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Cylinder Balance test 4 Warm the engine to normal operating temperature use temperature gauge on instrument panel Press when the engine is at normal operating temperature NOTE EH temperature Ensuring that the engine is at normal operating temperature is On a diesel engine it takes a while to get the engine up to normal operating vital for this test to operate properly Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 181 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 5 6 7 oo 9 Turn off all accessories including A C and auxiliary RPM control Press when all accessories have been turned off tester key help informatio
104. C IV Ford 4 3 8L EFI RWD EEC IV Ford F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford Escort 9 1 9L CFI EEC IV Ford J 1 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Mustang A 2 3L EFI OHC EEC IV Ford F 5 0L SEFI M A EEC IV Ford E 5 0L SEFI H O EEC IV Ford Crown Victoria F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford 1988 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Continental 4 3 8L EFl AXOD EEC IV Ford Mark VII E 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford Town Car F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford 1988 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Topaz X 2 3L HSC BASE EEC IV Ford S 2 3L HSC PLUS EEC IV Ford Sable U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford 4 3 8L EFI AXOD EEC IV Ford Cougar 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 4 3 8L EFI RWD EEC IV Ford F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford Grand Marquis F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 28 3 Vehicle Coverage 1988 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Merkur XR4Ti W 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford Merkur Scorpio V 2 9L EFI EEC IV Ford 1988 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Ranger C 2 0L ISC E ISC E Ford A 2 3L EFI EEC IV Ford T 2 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Bronco Y 4 9L EFI EEC IV Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV Ford H 5 8L EFI EEC IV Ford Bronco 11 T 2 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Aerostar U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford E F Series Y 4 9L EFI EEC
105. CHECK TIMING DOES ENGINE CRANK AND RUN YES NO NO START 1 DO KOEO 2 FORD PPT AA1 MITCHELL AA1 USE amp KEYS TO VIEW PREPARE VEHICLE SCREENS DONE EXIT CK VACUUM HOSES CK ELEC WIRING COOLANT LEVEL SET PARKING BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS WARM ENGINE RUN AT 2000 RPM FOR 2 MINUTES TURN ACCESSORIES DONE OFF PLACE PROCEED WITH F1 TRANS IN PARK KOEO SELF TEST OR NEUTRAL EXIT FIGURE 5 3 Prep Vehicle Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 97 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F1 KEY ON ENGINE OFF TEST The Key On Engine Off KOEO test is the first engine Quick Test to be done after preparing the vehicle for testing Initiating the KOEO test puts the ECA into a self test mode where it tests input and output actuators without running the engine The KOEO test looks for hard faults faults that are currently present Even if a vehicle does not start a KOEO test should be attempted to see if any useful service codes are available KOEO service codes are received from the ECA and can give an indication of which vehicle system caused a failure If you want results from both KOEO and Output State tests do the Output State test then read KOEO and Continuous codes from the Review codes function For the EEC IV Continuous service codes are also read in the KOEO sequence Continuous codes document
106. CONSE dde dd 20 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 TOC i ORO gt dua fue aep wai gu ded 22 1086 Vehicle parrak ans EES NAE AREA 24 HOSE Coverdale ARG ch da Bach dad 26 1988 Vehicle Coverage 5554560 8K EHR SERS ERIS 28 IRR hii COD saque kauesqdp eat cae nde a dee dee tui Cu 29 1990 Vehicle COVEFEBE 4 549 445 2454 85 RRS SHS ARANR 31 POOF POS dut edite dr BS HO RARER RA WRT 33 1992 Vehicle Coverage Guede deed 26k tda Pun ran En Ee IR rte RCEAUCE HA ANE ERS 35 cabana q ak uwa aqhaqa dud Se weed xu b ad p ue 37 1994 Vehicle Coverage E VERS EAD EES EAD ORE OUR CREER CERRAR 39 TOU VERE nid cid x bebo Hand dada d dade eae Pad deed d edd dd da Eid 41 1990 Vehicle Coverage 4548S KEKE EAR OG XAR Ee In 43 TEI CORR E qued Cuba tae fea tae Quasi d bd 45 1998 Vehicle Coverage parroki nastasta t LURRXRRRXARXAZAqNAGAR4NRISATUNAGNA SUA RR 48 1999 Coverdale desk qot dua th Aig alu D dU
107. CONTROL P PSIA 0 3600 EEC V Injection Control Pressure Absolute is a variable capacitance sensor that measures fuel rail pressure so that the PCM can properly and timely control the injection timing and pulse width Expected values for this parameter are 0 20 PSIA KOEO and 100 500 PSIA while driving with low to medium load Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter is pressure related INJ CONTROL V Diesel Engine Volts 0 5 Injector Control Pressure Sensor Voltage is a variable capacitance sensor that measures fuel rail pressure so that the PCM can properly control the injector timing and pulse width Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 229 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions INJ CONTROL REG UNITS RANGE ECA Injection Control Pressure Regulator is a measure of percent on open time for the Injection Control Pressure Regulator valve The Injection Control Pressure Regulator valve is an output controlled by the PCM and it controls injection control pressure Expected values for this parameter are 10 15 KOEO or idle hot engine and 15 50 while driving with low to medium load INJECTOR PW 1 mS 0 100 Injector Pulse Width PW 1 is the average fuel injector pulse width of group 1 fuel injectors The pulse width is the on time of the fuel injector and changes with engine operating conditions INJECTOR PW 2 mS 0 100 Injector Pulse Width PW 2 is t
108. D by pressing the a key if ENGINE SPEED is the top parameter or the G key if it is the bottom Then scroll the other half of the display with either the or key until BRAKE SWITCH is displayed ENGINE SPEED FIXES TOP 1750 RPM PARAMETER BRAKE SWITCH OFF ENGINE SPEED 1750 RPM BRAKE SWITCH OFF FIXES BOTTOM PARAMETER FIGURE 5 20 Data Parameter Pairs PRINTING DATA The currently displayed sample may be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible printer by pressing the key ACTIVE KEYS CREATING DATA PAIRS NO Scroll through displayed data parameters or for Custom List setup select or deselect parameters EXIT Return to the select mode menu G GD FIX the upper or lower parameter Scroll through parameters in Custom List ENTER Start Custom List Data Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 137 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F1 QUICK TEST SUBMODE F0 PREPARE VEHICLE AND ENGINE The Ford diagnostic procedures specify that before performing any of the Quick Tests certain vehicle and engine preparations must be performed The Prepare Vehicle test provides screen prompts for properly readying gasoline and diesel engine powertrain systems for diagnostic testing Properly preparing the vehicle may prevent receiving service codes that are not related to a fault condition An example of this is engine coolant temperatur
109. DCL from the ECM during normal operation of the vehicle This mode does not affect vehicle operation and you can use it to read data to see if it is correct or at least reasonable The current value of the parameter is displayed with the parameter units The data parameters are displayed in pre programmed pairs You can also create your own data pairs through the process explained on page 95 To select Data List do the following 1 Select the DATA LIST mode from the Test Mode menu by pressing ZJ 2 Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the keys 3 Return to the select mode menu at any time by pressing 22419 Operation of the DATA LIST mode is summarized in Figure 5 2 ACTIVE KEYS Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs EXIT Return to Test Mode menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 93 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT ENGINE SELECT SYSTEM F0 ENGINE F1 CRUISE CONTL SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 QUICK TESTS F2 STAR MODE TURN KEY TO RUN OR START ENGINE ENTER ENTER INITIALIZING DATA COMMUNICATION LINK ENGINE SPEED XXX RPM SPARK ADVANCE INTAKE AIR TEMP X X VOLTS ENG COOL TEMP X X VOLTS YES
110. E NEUTRAL OVERDRIVE DRIVE MAN1 MAN2 ERROR Transmission Range TR Selector describes the gear position of the digital transmission range sensor as input to the vehicle PCM The digital transmission range sensor is used to input driver selected gear range and is used by the PCM to determine fuel and shift strategies for engine idle and cruise operating conditions Proper adjustment of the digital transmission range sensor is important and can be done while displaying this parameter TR SENSOR Gasoline Engine Diesel Engine Volts 0 5V Transmission Range TR Sensor indicates the position of the manual lever transmission shift lever The Transmission Range sensor voltage signal is an input to the PCM The PCM uses the sensor s input to determine the manual shift lever position and the desired gear range for the transmission The Transmission Range Sensor can be in one of six valid positions with each position utilizing a specific voltage range If the voltage is not valid Error is displayed MANUAL SHIFT TRANSMISSION RANGE TR LEVER POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE RANGE Park greater than 4 03 to 4 74v Reverse greater than 3 23 to 4 03v Neutral greater than 2 45 to 3 23v Overdrive greater than 1 70 to 2 45v Drive 2 greater than 0 99 to 1 70v Manual Low 1 greater than 0 29 to 0 99v Error 0 00 to 0 29v greater than 4 74 to 5 00v TRANS CNTRL LAMP Diesel Engine ON OFF On vehicles with a
111. ECAUTIONS FOR ALL APPLICATIONS PROTECT AGAINST REVERSE POLARITY If power is applied to the tester and the Tech 1A or Tech 1 display remains CAUTION blank or the green LED on the MTS 3100 does not illuminate when turned 2 off reverse polarity in the cigarette lighter may be present Damage to the tester could occur DO NOT connect the ALDL DLC cable to the vehicle Verify that the center contact of the vehicle s cigarette lighter has 12 volts and that the outer contact is grounded Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 12 2 Operating Precautions PROTECT AGAINST VOLTAGE SPIKES CAUTION Due to the possibility of voltage spikes that could damage the vehicle or tester do not connect or disconnect the tester while the ignition key is ON or while the engine is running INSTALL REMOVE CARTRIDGES WITH TESTER OFF Do not install or remove application or auxiliary cartridges while power is applied to the tester To change or add a cartridge do the following 1 Turn the ignition OFF CAUTION 2 Disconnect the tester power source either the cigarette lighter power plug or the ALDL DLC Cable from the vehicle 3 For the MTS 3100 press D to turn the tester OFF 4 Change or install the cartridge s 5 Reconnect the tester power source either the cigarette lighter power plug or the ALDL DLC Cable 6 Turn the ignition ON APPLY PARKING BRAKE OBD CONTROLS M
112. ERCURY VILLAGER 3 0L VIN W To manually clear DTCs do the following 1 Perform the manually reading DTCs function 2 Referring to the illustration use a jumper wire to short the Blue White wire and Grey Blue wire between the DJC halves 3 Wait 2 seconds 4 Disconnect the jumper wire and reconnect the DJC 5 The MIL illuminates constantly indicating the DTCs have been erased 6 When finished turn the key off Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 260 GLOSSARY AND ABBREVIATIONS This appendix contains terms and abbreviations found in the Ford body chassis and powertrain manuals 4EAT 4WABS ABS A C ACON ACT AIR AIRB AIRD ALDL 1 Antilock Brake Sys tem Air Suspen sion System AODE AOF AON AP Mazda 4 speed Electronic Automatic Transaxle 4 Wheel Antilock Braking System Antilock Brake System Air Conditioning Air Conditioning On Air Charge Temperature Secondary Air Injection Secondary Air Injection Bypass Secondary Air Injection Diverter Assembly Line Data Link Air Management 1 Computerized system that keeps wheels from locking during braking A computerized suspension system on late model Ford and Lincoln Vehi cles Ford electronic transmission with overdrive All Outputs Off All Outputs On Accelerator Pedal ARC ASCM A T ATM AXOD AXODE BARO BOO BTDC CANP2 CARB Cartridge CCA CCC Automatic Ride
113. Expected values for this parameter 104Ib ft KOEO and 64 4001b ft while driving with low to medium load Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 233 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions OBD II DRIVE CYCLE UNITS RANGE On Board Diagnostics version II OBD II Drive Cycle is a numeric count for the number of completed OBD II Drive Cycles An OBD II Drive Cycle is a method used to drive the vehicle to initiate and complete a specific OBD II monitor The OBD II Drive Cycle requires the vehicle to be driven in specific modes such as accelerations at certain throttle angles number of engine idle periods and steady vehicle speeds Performing an OBD II Drive Cycle is used to clear I M Maintenance Readiness DTC P1000 Expected values are 0 for no completed OBD II Drive Cycles or after Continuous DTCs have been cleared from memory and 1 or higher for completed OBD II Drive Cycles OBD II TRIP COMP YES NO On Board Diagnostics version II OBD II Trip Completed displays the completion status of a currently performed OBD II Trip An OBD II Trip refers to a drive cycle which after completion satisfies the requirement for diagnostic monitor test execution Certain diagnostic monitor tests are executed and completed after one trip while others are performed and completed more than once per trip Expected values are Yes for OBD Trip completed and No for a non completed OBD Trip OBD II TRIPS n a 0
114. Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford Grand Marquis 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford Merkur XR4Ti TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 1986 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Ranger C 2 0L ISC E ISC E Ford A 2 3L EFI EEC IV Ford T 2 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Bronco 9 4 9L FBC EEC IV Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV Ford Bronco Il A 2 3L EFI OHC EEC IV Ford T 2 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Aerostar A 2 3L EFI OHC EEC IV Ford S 2 8L FBC EEC IV Ford U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford E F Series Y 9 4 9L FBC EEC IV Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 25 3 Vehicle Coverage 1987 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1987 FORD PASSENGER CARS 1987 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Tempo x 2 3L HSC BASE EEC IV Ford S 2 3L HSC PLUS EEC IV Ford Taurus D 2 5L CFI HSC EEC IV Ford U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford 87 1 2 Police 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford Thunderbird 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford Escort 9 1 9L CFI EEC IV Ford J 1 9L EFI EEC IV Ford EXP 9 1 9L CFI EEC IV Ford J 1 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Mustang A 2 3L EFl OHC EEC IV Ford E M 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford Crown Victoria F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Continental F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford Mark VII F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford Town Car E 5 0L SEFI H O EEC IV Ford F 5 0
115. Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Vetronix Bosch Group Vetronix Corporation Copyright 2007 Manual P N 08002840 Rev B e Tech 1A9 and Mastertech are registered trademarks of Vetronix Corporation Printed in USA 05 07 Tech 1 This entire document and all information contained herein are proprietary confidential and exclusive trade secret property of Vetronix Corporation and shall not be reproduced duplicated or copied in whole or in part or made available to any person firm or corporation without the prior written permission of Vetronix Corporation Some Things You Should Know WARNING Exhaust Gas When performing any checks with the engine running in an enclosed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation Never inhale exhaust gases they contain carbon monoxide a colorless odorless extremely dangerous gas which can cause unconsciousness or death WARNING Avoiding Injury AN Always set the parking brake securely and block the drive wheels before performing any checks or repairs on the vehicle Important Please Read The Tech 1 Tech 1 and MTS 3100 are designed for use by trained service personnel only They have been developed for the sole purpose of diagnosing and repairing automotive electronic systems With the help of the tester the information presented in this manual and the appropriate automotive service manual qualified personnel should
116. Ford Powertrain Application can print the captured data providing a hard copy of any selected data sample Refer to the printer Operator s Manual and the tester Operator s Manual for printing instructions SELECTING SNAPSHOT MODE The operation of the SNAPSHOT mode is divided into three phases Setup Data Capture and Data Replay To select Setup Phase of Snapshot Mode do the following 1 Select the SNAPSHOT mode from the Test Mode menu by pressing Gp 2 Select the trigger point by pressing Gp then select the desired point beginning center or end of data When the trigger point is selected the tester automatically returns to the previous menu ACTIVE KEYS SNAPSHOT SETUP PHASE Set trigger point at beginning Ga Set trigger point at center Set trigger point at end Selects Snapshot mode or Snapshot Replay GJ Select trigger point and manual trigger Scroll through displayed data parameters Manual trigger Manual trigger Go to data display phase of Snapshot mode Return to test mode menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 125 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To select Data Capture Phase of Snapshot Mode do the following 3 Press to Select Snapshot Manual trigger data capture All data captured during Snapshot is retained in the tester until it is overwritten by a new Snapshot or if the tester power is disconnected for more than 30 minu
117. HICLE COVERAGE 1981 1982 FORD PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Fairmont A 2 31 FBC MCU Ford D 4 2L FBC MCU Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 16 3 Vehicle Coverage 1981 1982 FORD PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Thunderbird 3 3 8L FBC MCU Ford D 4 2L FBC MCU Ford Mustang A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford D 4 2L FBC MCU Ford F 5 0L FBC MCU Ford Granada A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford 3 3 81 FBC MCU Ford D 4 2L FBC MCU Ford Ford D 4 2L FBC MCU Ford F 5 0L FBC MCU Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford a Includes California 1980 2 3L FBC with MCU 1981 1982 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Continental 3 3 8L FBC MCU Ford F 5 0L FBC MCU Ford Mark VII F 5 0L FBC MCU Ford Lincoln F 5 0L FBC MCU Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 17 3 Vehicle Coverage 1981 1982 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS a Includes California 1980 2 3L FBC with MCU VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Zephyr A 2 3L MCU Ford D 4 2L FBC MCU Ford Cougar A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford 3 3 81 FBC MCU Ford D 4 2L FBC MCU Ford Capri A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford D 4 2L FBC MCU Ford F 5 0L FBC MCU Ford Mercury D 4 2L FBC MCU Ford F 5 0L FBC MCU Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford 1981 1982 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Bronco E 4 9L FBC MCU For
118. HO2S 2 switches indicates lean 177 Lack of Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S 2 switches indicates rich 179 Fuel system at lean adaptive limit at part throttle system rich 181 Fuel system at rich adaptive limit at part throttle system lean 184 Mass Air Flow MAF sensor voltage higher than expected 185 Mass Air Flow MAF sensor voltage lower than expected 186 Injector pulsewidth higher than expected with BARO sensor or MAF lower than expected without BARO sensor 187 Injector pulsewidth lower than expected with BARO sensor or MAF higher than expected without BARO sensor 188 Fuel system at lean adaptive limit at part throttle system rich 189 Fuel system at rich adaptive limit at part throttle system lean 193 Flexible Fuel FF sensor circuit failure 211 Profile Ignition Pickup PIP circuit failure 212 Loss of Tachometer Ignition Diagnostic Monitor IDM input to PCM SPOUT circuit grounded 213 SPOUT circuit open 214 Cylinder Identification CID circuit failure 215 PCM detected coil 1 primary circuit failure 216 PCM detected coil 2 primary circuit failure 217 PCM detected coil 3 primary circuit failure 218 Loss of Ignition Diagnostic Monitor IDM signal left side 219 Spark timing defaulted to 10 degrees SPOUT circuit open 221 Spark timing error Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 205 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptio
119. I AXOD M A EEC IV DCL Ford Thunderbird 4 3 8L SFI RWD EEC IV DCL Ford R 3 8L SC SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford W 4 6L SFI EEC IV SCP OBD II C2 Mustang 4 3 8L SFI EEC IV SCP OBD II C2 T 5 0L SC SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford D 5 0L Cobra SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Crown Victoria W 4 6L SFI M A 2V AOD E EEC IV DCL Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 39 3 Vehicle Coverage 1994 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ie ADAPTER Continental 3 8L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Mark VIII V 4 6L SFI 4V AOD E EEC IV DCL Ford Town Car W 4 6L SFI M A AOD E EEC IV DCL Ford 1994 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Tracer J 1 9L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Topaz X 2 3L 5 1 M A HSC EEC IV DCL Ford U 3 0L SFI EEC IV DCL Ford Sable U 3 0L SFI EEC IV DCL Ford 4 3 8L SFI EEC IV DCL Ford Cougar 4 3 8L SFI RWD EEC IV DCL Ford W 4 6L SFI EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 Grand Marquis W 4 6L SFI M A 2V AOD E EEC IV DCL Ford 1994 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Ranger A 2 3L MFI FED EEC IV DCL Ford A 2 3L SFI CA EEC IV DCL Ford U 3 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford X 4 0L MFI M A FED EEC IV DCL Ford X 4 0L MFI M A CA EEC IV DCL Ford Bronco Y 4 9L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L SFI EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8
120. I C2 MAF Grand Marquis M7 4 6L V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Marauder MAF 9 4 6L V8 CNG EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF V 4 6L DOHC EEC V SCP OBD II C2 2003 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER MODEL E INE 9 5th amp 6th VIN 8th SIN TYPE LINK CONFIG Ranger RO R1 R4 D 2 3L SOHC 14 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF U 3 0L V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 OHV MAF V 3 0L V6 Flex EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Fuel E 4 0L SOHC V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF Escape UO U9 B 2 0L I4 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 ZETEC 1 3 0L V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF DURETEC Explorer Sport U6 U7 E 4 0L SOHC V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Sport Trac SFI MAF Explorer U6 U7 U8 E 4 0L SOHC V6 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF 4 6L V8 SFI PTEC SCP OBD II C2 MAF K 4 0L SOHC V6 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 EFI Flex Fuel Mountaineer U6 U8 E 4 0L SOHC V6 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF 4 6L V8 SFI PTEC SCP OBD II C2 MAF K 4 0L SOHC V6 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 EFI Flex Fuel Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 63 3 Vehicle Coverage 2003 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER E INE MODEL 5th amp 6th VIN 8th NGIN TYPE LINK CONFIG Expedition U1 W 4 6L SOHC V8 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF L E 5 4L SOHC 2V PTEC SCP OBD II C2 V8 SFI MAF R 5 4L SOHC 4V PTEC SCP OBD II C2 V8 SFI MAF Nav
121. I EEC IV None Ford X 4 0L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 32 3 Vehicle Coverage 1990 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ae ADAPTER E F Series Y 4 9L EFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford als EEC IV DCL Ford G 7 5L EFI EEC IV None Ford EEC IV None Ford a California models only b E4OD Transmission only c GVWR 8500 lbs or less only 1991 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1991 FORD PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Escort J 1 9L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Tempo x 2 3L EFl HSC BASE EEC IV None Ford S 2 3L EFI HSC PLUS EEC IV None Ford Probe U 3 0L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford Taurus N 2 5L HSC SEFI M A EEC IV None Ford Y 3 0L SHO SEFI M A EEC IV None Ford U 3 0L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD M A EEC IV DCL Ford Thunderbird 4 3 8L SEFI RWD EEC IV DCL Ford R 3 8L SC SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford T 5 0L SEFI H O M A EEC IV DCL Ford Mustang M 2 3L EFI OHC M A EEC IV DCL Ford E 5 0L SEFI H O M A EEC IV None Ford Crown Victoria 4 6L SEFI M A EEC IV None Ford F 5 0L SEFI M A EEC IV None Ford F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV None Ford G 5 8L CARB MCU None Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 33 3 Vehicle Coverage 1991 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA PI ADAPTER Continental 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD M
122. II C2 Crown Victoria W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 9 4 6L V8 CNG SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 1999 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Continental V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Town Car W 4 6L 2V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 1999 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Mystique 3 2 0L I4 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 50 3 Vehicle Coverage 1999 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED Cougar 3 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Sable S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 Grand Marquis W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 1999 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Ranger 2 5L SOHC 14 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 V 3 0L FFV SFI MAF EED V SCP OBD 11 2 X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Explorer X 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 E 4 0L SOHC V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 P 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EED V SCP OBD II C2 Mountaineer E 4 0L SOHC V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 P 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 Expedition 6 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 W 4 6L SOHC V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 L
123. INE and press An information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Glow Plug test 5 Warm the engine to normal operating temperature use temperature gauge on instrument panel Press when the engine is at normal operating temperature NOTE On a diesel engine it takes a while to get the engine up to normal operating temperature Ensuring that the engine is at normal operating temperature is vital for this test to operate properly 6 A tester key help information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Glow Plug test The message TEST IN PROCESS appears then the results of the test are displayed NOTE The PCM may take up to 1 minute or more to complete this test The tester displays test results when the PCM is finished with the test If there are no DTCs to report you see NO DTCs and pressing EXIT or waiting 5 seconds returns you to the Test Selection Menu You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT If there are DTCs to report the tester displays DTCs in a column list format This screen shows the total number of DTCs and DTC numbers read from the vehicle PCM Using the O and keys the cursor can be scrolled through the list of reported DTCs 7 When the cursor is next to a DTC number pressing ENTER displays the DTC order as received from the PCM DTC number text description and applicable Pinpoint Test If there are multiple
124. ING CODES STAR 11 11 ERASE CODES YES NO 10 F1 TEST MORE TEST CODES CODE BUFFER HAS 24 CODES IN IT AND IS FULL v STAR 8 12 22 25 9 33 67 10 1 TEST CODE LINES FULL REVIEW amp ERASE F0 REVIEW F3 ERASE DISPLAYS ALTERNATE EVERY 3 SECONDS WHEN FULL FIGURE 5 13 Star Mode CHANGE STI LINE FROM HOLD TO CHANGE CODES READ TYPE FROM FAST TO SLOW Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 122 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To select Star Mode do the following 1 Select the STAR MODE from the Test Mode Menu then select the system type by pressing Gf or for EEC IV or MECS system The Star Help menu is present showing active keys Pressing REVIEW CODES changes the display to the code screen The left side of this display shows the code line numbers from 0 9 You may scroll up and down examining codes anytime you are in this menu The and keys scroll the code lines If you are starting to test a new vehicle check to see if any codes are displayed on the tester If codes are displayed they are left over from the previous vehicle testing and should be erased by pressing see Step 6 The key performs the same function as the push button on the STAR Tester it toggles the state of the STI line If you are ready to do a Quick Test pressing Gp grounds the STI line and the tester disp
125. IV Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV Ford H 5 8L EFI EEC IV Ford G 7 51 EFI EEC IV Ford 1989 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1989 FORD PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Tempo X 2 3L EFI BASE EEC IV Ford S 2 3L EFI PLUS EEC IV Ford Taurus D 2 5L CFI HSC EEC IV Ford U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford Y 3 0L SHO SEFI EEC IV Ford 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD EEC IV Ford Thunderbird 4 3 8L SEFI RWD EEC IV Ford C 3 8L SC SEFI EEC IV Ford R 3 8L SC SEFI EEC IV Ford Escort 9 1 9L CFI EEC IV Ford J 1 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Mustang A 2 3L EFI OHC EEC IV Ford E 5 0L SEFI M A EEC IV Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 29 3 Vehicle Coverage 1989 FORD PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Crown Victoria 5 0L SEFI 5 8L FBC EEC IV MCU Ford Ford 1989 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA Continental 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD EEC IV DCL Ford Mark VII E 5 0L SEFI H O EEC IV None Ford Town Car F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV None Ford 1989 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Topaz X 2 3L EFI BASE EEC IV Ford S 2 3L EFI PLUS EEC IV Ford Sable U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford Y 3 0L SHO SEFI EEC IV Ford 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD EEC IV Ford Cougar 4 3 8L SEFI RWD EEC IV Ford C 3 8L SC SEFI EEC IV Ford R 3 8L SC SEFI EEC IV Ford Grand Marquis F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV F
126. Interface Cartridge into the Auxiliary Cartridge slot on the top of the tester Attach the 16 14 pin OBD II adapter cable to the vehicle end of the DLC cable Connect the 16 pin end of the adapter cable to the vehicle 16 pin DLC J1962 DLC Location On most vehicles the 16 pin DLC J1962 is located under the dashboard on the drivers side For Thunderbird it can be located under dash on the passenger side If the vehicle has an EEC IV engine IVSC system there will be a small STI connector pigtailed off of the Ford 6 pin self test connector Insert the small STI connector into the open slot on the Ford adapter Continue to Powering Up the Tester on page 73 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 71 4 Getting Started TECH 1 Before operating the Tech 1 tester perform the following steps 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Connect the DLC cable to the tester and tighten the screws 3 Insert the application cartridge into the Master Cartridge slot on the bottom rear of the tester FIGURE 4 3 Inserting Cartridge into the Tech 1 Application Cartridge SW or Mass Storage Cartridge MSC 4 EEC IV MCU ISC E IVSC ES Systems Attach the Ford 7 pin adapter to the vehicle end of the DLC cable Connect the 7 pin end larger end of the adapter to the vehicle quick test connector In addition if you are testing a MECS or 4EAT system you need to connect two jumper wires between the Ford adap
127. L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford Explorer X 4 0L MFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Aerostar U 3 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford X 4 0L MFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 40 3 Vehicle Coverage 1994 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK E F Series Y 4 9L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L SFI EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford R 5 8L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford J 7 0L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford K 7 3L Diesel Turbo IDI EEC IV None Ford M 7 3L Diesel NAV EEC IV None Ford G 7 5L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford 1995 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1995 FORD PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Escort J 1 91 14 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford Contour 3 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford Probe A 2 0L 14 SFI MAF WT EEC IV None Ford A 2 0L 14 SFI MAF CD4E EEC IV DCL Ford Taurus b 1 3 0L V6 SFI MAF FFV EEC IV DCL Ford Y 3 0L V6 SFI MAF SHO EEC IV None Ford U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford P 3 2L V6 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford Thunderbird 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF RWD EEC IV DCL Ford R 3 8L V6 SFI MAF SC EEC IV DCL Ford W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 T 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford D 5 0L V8 SFI MAF Cobra EEC IV DCL Ford Crown Victoria W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2
128. L SEFI EEC IV Ford 1987 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Topaz X 2 3L HSC BASE EEC IV Ford S 2 3L HSC PLUS EEC IV Ford Sable D 2 5L CFI HSC EEC IV Ford U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford Cougar W 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI RWD EEC IV Ford F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 26 3 Vehicle Coverage 1987 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Lynx 9 1 9L CFI EEC IV Ford J 1 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Grand Marquis F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford Merkur XR4Ti W 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 1987 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Ranger 2 0L ISC E ISC E Ford A 2 3L EFl OHC EEC IV Ford T 2 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Bronco Y 4 9L EFI EEC IV Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV Ford Bronco 11 T 2 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Aerostar A 2 3L EFI OHC EEC IV Ford U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford E F Series Y 4 9L EFI EEC IV Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV Ford G 7 51 EFI EEC IV Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 27 3 Vehicle Coverage 1988 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1988 FORD PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Tempo x 2 3L HSC BASE EEC IV Ford S 2 3L HSC PLUS EEC IV Ford Taurus D 2 5L CFI HSC EEC IV Ford U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford 4 3 8L EFI AXOD EEC IV Ford Thunderbird 2 3L EFI Turbo EE
129. LE COVERAGE 1986 FORD PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Tempo x 2 3L HSC BASE EEC IV Ford S 2 3L HSC PLUS EEC IV Ford Taurus D 2 5L CFI HSC EEC IV Ford U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford Thunderbird TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford Escort J 1 9L EFI EEC IV Ford EXP J 1 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Mustang A 2 3L FBC OHC EEC IV Ford TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford M 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford LTD A 2 3L FBC OHC EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford Crown Victoria F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford 1986 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Continental F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford Mark VII F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford M 5 0L SEFI H O EEC IV Ford Town Car F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford 1986 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Topaz X 2 3L HSC BASE EEC IV Ford S 2 3L HSC PLUS EEC IV Ford Sable D 2 5L CFI HSC EEC IV Ford U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 24 3 Vehicle Coverage 1986 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Cougar TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV Ford Capri A 2 3L FBC OHC EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford M 5 0L SEFI H O EEC IV Ford Lynx J 1 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Marquis A 2 3L FBC OHC EEC IV
130. LICATION CARTRIDGE 16 14 PIN ADAPTER CABLE P N 02001969 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 85 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 11 OBD II Configuration for Tech 1 TECH 1 DLC CABLE TECH 1 14 12 PIN VIM ADAPTER PIN 02001198 APPLICATIION CARTRIDGE TECH 1 OBD II VEHICLE INTERFACE MODULE VIM PIN 02001808 16 24 PIN ADAPTER CABLE 02001744 or P N 3000081 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 86 4 Getting Started VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN It is important to be able to identify the vehicle identification number VIN in order to properly select a vehicle on which to run diagnostics Figure 4 12 is an example of a Ford Motor Company VIN The location of the engine type and model year characters are indicated TYPICAL VIN 1 F A K VIN CHARACTER 112 D 8 8th Character Engine Type 10 10th Character 11 12 Model Year BRONA KXKSKCANADAVZSTHACLIOATMMIOD 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 FIGURE 4 12 Typical Ford Motor Co Vehicle Identification Number VIN Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 87 5 SELECTING AND OPERATING TEST MODES This chapter provide a detailed description of each test available in this application Following the test
131. Modes adjusted through its range See Zable 5 2 Transmission Controls for a list of Transmission components and their available adjustment ranges a Press the key to turn the component ON or to adjust it up through its range b Press the key to turn the component OFF or to adjust it down through its range 9 The data list parameters are displayed while the Transmission control is selected A three character description of the selected component is displayed at the end of line 2 of the display These characters serve as a reminder as to which control is being performed The last two characters of line 4 of the display indicate the commanded value of the component 10 Press or Qs to scroll through the displayed parameters all data list functions are available Refer to Mode F0 DATA LIST for instructions on viewing and printing the data list parameters 11 Press to quit the Transmission Control and return control of the selected component to the PCM ACTIVE KEYS Turn the component ON or to adjust it up through its range Turn the component OFF or to adjust it down through its range YES Ga Scroll through displayed diagnostic data parameters Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Exit from test and return control to PCM Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 175 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTR
132. ODE OPERATION WARNING Use care when performing these tests If used incorrectly these test result in personal injury or damage to the PCM ABS GEM FEM RCM ECS IABM or vehicle ALWAYS PUT THE PARKING BRAKE ON AND BLOCK THE WHEELS WHEN USING THIS TEST MODE PROTECT SNAPSHOT DATA Snapshot data is retained in tester memory for up to 24 hours even if the CAUTION tester is disconnected from the vehicle If you remove or change master cartridges or power up the tester without a master cartridge or with a different master cartridge you will lose the snapshot data Page 13 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 2 Operating Precautions CHECK TESTER INDUCED DTCs Under some conditions the tester can cause trouble codes to be set Generally these codes are associated with the serial data link It is CAUTION important to determine if the trouble codes are set by the tester or are due to a true malfunction in the vehicle Check for trouble codes at the start and at the end of testing If there are codes set at the end of testing but not at the start you may assume that they are caused by the tester and should be cleared and ignored PRECAUTIONS FOR FORD POWERTRAIN APPLICATION DON T DISCONNECT WHILE RUNNING KOEO CAUTION D Disconnecting tester power during Key On Engine Off KOEO test can N clear the vehicle s continuous codes Ford Powertra
133. ODULATION 0 100 Torque Converter Clutch TCC Modulation is a measure of TCC applied or partially applied condition The ECA controls how much TCC apply pressure during certain powertrain operating conditions TCC PRES SWTCH STATES Torque Converter Clutch TCC Pressure Switch is a pressure switch that measures transmission hydraulic pressure for the TCC circuit This is an input to the ECA TCC SOLENOID ON OFF Torque Converter Clutch TCC Solenoid is an indication of the engaging of the TCC solenoid The TCC solenoid can be ON TCC engaged or OFF TCC disengaged Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 238 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions TFT Diesel Engine Degrees F 0 220 Transmission Fluid Temperature displays the temperature of the transmission fluid Note that the in parenthesis indicates the parameter 15 temperature related TFT V Diesel Engine Volts 0 5 The Transmission Fluid Temperature sensor is a thermistor mounted to transmission whose resistance decreases as transmission fluid temperature increases Note that the V in parenthesis indicates the parameter is voltage related TOT SENSOR V UNITS RANGE Transmission Oil Temperature TOT is an analog voltage input to the ECA from the TOT sensor Available on selected Ford vehicles only the TOT can be used to determine proper transmission operation TOT SENSOR Degrees F 0
134. OLS F8 INFORMATION CONTROL TYPE Y F0 OUTPUT TESTS F1 ENGINE F2 TRANSMISSION SELECT CONTROL y F0 SHIFT SOL 1 F1 SHIFT SOL 2 F2 SHIFT SOL 3 F3 SHIFT SOL 4 F4 TCC LOCKUP WAITING FOR DATA SELECT LIST Y ENGINE TRANSMISSION FUEL EMISSION SELECT LIST F0 ALL DATA F1 CUSTOM LIST TCC SOLENOID OFF 551 SHIFT SOLENOID 1 OFF OFF TCC SOLENOID OFF 551 SHIFT SOLENOID 1 ON ON TCC SOLENOID OFF 551 SHIFT SOLENOID 1 OFF OFF ENTER ENGINE SPEED SELECTED YES SELECT 1 NO DE SELECT Additional parameter selection FIGURE 5 33 Submode F2 Transmission Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 176 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS DIESEL SUBMODE F0 OUTPUT STATE TEST Performing the Output State key on engine off On Demand test causes the PCM to command all outputs On or all outputs Off The Output State test allows you to check the operation of outputs within the diesel engine EEC V systems The test involves depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal to turn all outputs On then depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal to turn all outputs Off This cycle can be repeated until the test is stopped by the user The Wait to Start lamp can be used to determine if the PCM is controlling PCM outputs and on some vehicles with automatic transmissions the TCS lamp may also toggle On
135. ON RANGE FO Idle Speed Adjusts the duty cycle of the ISC motor 0 100 F1 EGR Adjusts the duty cycle of the EGR Vacuum Regulator 0 100 F2 Evap Purge Adjusts the duty cycle of the Evap Purge valve 0 100 F3 O2 B1 S1 Htr Toggles the Upstream bank 1 O2 sensor heater ON OFF F4 O2 B1 S2 Htr Toggles the Downstream Bank 1 O2 sensor heater ON OFF F5 O2 B2 S1 Htr Toggles the Upstream Bank 2 O2 sensor heater ON OFF F6 O2 B2 S2 Htr Toggles the Downstream Bank 2 O2 sensor heater ON OFF TABLE 5 1 Engine Controls Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 171 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes oN oo N Component coverage is vehicle dependent If a component is not J supported the tester will display an error message Select one of the Data Lists Press Gf for ENGINE G for TRANSMISSION for FUEL or G for EMISSION Each Data List has different data parameters to view Select FO ALL DATA or F1 CUSTOM LIST from the select list menu If F1 CUSTOM LIST is selected choose the parameters for display and press 19 9 for more information on setting up data list see Mode F0 Data List on page 134 You are prompted with a message that identifies the vehicle conditions that must be met for the Engine control to be performed safely and accurately Select at the conditions screen to begin the Engine control test Once the tester displays the data list y
136. On Engine Run ning Test KOEO or K ON ENG OFF Voltage level of the ECA s STI line when no request for Quick Test is made It has a voltage near the posi tive battery terminal High Swirl Combustion High Speed Fan Heater Hertz Integrated Air Bag Module Idle Air Control Intake Air Temperature Instrument Cluster Module Ignition Diagnostic Monitor Interface Ignition Intake Manifold Runner Control Intake Manifold Turning Valve Injector as in fuel injector Idle Speed Controller Electronic The carburetor controller on 1985 89 2 0L Ranger trucks Integrated Vehicle Speed Controller A computerized cruise control sys tem Refers to the IVSC Quick Test with the engine off and its results Refers to the IVSC Quick Test with the engine running and its results Ignition Key Keep Alive Memory Engine Quick Test where the ECA sensors and control systems are tested under battery voltage only Engine Quick Test where the ECA sensors and control systems are tested under operating conditions Key On Engine Off Test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 263 Glossary and Abbreviations KOER or K ON ENGRUN LCD LF LSF LT MAF MAP MCU MECS MFI MIL MISC MITCHELL ML MLP MON M T N A NDS NGV 028 Key On Engine Running Test Liter a metric unit approximately 60 5 in Liquid Crystal Display Left Front Low Speed Fan Long T
137. RI ec ios 217 Desr mor FOAL p n S SP d DAR dpa ee added edad Gh bad 217 DS xk ark dir Adak etd dede Sende duda bet ac Ded date 218 DATA LIST PARAMETERS ue bro bei een ha ee Reed 218 SNC PORE sir die by daduaddadq 218 Ado C PONE QUERN UH dde Ead NE 218 ID D PINO O 223 iro I P NEEE Forn thre AR dac dOpedubadubs Ed ER ERE REESE 227 E E btw de debi uad abe ee de de beoe E 230 de qu 231 PD ee quu ipa Eoi 235 DID UC FINES auaessxethephebecqpsbqpvspbpxe SHY ET 235 tn di ch Guarded 242 FREEZE FRAME PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS _ 243 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 TOC iv E FORD MAZDA POWERTRAIN MODULES AND DIAGNOSTICS 245 1993 2002 MERCURY VILLAGER 258 Manually Reading DTCs 1993 2002 Mercury Villager 3 0L VINW 258 Manually Clearing DTCs on 1993 2002 Mercury Villager 3 0L VINZW 260 G GLOSSARY AND 5 261 2 HH Index 267
138. ROL y F0 ALL ON F1 ALL OFF F2 LOW SPD FAN WAITING FOR DATA SELECT LIST AV F0 ENGINE F1 TRANSMISSION F2 FUEL EMISSION SELECT LIST F0 ALL DATA F1 CUSTOM LIST ENGINE SPEED SELECTED YES SELECT 1 NO DE SELECT ENTER Additional parameter selection IDLE AIR CNTRL 1 AON LOOP STATUS OPEN OFF If engine is started IDLE AIR CNTRL 100 LOOP STATUS OPEN IDLE AIR CNTRL 1 AON LOOP STATUS ON OPEN OFF IDLE AIR CNTRL ENGINE RUNNING 1 AON OR OUTPUT CONTRL LOOP STATUS TEST NOT AVAIL OPEN OFF EXIT FIGURE 5 28 All Outputs On Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 162 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Select All Outputs On output control test Turn test ON Turn test OFF NO Scroll through displayed diagnostic data parameters G GD Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Exit from output control test Submode F1 All Outputs Off This test is available on all 1994 and newer vehicles with gasoline engines and the EEC V powertrain systems Once the output test begins the test commands selected output actuators to run in the key on engine off state If an output actuator is normally in the ON state running this test changes the output actuator to the OFF state This mode is described in For
139. SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 4 4 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 42 3 Vehicle Coverage 1995 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA pas ADAPTER LINK E F Series Y 4 9L I6 MAP EEC IV DCL Ford Y 4 9L 16 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L V8 SFI MAF EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8L V8 MFI MAP EEC IV DCL Ford R 5 8L V8 SFI MAF H O EEC IV DCL Ford F 7 3L TC Diesel EEC V SCP OBD II C2 G 7 5L V8 MFI MAP EEC IV DCL Ford F L Series J 7 0L V8 MFI MAP EEC IV DCL Ford 1996 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1996 FORD PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Escort J 1 9L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Contour 3 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Probe A 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Taurus 1 3 0L V6 FFV SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L V6 2V SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 3 0L V6 4V SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Taurus SHO N 3 4L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang GT X 4 6L V8 2V SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang Cobra V 4 6L V8 4V SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Thunderbird 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L V8 2V SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Crown Victoria 9 4 6L V8 CNG SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 W 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 6 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2
140. Scroll through displayed data parameters or for custom list setup select or deselect parameters Start manual trigger or Custom List data Start manual trigger Go to data display phase of Snapshot mode Return to test mode menu Scroll through parameters in Custom List To select Data Replay Phase do the following 9 The Data Replay phase is indicated with a number initially zero in the lower right hand corner of the display Select the data parameter to be displayed using 10 Use the and keys to select the desired sample An index is displayed in lower right hand corner of the tester display Sample 0 corresponds to the trigger sample sample 1 is the sample immediately proceeding the trigger sample 1 is immediately after the trigger and so on The index range may be less than the maximum number of samples if enough time was not allowed for data capture before or after the trigger The following keys can be used to move about more quickly in the data samples Display first earliest sample Display Trigger sample Display last most recent sample 11 Pressing toggles between the sample index and sample time displays ECT V 0 60 VOLTS ENGINE SPEED 1750RPM 16 ENTER ENTER Sample Time ENG COOL TEMP 91 196 F ENGINE SPEED 1750RPM 3 4 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 159 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes The sampl
141. Select Key On Engine Running test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 108 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F3 KEY ON ENGINE RUNNING TEST IVSC Integrated Vehicle Speed Control IVSC is Ford s computerized cruise control system Engine off and engine running Quick Tests on the IVSC system can be performed via the same Quick Test connector used by the EEC IV engine control assembly As with the engine Quick Tests all items in the Prepare Vehicle directions should be completed before diagnosing the IVSC Since some engine related components affect the IVSC all engine related Quick Tests should have a pass condition before trying to diagnose the IVSC You get the Pinpoint Test message Do KOEO if any EEC IV related service codes are received from the vehicle while doing IVSC engine off tests This is because the codes are KOEO service codes and the Pinpoint Tests for these codes are in the Engine Emissions Diagnosis manuals not the manuals containing IVSC diagnostics To select KOER Test IVSC do the following 1 Press GI from the Select System menu to select Cruise Control tests 2 From the Select mode menu press GJ to perform the IVSC engine running test 3 Answer to the test initialization prompts after each action is completed 4 After the engine is started you have 30 seconds to press the IVSC speed control ON button Press when done While AWAITING CODES do not touch the brake or t
142. T or Pinpoint Test decoding is available CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Integrated Vehicle Speed Control IVSC VEHICLES 1988 90 Taurus Sable 1989 95 Taurus SHO 1988 90 Crown Victoria Grand Marquis 1987 90 Towncar 1987 90 Mark VII 1988 90 Continental 1988 90 Thunderbird Cougar 1993 Mark VIII 4 Speed Electronic Automatic Transaxle 4EAT 6 and 17pin DLC 1990 95 Probe 1991 95 Escort Tracer 1991 94 Capri a Read codes in STAR MODE only no QUICK TEST or Pinpoint Test decoding is available Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 3 Operating Modes 1 Ford Powertrain Application Description FORD MAZDA ENGINE AND TRANSAXLE SYSTEM VEHICLES Mazda Engine 1994 95 Aspire Control System 1990 95 Probe MECS 6 and 17 1990 95 Escort Tracer pin DLC 1990 93 Festiva 1990 94 Capri 4 Speed Electronic 1990 95 Probe Automatic Transaxle 1991 95 Escort Tracer 4EAT 6 and 17pin 1991 94 Capri DLC a Read codes in STAR MODE only no QUICK TEST or Pinpoint Test decoding is available OPERATING MODES The test modes available vary according to the specific configuration of the vehicle being tested and the system you wish to test Before testing can begin the tester asks you to enter certain information such as the model year the type of vehicle being tested the system you wish to test and other specific information How to enter
143. TA LINK DCL DCL DCL DCL None None ADAPTER Ford Ford Ford Ford Ford Ford a E4OD Transmission b GVWR 8500 lbs or less only 1992 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1992 FORD PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Escort J 1 9L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Tempo X 2 3L SEFI M A HSC BASE EEC IV DCL Ford S 2 3L SEFI M A HSC PLUS EEC IV DCL Ford U 3 0L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Probe U 3 0L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford Taurus Y 3 0L SHO SEFI M A EEC IV None Ford U 3 0L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD M A EEC IV DCL Ford Thunderbird 4 3 8L SEFI RWD EEC IV DCL Ford R 3 8L SC SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford T 5 0L SEFI H O M A EEC IV DCL Ford Mustang M 2 3L EFI OHC M A EEC IV DCL Ford E 5 0L SEFI H O M A EEC IV None Ford Crown Victoria W 4 6L SEFI M A AOD E EEC IV DCL Ford W 4 6L SEFI M A AOD EEC IV DCL Ford a 2 valve engine only Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 35 3 Vehicle Coverage 1992 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Continental 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD M A EEC IV DCL Ford Mark VII E 5 0L SEFI EEC IV None Ford Town Car Ww 4 6L SEFI M A AOD E EEC IV DCL8 Ford 4 6L SEFI AOD EEC IV DCL Ford a 2 valve engine only 1992 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Tracer J 1 9L SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Topaz X 2
144. TEC SCP OBD II C2 P 2 0L DOHC 16V SFI MAF PTEC SCP OBD II C2 Contour 3 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Taurus 2 3 0L 2V V6 FFV SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang 4 3 8L V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang GT X 4 6L 2V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang Cobra V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Crown Victoria 4 6L V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 9 4 6L V8 CNG SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Continental V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Town Car 4 61 2V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 LS S 3 0L SFI MAF PTEC SCP OBD II C2 A 3 9L SFI MAF PTEC SCP OBD II C2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 52 3 Vehicle Coverage 2000 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Mystique 3 2 0L I4 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Cougar 3 2 0L I4 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Sable S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Grand Marquis 4 6L V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 9 4 6L V8 CNG SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 8TH DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA LINK ADAPTER Ranger 2 5L SOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3
145. TEST F3 SNAPSHOT SELECTTEST Ay F0 PREP VEHICLE F1 CONTINUOUS F2 KOEO PERFORM F0 PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST ENTER ENTER CONTINUOUS MEMORY QUICK TEST START YES NO TURN IGNITION KEY OFF DONE YES NO TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN DONE YES NO SCROLL UP Y SCROLL DOWN NTER DTC DESC EXIT QUIT TEST IN PROCESS No response after 60 No DTCs DTCs Stored seconds CONT DTCs 11 CONT DTC 1 P0102 NO DATA OR PCM NO DTCs gt P0102 P1000 MAF SENSOR CKT RESPONSE CHECK P0104 P1359 LOW INPUT IGN KEY ON DLC P0110 P1401 PPT DC6 CONN OR PPT QA1 Scrolling gt Cursor More Listed DTCs TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT FIGURE 5 22 Continuous DTC Test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 141 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Return to Test Selection Menu Select test or change to DTC description display Confirm that requested test sequence has been finished and page down when in DTC number screen Scroll left or right when in DTC list screen Scroll up or down when in DTC list screen or changes DTC information display Select Continuous DTC test SUBMODE F2 KEY ON ENGINE OFF TEST Performing the Key On Engine Off KOEO Diagnostic Trouble Code read test causes the PCM to output key on engine off on demand DTCs For a KOEO DTC to o
146. Test Selection Menu Advance through test screens Confirm that requested test sequence has been finished Select Output State Test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 177 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F2 GLOW PLUG TEST Performing the Glow Plug key on engine running On Demand test causes the PCM to run a test of all glow plugs and glow plug circuits For a Glow Plug DTC to occur a fault must be present while performing the Glow Plug on demand test Glow Plug related KOER DTCs are not stored in the PCM memory The Glow Plug test should be performed if a problem with the glow plug s or glow plug circuit is suspected The powertrain control system can output Glow Plug DTCs when the ignition key is on and the engine is running which makes it valuable when diagnosing hard failures This is possible because the PCM 15 commanded to perform the Glow Plug On Demand test NOTE Some 1995 96 7 3L Powerstroke Diesel engines may not support this test J Consult Ford Service information for test application To select Glow Plug Test do the following 1 Press Gp to select the Glow Plug test from the Test Selection Menu You are reminded to PERFORM PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST Press Gass 2 You are prompted to initiate the Glow Plug test Press to perform or to exit to the Test Selection Menu 3 Perform the instruction TURN IGNITION KEY OFF then press 4 START ENG
147. Y OFF BEFORE EXIT Turn the key off then press again to return to the Test Selection menu This sequence prevents Continuous codes from being erased NOTE On some Ford vehicles it is necessary to wait until 10 seconds after all slow codes are flashed on dashboard MIL before exiting KOEO test Failure to do so may clear continuous DTCs stored in the ECA ACTIVE KEYS Return to Test Selection menu Confirms that requested test sequence has been finished Show next code received Stop auto display or show previous code Ga Selects Key On Engine Off test Toggle between KOEO and CONTINUOUS code pages Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 100 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F1 KEY ON ENGINE OFF TEST IVSC Integrated Vehicle Speed Control IVSC is Ford s computerized cruise control system Engine off and engine running Quick Tests on the IVSC system can be performed via the same Quick Test connector used by the EEC IV engine control assembly As with the engine Quick Tests all items in the Prepare Vehicle directions should be done before diagnosing the IVSC Since some engine related components affect the IVSC all engine related Quick Tests should have a pass condition before trying to diagnose the IVSC You get the Pinpoint Test message Do KOEO if any EEC IV related service codes are received from the vehicle while doing IVSC engine off tests This is because
148. YPE FIGURE 5 11 Example of Reviewing and Decoding Engine Codes ACTIVE KEYS G3 Select Review Codes from Test Selection menu Review Star codes Cycles between KOER Continuous and KOEO Codes Ga Review Quick Test codes Move cursor left for Star codes o Move cursor right for Star codes Move cursor up for Star codes For other codes show next code received Move cursor down for Star codes For other codes stop auto display or show previous code ENTER Toggle from the code list display to the Pinpoint Test for the code next to the cursor in the Star mode Toggle from the Pinpoint Test screen to the code list display in Star mode and returns to test selection menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 118 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F9 PRINT SUMMARY Print Summary is a tester feature not a Ford Quick Test While you are in the Quick Test Mode a record is kept of all tests performed and the results or service codes received in each test In the STAR MODE the Star service codes are saved by the tester at entry exit and before erasing codes When a summary is printed you get a chronological record of the vehicle selection and all tests that were run If you are using a Tech 1 tester the optional RS232C I F Cartridge and Tech 1 Printer or equivalent serial printer are required for printing Refer to the RS232 Cartridge manual if you haven t used
149. a Return to the Test Mode menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 149 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F7 CLEAR CONTINUOUS DTCS Performing the Continuous Memory DTC clear test causes the PCM to clear emission related DTCs those that cause Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL illumination and non emission related DTCs stored in the PCM memory When Continuous DTCs are cleared from the PCMs memory all OBD II Monitor and Freeze Frame information gets erased and DTC P1000 is set in PCM memory To select Clear Continuous DTCs do the following 1 Press to enter Clear Continuous DTCs test from the Select Test menu You are reminded to PERFORM F0 PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST Press GMB 2 You are prompted to initiate the Clear Continuous DTC Test Press to perform or Qs to exit to the Test Selection Menu 3 Perform the instruction TURN IGNITION KEY OFF then press 4 TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN and press If there are DTCs to report NO DTCs is displayed Pressing or waiting 5 seconds returns you to the Select Test menu You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT If the stored DTCs are cleared from the PCM DTCs CLEARED is displayed If the stored DTCs are not cleared DTCs NOT CLEARED is displayed Pressing MI or waiting 5 seconds returns you to the Select Test menu 5 Press CR to quit the test or an automatic exit occurs after 5 seconds Ford Powertrain Appl
150. a DTC number pressing ENTER displays the DTC order as received from the PCM DTC number text description and applicable Pinpoint Test If there are multiple DTCs read from the PCM the and keys change the DTC information display saves time from exiting out selecting another DTC then entering back in Pressing returns you to the Switch Test key on engine running On Demand OD DTC list screen Pressing again returns you to the Test Selection menu 13 When you are finished decoding the service codes press You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT Turn the ignition key off then press again to return to the Test Selection Menu 14 If no messages are received within approximately 60 seconds an error message is displayed with a Pinpoint Test number to perform refer to error screen definition within this section of the manual 15 If operating properly the PCM runs through a series of switched input tests and then begins DTC transmission ACTIVE KEYS Return to Test Selection Menu ENTER Advance through test screens or change to DTC description display Confirm that requested test sequence has been finished and page down when in DTC number screen Scroll left or right when in DTC list screen Scroll up or down when in DTC list screen or changes to DTC information display Select Switch Test MODE F8 INFORMATION The Information mode displays useful information about
151. a different vehicle for testing press the key several times to take you backward through the selection process until your change can be made Then complete the selection process for the new vehicle under test using the above sequence 9 You have successfully informed the tester to the current application and can begin testing by selecting the test you wish to perform At this point refer to Chapter 5 for instructions Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 78 4 Getting Started ADAPTER AND ADAPTER CABLE CONFIGURATIONS The proper Data Link Connector DLC adapter or adapter cable for the vehicle being tested must be connected to the tester DLC Cable in order to connect the tester to the vehicle The following table identifies which adapters and cables are required to connect each type of tester to the various Ford vehicles All adapters cables and any other hardware required to connect the tester to the vehicle are listed in the table The Figure Number in the table refers to the illustrations on the following pages FORD ADAPTER TESTER ADAPTER SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION All 1981 1993 FORD MTS 3100 7 14 pin P N 02002042 Figure 4 5 MCU EEC IV and select Tech 1A 7 14 pin P N 02002042 Figure 4 6 o 1 Tech 1 14 12 VIM adapter Figure 4 7 P N 02001198 and 7 14 pin P N 02002042 All 1986 1995 IVSC FORD MTS 3100 7 14 pin P N 02002042 Figure 4 5 with 6 pin DLC Tech 1A 7 14
152. agrams shows how to properly connect the Ford adapter to the vehicle self test connector After all connections have been made set the tester to read SLOW codes in the STAR MODE then press to erase any existing codes in the STAR MODE memory Begin the code retrieval process by turning the ignition key on and press to TEST If any 4EAT codes are stored in memory the tester retrieves them and displays codes on the screen You can now perform KOEO and KOER tests Refer to Ford or Mitchell diagnosis manuals for more information To clear 4EAT codes from controller memory disconnect the vehicle negative battery cable and step on the brake pedal for 10 seconds Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 250 E Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics Note that on 1 9L engines equipped with the 4EAT system there is no STI connector That is because STI is grounded inside the 4EAT controller As a result you should have the tester connected per the wiring diagrams on page 253 but do not worry about the STI connection The instant that the key is turned on the tester begins to read 4EAT service codes if any are stored in controller memory E 8 MECS 4EAT TIMING INTERVALS Table E 1 and Table E 2 show the timing intervals on which Ford codes are based Later in this section there is an example of the STO signal for EEC IV KOEO code 21 transmitted followed by a Continuous Code 11 Notice that fast and slow codes are transmitted
153. ailable for different models so the Test Selection menu varies from vehicle to vehicle If there are more than three tests available within the chosen system press the key to view all of the tests available for the selected model configuration To select a different vehicle for testing press the key several times to take you backward through the selection process until your change can be made Then complete the selection process for the new vehicle under test using the above manner 10 You have successfully informed the tester of the current application and can begin testing by selecting the test you wish to perform At this point refer to Chapter 5 for instructions NOTE If you have tested a vehicle and are ready to test a different vehicle not just correct a vehicle selection go back to the Enter Model Year menu EB and enter the model year to select a new vehicle Otherwise your print summary information will contain data from both vehicles tested SELECTING VEHICLE USING F1 CAR OR F2 TRUCK To select a vehicle using F1 or F2 do the following 1 From the power up menu press 1959 to enter the vehicle selection mode 2 If the tester remembers the last vehicle you tested it gives you the option of continuing with the testing of that vehicle The tester remembers the previous vehicle under test if it has been less than 24 hours and you have not removed the 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain application from the tes
154. ance to next display Select previously tested vehicle Used to select a menu item Stop automatic menu scroll Manually scroll menu EXIT Return to previous display NOTE For non OBD II Ford Vehicles make sure the Ford 7 14 pin adapter you are using is P N 02002042 When testing 1994 and newer OBD II compliant vehicles with the MTS 3100 or Tech 1A make sure the adapter cable you are using is P N 02001969 PERFORM VEHICLE AND OR SYSTEM SELECTION SELECTING VEHICLE USING FO VIN Once you ve connected the tester to the vehicle and the Power up menu is on the screen you are ready to select a vehicle for diagnostics Make sure you have the vehicle s model year eighth VIN character or are sure of the engine package that you are testing before you begin testing NOTE In some cases the differences between the same engine packages may be subtle Examples of screen differences might be M T Manual 3j Transmission or FF Flexible Fuel so pay attention to the accuracy of vehicle selection The vehicle selection process is critical to the 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain Application as you do not want to make the mistake of choosing the wrong vehicle To select a vehicle using the VIN do the following 1 From the power up menu press 1959 to enter the vehicle selection mode 2 If the tester remembers the last vehicle you tested it will give you the option of continuing with the testing of that v
155. and Off while the test is being performed NOTE Some 1995 96 7 3L Powerstroke Diesel engines may not support this test Consult Ford Service information for test application To select Output State Test do the following Press to select the Output State test from the Test Selection Menu You are reminded to PERFORM F0 PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST Press 3239 2 You are prompted to initiate the Output State test Press to perform or Qe to exit to the Test Selection Menu 3 Perform the instruction TURN IGNITION KEY OFF then press 4 TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN and press An information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Output State test 5 The message DEPRESS RELEASE ACCELERATOR PEDAL TO CYCLE OUTPUTS is displayed The message TEST IN PROCESS appears The tester is initializing communication with the PCM 6 When the message OUTPUT STATE IS ACTIVE appears cycle the actuators on and off and on by depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal 7 When you are finished with the Output State test press YES You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT Turn the ignition key off then press EXIT again to return to the Test Selection Menu 8 If no messages are received within approximately 60 seconds an error message is displayed with a Pinpoint Test number to perform refer to error screen definition within this section of the manual ACTIVE KEYS Return to
156. and the slow codes are transmitted twice Figure E 2 Example of MECS 4EAT KOEO KOER Service Codes on page 252 shows Codes 8 and 11 Notice the timing interval changes for Ist or 2nd code digits INTERVAL FAST SLOW A 5 ms 0 55 B 20 ms 2 08 40 4 05 60 ms 6 0 s TABLE E 1 Timing Intervals for Ford Diagnostic Codes a ms milliseconds s seconds INTERVAL FAST SLOW A 5 ms 0 5 5 20 2 08 40 4 05 60 6 05 TABLE E 2 Timing Intervals for MECS Diagnostic Codes a ms milliseconds s seconds Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 251 E Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics FAST KOEO amp TYPE CONTINUOUS SLOW KOEO SEPARATOR SLOW CONTINUOUS CODES CODE CODE CODE CODE CODE 21 amp 11 21 21 10 11 11 BATTERY fae eo M s 0M VOLTAGE AAAG OA C lt B D PAK B gt A GROUND uu u u u u u FIGURE E 1 Example of EEC IV Fast and Slow KOEO and Continuous Codes Code 8 j 1 Cycle Cycle Break STO ro r CODE 8 lt AK B ic A gt BIKA HK BOE A gt AE B gt lt AEB OE A gt lt B D EXAMPLE GROUND 0 4s 0 4s 4 0s gt 1st Digit Code 11 1 Cycle Cycle Break STO I r if CODE 11 I ele B EXAMPLE B zu M di gt GROUND i k
157. ange circuit voltage above maximum voltage 675 Transmission Range sensor circuit voltage out of range 998 Hard fault present FMEM MODE DTCs DTCs displayed are not applicable to the vehicle being tested NOT LISTED Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 209 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions TRUCK DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS TRUCK DTCs DTC DEFINITION 11 System PASS 12 Cannot control RPM during Self Test high RPM check 13 Cannot control RPM during Self Test low RPM check 14 PIP circuit failure or Engine RPM RPM sensor circuit fault 15 PCM Read Only Memory ROM test failed or PCM Keep Alive Memory KAM test failed 18 SPOUT circuit open or Loss of IDM input to PCM SPOUT circuit grounded 19 Failure in PCM internal voltage 21 Engine Cooling Temperature ECT sensor out of Self Test range 22 Manifold Absolute Pressure MAP sensor out of Self Test range or BARO sensor out of Self Test range Diesel 23 Throttle Position TP sensor out of Self Test range 24 Intake Air Temperature IAT sensor out of Self Test range 25 Knock not sensed during Dynamic Response Test 26 Transmission Oil Temp TOT out of Self Test range 29 Insufficient input from Programmable Speedometer Odometer Module PSOM 31 EVP circuit below minimum voltage 32 EVP voltage below closed limit 33 EGR valve opening not detected or Throttle P
158. ar the radiator or fan shroud The VECI decal gives timing specifications and directions for how to get a proper timing measurement Press when finished Make sure to reconnect any disconnected components at this time Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 103 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 3 If the engine stalls press in response to the ENGINE STALLS query and you are referred to a Pinpoint Test Press 48 after reading and performing the Pinpoint Test Return to Timing Check after any necessary repairs are made If the engine does not stall and timing is correct press Qe SELECT TEST AY F0 PREP VEHICLE F1 K ON ENG OFF F2 CHECK TIMING ADJUST TIMING TO VECI DECAL SPECS DONE YES ENGINE STALLS DURING TIMING YES NO DO PINPOINT TEST EXIT EXI FORD PPT 51 MITCHELL SYMPTM HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS YES START ENGINE DONE YES AWAITING CODES SLOW CODES ARE o AMOR REPORTED BY TESTER 1 NO YES ALL CODES TRANSMITTED TIMING ADVANCE TIMING SHOULD HAS STOPPED ADVANCE 20 REPEAT RECHECK amp RECORD YES NO 2 MINUTES DONE YES AFTER LAST SERVICE CODE WITH N YES KEYPRESS ENGINE STALLS DO PINPOINT TEST EXIT DURING TIMING EXIT FORD PPT 81 YES NO MITCHELL SYMPTM NO TIMING WITHIN DO PINPOINT TEST BASE EXIT 2a 20 BTDC 3 FORD PPT 1 gt
159. ating temperature use temperature gauge on instrument panel Press when ready 5 On gasoline engines actuate Brake Power Steering 4x4 Low and Transmission Control Switch Overdrive PCM inputs by depressing and releasing the brake pedal turning the steering wheel 1 2 circle toggling the 4x4 low range and transmission control switches Press when done An information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Key On Engine Running test The message TEST IN PROCESS appears then the results of the test are displayed On diesel engines follow the directions contained in the text prompt DPRIREL BRAKE All models with TCS OCS These vehicles may have a Transmission TURN WHEEL 1 2 Control Switch or Overdrive Cancel Switch If the vehicle does not have CIRCLE TOGGLE 4X4L TCS YES Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 146 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes an TCS or OCS you should ignore the prompt If it has one toggle the switch both directions press and wait for the next prompt described in Step 6 All 1995 and newer 7 3L VIN F Diesel powerstroke engines Ensure TURN OFF AIC Moon a ALL ACCESSORIES that air conditioning all accessories and auxiliary RPM control is turned AND AUXILIARY off RPM CONTROL YES tas If there are DTCs to report NO DTCs is displayed Press 4B or wait 5 seconds to advance to the next display You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY
160. ation 1981 2004 Page 208 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions PASSENGER CAR DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 634 Manual Lever Position MLP Transmission range voltage higher or lower than expected or error in Transmission Select Switch TSS circuits 636 Transmission Oil Temp TOT higher or lower than expected 637 Transmission Oil Temp TOT sensor circuit above maximum voltage 638 Transmission Oil Temp TOT sensor circuit below minimum voltage 639 Insufficient input from Transmission Speed Sensor TSS Turbine Shaft Speed Sensor 641 Shift Solenoid 3 SS3 circuit failure 643 Torque Converter Clutch TCC Converter Clutch Control CCC circuit failure 645 Incorrect gear ratio obtained for first gear 646 Incorrect gear ratio obtained for second gear 647 Incorrect gear ratio obtained for third gear 648 Incorrect gear ratio obtained for fourth gear 649 Electronic Pressure Control EPC higher or lower than expected 651 Electronic Pressure Control EPC circuit failure 652 Torque Converter Clutch TCC solenoid circuit failure 654 Manual Lever Position MLP Transmission Range TR sensor not indicating PARK during KOEO 656 Torque Converter Clutch continuous slip error 657 Transmission over temperature condition occurred 659 High vehicle speed in park indicated 667 Transmission Range sensor circuit voltage below minimum voltage 668 Transmission R
161. ation of code 11 As well as reading the KOEO and Continuous codes the KOEO test prompts you for the proper operations to get these codes and allows all service codes from the test to be translated into Pinpoint Test results NOTE EH The ISC E controller does not have a KOEO test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 98 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 1987 95 4 9L 1988 90 2 5L 1994 4 0L IF MANUAL TRANS DEPRESS CLUTCH DURING TEST READY YES SELECT TEST Av F0 PREP VEHICLE F1 K ON ENG OFF F2 CHECK TIMING HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS YES 1989 94 7 3L DIESEL YES FLOOR THROTTLE UNTIL TEST IS COMPLETE FLOORED YES YES Y TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN DONE YES YES AWAITING CODES NO CODES RECEIVED ERROR NO CODES RETRY THEN DO EXIT FORD PPT QA1 MITCHELL 014 1 u 3 TOFO FAST CODES ARE RECORDED FOR EEC IV S ALL CODES TRANSMITTED KOEO vA CONTINUOUS Y 1ST CODE 22 MAP BP SENSOR PINPOINT DF90 1ST CODE 1 FORD PPT PASS MITCHELL PASS TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT FIGURE 5 4 KOEO Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 99 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To select KOEO Test do the following N AR an Start the KOEO tests by pressing Gp from the Test Selection menu You are prompted to
162. be able to diagnose and repair electronic control systems Disclaimer Every attempt has been made to provide complete and accurate technical information based on factory service information available at the time of publication However the right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Using This Application with the MTS 3100 The MTS 3100 diagnoses OBD systems in a similar manner as the Tech 1 Tech 1A but with the addition of data display enhancements All tester adapters required to perform OBD system diagnostics are described in this operator s manual Be sure to read the vehicle coverage tables for proper adapter configuration before connecting to the vehicle s diagnostic data link connector When used alone in the MTS 3100 the operation of the cartridge and t
163. bed in Step 6 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 106 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST AY F3 K ON ENG RUN F4 WIGGLE TESTS F7 CLR CONT DTC MT WARM ENGINE ARE RADIATOR HOSES FIRM YES YES HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS YES START ENGINE DONE YES AWAITING CODES YES IF NO DATA RECEIVED wE IF CYLINDER ID IS RECEIVED WITH OVERRIDE W O OVERRIDE Y v DEPRESS BRAKE DEPRESS RELEASE TURN WHEEL 1 2 CIRCLE amp RELEASE TOGGLE OCS TCS BRAKE PEDAL TURN WHEEL 1 2 CIRCLE amp RELEASE WITHIN 1 MINUTE ERROR NO CODES RETRY THEN DO FORD PPT QA1 MITCHELL D14 1 WHEN FAST CODESARE X RECEIVED FLOOR amp RELEASE THROTTLE ONCE CODES ARE COLLECTED IN A MATTER OF SECONDS FOR EEC IV S AFTER ALL CODES TRANSMITTED KOER 15 CODE 12 SYSTEM CHECK PINPOINT 52 KOER vA 2ND CODE 22 MAP BP SENSOR PINPOINT DF7 TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT FIGURE 5 7 KOER EXIT IF DYNAMIC RESPONSE CODE IS RECEIVED Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 107 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes This is the display if an incorrect cylinder identification code is ENGINE SELECTION received You should recheck the engine selection process very closely Bra a to see that it is correct A second check can be made to verify that ther
164. ccur a fault must be present while performing the KOEO DTCs test KOEO DTCs are not stored in the PCM memory The Key On Engine Off Diagnostic Trouble Code read test should be the second EEC V powertrain Quick Test to be performed after the Continuous test The powertrain control system can output KOEO DTCs when the ignition key is on and the engine is off which makes it valuable when diagnosing hard failures This is possible because the PCM is commanded to perform the Key On Engine Off Self Test To select KOEO Test do the following 1 Press to select the Key On Engine Off Test from the Test Selection Menu You are reminded to PERFORM F0 PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST Press GMa 2 You are prompted to initiate the Key On Engine Off test Press to perform or to exit to the Test Selection Menu 3 Perform the instruction TURN IGNITION KEY OFF then press 4 TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN and press An information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Key On Engine Off test TEST IN PROCESS appears then the results of the test are displayed If there are no DTCs to report NO DTCs is displayed Press dup or wait 5 seconds to advance to the next display You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT If there are DTCs to report the tester displays DTCs in a column list format This screen shows the total number of DTCs and the DTC numbers read from the vehicle PCM Using the
165. cific Pinpoint Tests unique to the vehicle being tested F3 Snapshot Works with the Data List mode to save data list information for later analysis You can select trigger points and trigger types F4 OBD Controls F0 Output State Test Allows you to perform diagnostic routines F1 Cylinder Balance Test that return status information after the function has been performed The results of the test function are displayed Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 89 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SYSTEM EEC V PTEC MODE SUBMODE DESCRIPTION F0 Data List Monitors available diagnostic data parameters from the powertrain controller Use these parameters to quickly analyze the critical inputs and outputs from the powertrain controller The Ford Powertrain Application is capable of either pre selected or user selected data parameters pairs F1 Quick Test F0 Prepare Vehicle Displays Diagnostic Trouble Codes recorded F1 Cont DTC Test by the powertrain controller Freeze Frame F2 KOEO Test information is available for applicable model F3 Check Timing years The ability to clear DTC information is F4 KOER Test also found in this mode F5 Freeze Frame Data F7 Clear Cont Codes F8 Service Codes F3 Snapshot F9 Print Summary Works with the Data List mode to save data list Information for later analyzes You can select trigger points and trigger types F4 OBD Controls F0
166. clan aia ale side wae naan C CUR ERREUR in 191 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 TOC iii id gd d ewes aw qaqapa 193 A VEHICLE NETWORK COMMUNICATION STATUS 194 COMMUNICATION MESSAGE DEFINITION 194 B if TOU RE HAVING A 196 BLANK SCREEN ium Lee a Oa dad eost ib 196 SCREEN DISPLAYS SOLID BARS Loose bated mete sr eder 197 APPLICATION CARTRIDGE NOT RECOGNIZED OR MALFUNCTIONING 197 WRONG DISPLAY AFTER POWER IS APPLIED 198 KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY LOCKED OR PROGRAM INTERMITTENTLY RETURNS TO TITLE SCREEN 1 a Gul sa E n mens 198 ENGINE SELECTION DOES NOT MATCH CYLINDER ID 199 TESTER OR POWER INPUT INTERRUPTIONS 200 PRRORCODES in echt he ilk hav deem bed ahd wb Ale qua Rat be Sade ae 201 GARBAGE DISPLAY AFTER POWER UP 201 C DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTIONS 202 TITEL 202 Passenger Car Diagnostic Trouble Code Definitions qasa ss 202 Truck Diagnostic Trouble Code Definitions 210 DIQS oraren tute erect erede ema e vacet e u e ae 215 D DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS 217 INTRODUCTION 1126 RI RD I WP ER eB
167. creen 4 Press to select the vehicle by the VIN 5 Select the engine to be tested Identify the eighth digit of the vehicle s Vehicle Identification Number and locate the character on the display See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 87 for more about Vehicle Identification Numbers Select the vehicle engine by pressing key until the matching engine VIN character is highlighted by the cursor then press 6 If the vehicle under test is different from the model selection screen that appears on the tester select the vehicle model by pressing Qe until the correct vehicle model is displayed then press to enter your current model and engine configuration Note look at the display carefully as the differences can be subtle In the example if there was more than one Ford model equipped with the 3 0L engine you would have pressed Qe once or more to select the correct model with the 3 0L engine Remember that gets you to the next selection and chooses the current selection 7 Once the year model and engine size have been selected the tester may display a Select System menu In certain year model engine configurations there are additional systems other than the Engine system An example is Cruise Control The 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain software displays the system options for your current vehicle under test Press the appropriate function key to select Engine or Cruise Control tests If Cruise Control is not
168. d S C MODE COAST TAP DOWN EEC V SET ACCEL TAP UP ACTIVE STAND BY OFF Speed Control Mode is a state representation of speed control operation and only reads values other than Off when the speed control is turned on and the vehicle is moving Values for this parameter are dependent on system operation which can be Coast Tap Down Set Accel Tap Up Active Stand By and Off S C SET SPEED UNITS RANGE ECA Speed Control Set Speed is a measurement of the vehicle speed required to maintain the current cruise control conditions This value is dependent on cruise control operation and displays 0 mph when cruise is not engaged S C VACUUM SOL ON OFF Speed Control Vacuum Solenoid is the commanded condition of the vacuum solenoid that is used to control the speed control system operation This is an input to the ECA S C VENT SOL ON OFF Speed Control Vent Solenoid is the commanded condition of the vent solenoid that is used to control the speed control system operation This is an input to the ECA Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 236 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions SECONDARY TPS V UNITS RANGE Secondary Throttle Position Sensor TPS is an indication of the voltage input to the PCM for the Secondary Throttle Position Sensor or TP B This sensor is used specifically for the Traction Control System During a key power up the traction control system Series Throttle Co
169. d E F Series E 4 9L FBC MCU Ford 1983 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1983 FORD PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Tempo 2 3L FBC HSC EEC IV Ford Fairmont A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford R 2 3L FBC HSC EEC IV Ford Thunderbird TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford Escort 2 1 6L EFI EEC IV Ford 2 1 6L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford EXP 2 1 6L EFI EEC IV Ford 2 1 6L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 18 3 Vehicle Coverage 1983 FORD PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Mustang A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford R 2 3L FBC HSC EEC IV Ford TLW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford LTD A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford R 2 3L FBC HSC EEC IV Ford Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford 1983 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Topaz R 2 3L FBC HSC EEC IV Ford Zephyr A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford R 2 3L FBC HSC EEC IV Ford Cougar TLW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford Lynx 2 1 6L EFI EEC IV Ford 2 1 6L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford LN7 2 1 6L EFI EEC IV Ford 2 1 6L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford Capri A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford R 2 3L FBC HSC EEC IV Ford TLW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford Marquis A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford R 2 3L FBC HSC EEC IV Ford Mercury G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Ranger C 2 0L FBC MCU Ford A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford Bronco 4 9L FBC MCU Ford E F Series E 4 9L FBC MCU Ford
170. d or the same vehicle is selected without using YES LAST VEH all Snapshot and parameters selected in Custom List are erased Be sure to press from the select model year screen to select the last vehicle tested when replaying a stored Snapshot or to keep the current Custom List parameter setup Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 156 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE YA F3 SNAPSHOT F4 OBD CONTROLS TRIGGER POINT AT F0 BEGINNING F1 CENTER or F2 END of data e 0 SNAPSHOT Y F0 ANY DTC F1 SINGLE DTC F2 MANUAL TRIG REPLAY DATA TRIGGER POINT Displays stored snapshot data WAITING FOR DATA WAITING FOR DATA WAITING FOR DATA SELECT DATA YA SELECT DATA YA SELECT DATA YA F0 ENGINE FO ENGINE FO ENGINE F1 TRANSMISSION F1 TRANSMISSION F1 TRANSMISSION F2 FUEL F2 FUEL F2 FUEL EMISSION EMISSION F3 EMISSION POWERTRAIN MANUAL TRIGGER ENTER DTC PRESS ENTER Pxxxx EXIT or F9 TYPE TO TRIGGER SELECT LIST F0 ALL DATA F1 CUSTOM LIST CONTINUOUS DTC S HS ELECTED YES SELECT 1 ENTER NO DE SELECT BUILDING DATA LIST Additional parameter selection 2 Seconds MANUAL TRIGGER PRESS ENTER EXIT or F9 TO TRIGGER Engine Speed XXX RPM Spark Advance XX More Data Parameters FIGURE 5 27 Snapshot Ford Powertrain Application
171. d service information as Output Test Mode NOTE EH Use this mode to check output actuator circuit condition To select Outputs Off do the following 1 Press G9 to enter OBD Controls mode from the Select Test Menu 2 Press al to select All Outputs Off 3 Select one of the Data Lists Press Gf for ENGINE for TRANSMISSION for FUEL or GE for EMISSION Each Data List has different data parameters to view 4 Select FO ALL DATA or F1 CUSTOM LIST from the select list menu If F1 CUSTOM LIST is selected choose the parameters for display and press 19 9 for more information on setting up data list see Mode F0 Data List on page 134 5 Once the tester displays data list you are ready to begin the output test The output control can be in one of two controlled states a Test enters with output off Press the key to override EEC V PCM control and turn the test on b Press the key to return the output test to normal EEC V PCMs control and turn the test off 6 If you leave the output test on indefinitely the relay is automatically turned off by the tester after 3 minutes prevent low battery condition Additionally the output test is turned off by the PCM after 10 minutes if the tester becomes disconnected from the DLC after the engine is started or after the ignition key is cycled The data list parameters are displayed while the output control test is selected A three character message is displa
172. data plot of data parameters MTS 3100 only and print a hardcopy of data parameters E 2 SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATION Ford electronics support two types of serial data communication They are Data Communication Link DCL and Standard Corporate Protocol Ford SCP DCL was first used for communication to test devices in 1989 and Ford SCP was first used in 1994 Ford SCP is a two wire multiplexed data bus that communicates electronic signals from one device to another The Ford Electronic Engine Control Version 5 Powertrain Control Module PCM and the Powertrain Electronic Control Module PTEC uses the Ford SCP communication bus to share information with other electronic control modules e g ABS or GEM and diagnostic testers The Ford SCP communication bus supports 41 6K bits second information transfer using a Pulse Width Modulation technique The Ford SCP 41 6K bits second protocol is used to meet the On Board Diagnostics version II requirements The Data Communication Link is an electronic two wire data bus designed to carry digital messages from one electronic controller to another the term bus refers to a electrical wire link that connects to several electronic controllers on which information is carried and shared Currently users of the DCL include the EEC IV control module Electronic Instrument Cluster Variable Relay Control Module and the Service Bay Diagnostic System Each device has an identification code assigned to it that ot
173. descriptions step by step instructions tell you how to quickly perform the test A list of the active keys for each test is included at the end of each test mode TEST MODES SUMMARY The following table gives you a quick summary of the test modes available within this application Detailed descriptions of the test modes are given in the appropriate sections of this chapter The tester only displays the test modes that are applicable to the vehicle being tested Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 88 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SYSTEM EEC IV IVSC and Star MODE SUBMODE DESCRIPTION F0 Data List Monitors available diagnostic data parameters from the powertrain controller Use these parameters to quickly analyze the critical inputs and outputs from the powertrain controller The Ford Powertrain Application is capable of either pre selected or user selected data parameters pairs F1 Quick Test F0 Prepare Vehicle Displays Diagnostic Trouble Codes recorded F1 KOEO Test by the powertrain controller The ability to F1 KOEO Test IVSC clear DTC information is also found in this F2 Check Timing mode F3 KOER Test F3 KOER Test IVSC F4 Wiggle Test F7 Clear Cont Codes F8 Service Codes F9 Print Summary F9 Print Summary IVSC F2 Star Mode Is used to perform diagnostic procedures on IVSC MECS Ford vehicles and to read Ford service codes Service codes can be decoded to spe
174. e EXIT is indeed a mismatch by reading the raw service codes using the STAR MODE A 4 6 or 8 cylinder engine has a code 20 30 or 40 respectively for gasoline engines or a code 50 for diesels Make these checks because the Pinpoint Test directions suggest replacing the ECA with the proper one for the engine On late model vehicles a code 98 instead of a Cylinder Identification CODE 98 FIX KEY ON ENG code indicates that service codes from KOEO test are something other OFF CODES FIRST than a pass condition You must resolve those service code problems EXIT first For 3 digit codes a code 998 is displayed instead of code 98 6 If the vehicle sends a Dynamic Response code you are prompted to FLOOR AND RELEASE THROTTLE ONCE Do so immediately This allows the ECA to check for throttle movement RPM changes and intake airflow changes 7 Wait for all the service codes to be transmitted For EEC IVs and ISC Es fast codes are recorded MCUs only transmit slow codes The first code displayed is the recommended code to service first All other codes are automatically displayed until a key is pressed 8 When you have finished decoding press 9410 You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT Turn the key off then press 4B again ACTIVE KEYS Return to Test Selection menu Acknowledge that requested test sequence is done Show next code received Stop auto display or show previous code
175. e This information may include The number of reported emission related powertrain trouble codes Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL status OBDII Diagnostic Monitors Status Readiness Test The vehicle s diagnostic system Automobile manufacturer support for OBD II information is required by California Air Resource Board Ford supports EEC V systems with OBD II monitors on all OBD II certified vehicles Submode FO MIL Status MIL Status mode displays any emission related powertrain trouble codes that have been set and whether the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL has been commanded ON or OFF Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 185 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To select MIL Status do the following 1 Press G to select INFORMATION from the Select Test menu 2 Press G to select OBD INFO mode from the Select Information menu 3 Press ay to select MIL STATUS mode from Information Select Information menu The tester displays the number of emission related Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs and whether the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL has been commanded ON or OFF 4 Press CAI to return to the OBD Information Select Information menu SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION SELECT INFO F1 DLC LOCATION F2 OBD INFO F4 VEHICLE INFO SELECT INFO F0 MIL STATUS F1 OBD MONITOR F2 DIAG SYSTEM EMISSION DTCs NO OF DTCs 0 MIL REQUEST NO FIGURE 5 35 MIL Statu
176. e DTCs by reading the flashing dashboard MIL see Figure F 1 The 1996 2002 Villager MIL flash indicates DTC timing output This is similar to earlier OBD I Villagers except that decoding the MIL flash for each DTC is different On the 1996 2002 Villager DTC output timing can be best understood by separating each DTC into 2 groups the first group is indicated by long flashes 0 6s of the MIL and the second by short flashes 0 3s of the MIL For example if the MIL flashes 12 long flashes 0 6s each followed by three short flashes 0 3s each that would indicate DTC 1203 Or referring to the example diagram DTC 0103 is indicated by one long flash and three short flashes and DTC 0702 is indicated by seven long flashes and two short flashes On 1993 95 Mercury Villagers DTC 55 indicates no malfunction For 1996 2002 Mercury Villagers DTC 0505 indicates no malfunction 8 When finished turn the key off Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 259 1993 2002 Mercury Villager Nissan 1996 MERCURY VILLAGER Example Engine DTC Output UNITS SECONDS x jos gt 03 06 lt gt o3 kosla 603 amp 21 95 0066 o9 03 DTC 0103 DTC 0702 1993 95 MERCURY VILLAGER Example Engine DTC Output UNTE SECONDS 10 6 je gt 03 10 6 lt gt 03 aloske leta DTC 13 DTC 72 FIGURE F 1 Engine DTC Output MANUALLY CLEARING DTCS ON 1993 2002 M
177. e service manual to assure that codes are being transmitted by one of the following methods 12 volt continuity light or analog volt meter Check engine light Continental Message Center Overdrive cancel indicator 7 3L 89 diesel GARBAGE DISPLAY AFTER POWER UP ez O0BbisfUo Most Likely Cause Master Cartridge is not fully installed Master Cartridge is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Unplug and replug cigarette lighter Remove and reinstall Master Cartridge Try another cartridge Remove the Master Cartridge and perform the Self test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 201 C DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTIONS EEC IV DTCS The 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain application supports displaying Diagnostic Trouble Codes for 1981 2004 Ford vehicles with the EEC IV system DTC lists and general descriptions for Ford passenger cars and light duty trucks are included in the following tables NOTE The tables in this chapter are for general reference only Please refer to the EH appropriate service manual for more accurate DTC descriptions PASSENGER CAR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS PASSENGER CAR DTCs DTC DEFINITION 11 System PASS 12 Cannot control RPM during KOER Self Test high RPM check 13 Cannot control RPM during KOER Self Test low RPM check 14 PIP circuit failure 15 PCM Read Only Memory ROM test failed
178. e that is not hot enough to prevent the vehicle ECA from setting a service code related to the Engine Coolant Temperature ECT sensor Also there are engine modifications for certain models that must be done prior to running engine Quick Tests This is especially true of earlier model vehicles Therefore you find that the checks in Prepare Vehicle are specific to the vehicle under service NOTE The Pinpoint Test for a vehicle that does not start is also displayed in Prepare Vehicle To select Prepare Vehicle do the following 1 Select Quick Tests by pressing ai from the Select Mode Menu 2 Select Prepare Vehicle by pressing S from the Test Selection Menu It is important to perform the Prepare Vehicle test before doing any other EEC V Systems Quick Tests 3 Use and to scroll through the Prepare Vehicle steps Use and to answer diagnostic questions It is suggested that you use the key to scroll in the logical sequence of preparations and use the B key for looking backwards When you reach the last of the preparation displays the next key returns you to the first display 4 Use the key to return to the Test Selection Menu ACTIVE KEYS Scroll through the preparation displays NO Answers questions Selects Quick Test Mode Selects Prep Vehicle Test EXIT Return to Test Selection menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 138 5 Selecting and Operatin
179. e time display gives the time in seconds relative to the trigger sample at which the tester received the currently displayed sample For example a sample time of 3 4 means the sample was received 3 4 seconds after the trigger sample A sample time of 0 6 seconds means the sample was received 0 6 seconds before the trigger 12 The data parameters can be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible printer For instructions on connecting the printer to the tester and printing the data parameters refer to the tester operator s manual if you are using a Tech 1 or MTS 3100 If you are using a Tech 1 refer to the RS232C I F Operator s Manual 13 When you are finished viewing the sampled data press IB to return to the Select List menu If you are finished with the SNAPSHOT mode press 248 twice to return to the test mode menu ACTIVE KEYS SNAPSHOT DATA REPLAY PHASE G Scroll through displayed data parameters Scroll through selected samples G GD Fix top or bottom display parameter respectively Advance to first earliest sample Advance to trigger sample sample 0 F6 Advance to last most recent sample Toggle between sample index and sample time display Return to the Select List menu MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS GASOLINE SUBMODE F0 OUTPUT TESTS Submode F0 All Outputs On This test is available on all 1994 and newer vehicles with gasoline engines and the EEC V powertrain
180. e to be selected by choosing a year forward or a year backward from the actual model year of the vehicle Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 199 Tester or Power Input Interruptions B If You re Having a Problem TESTER OR POWER INPUT INTERRUPTIONS FORD POWERTRAIN 1981 2004 v X X ENTER Screen lt gt Blank Screen Tester power or data input is being intermittently interrupted Most Likely Cause Loose DLC cable or Ford adapter connection Other Possible Causes Test Connector cables loose or bad or connector pins loose or corroded Master Cartridge is loose or has dirty contacts Cigarette lighter power intermittent Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Verify a good Test Connector Ford Adapter Tester Connector cable connection Check DLC power cable and connector and the Ford adapter plug for wear and corrosion Check Tech 1 cartridge socket and cartridge edge connector Cycle power to the tester Run the tester Self test as described in the Operator s Manual Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 200 Error Codes B If You re Having a Problem ERROR CODES ERROR NO CODES RETRY THEN DO FORD PPT XXXX MITCHELL XXXX Recommendations See Chapter 5 Submode F1 Key On Engine Off Test on page 98 See Chapter 5 Submode F3 Key On Engine Running Test on page 106 fno codes are coming from the vehicle to the tester use th
181. ect Information menu 3 Press GP to select CONFIGURATION mode from the Vehicle Information Select Information menu The tester displays Calibration ID of the vehicle s PCM 4 Press to return to the Vehicle Information Select Information menu SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION SELECT INFO F1 DLC LOCATION F2 OBD INFO F4 VEHICLE INFO VEHICLE INFO F0 VIN F1 CONFIGURATION CALIBRATION ID SBAF5SW HEX FIGURE 5 39 Configuration Mode No Calibration Data Received If the vehicle does not contain an electronic Calibration ID the tester displays NO CALIBRATION DATA RECEIVED Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 192 6 FINISHING UP After using the application do the following 1 If the repairs are complete clear the codes from memory before test driving to see if they recur or before releasing the vehicle to the customer Ifyou have cleared the codes for a component but the codes are still set then the conditions which caused the codes to be set may still be present Refer to the OEM service manual to isolate the problem 2 If the repairs are not yet complete or if you want to continue testing at a later time do not clear the codes from memory Print a copy of the codes or write the codes down for comparison to the codes displayed when testing is resumed 3 Disconnect the tester from the cigarette lighter plug or the battery terminal adapter 4 Disconnect the cables and adapt
182. ection screen 2 Press for Last Vehicle Continuation 3 Press if the vehicle selection displayed is correct 4 Select the system you are testing F0 ENGINE or F1 CRUISE CONTROL 5 Press to select F1 QUICK TESTS 6 From the Select Test menu press GE to select PRINT SUMMARY 7 The tester should display NOW PRINTING while a summary of the tests that have been done on the vehicle is printed PRINTER IS NOT READY is displayed if the printer is OFF LINE if the power is turned off or if the RS232 Cable is not connected Just turn the printer on or put it ON LINE 8 When the Print Summary is complete the tester returns to the Select Test menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 154 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST v F7 CLR CONT DTC F8 REVIEW DTCs F9 PRINT RS232 CARTRIDGE NOT INSTALLED PRINTER NOT READY AN RS 232 AUX CARTRIDGE IS REQUIRED FOR PRINTING PRINTER IS NOT READY PRINTER READY NOW PRINTING RETURNS AFTER COMPLETION FIGURE 5 26 Print Summary ACTIVE KEYS PRINT SUMMARY MODE Select Print Summary from the Select Test menu EXIT Returns to the Select Test menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 155 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The Snapshot test mode can be used to capture and store in the tester diagnostic data parameters that are read from the Power
183. ed El 232 PCM detected coil 1 2 3 or 4 primary circuit failure El 311 Secondary Air Injection AIR system inoperative during KOER Bank 1 w dual HO2S 312 Secondary Air Injection AIR misdirected during KOER 313 Secondary Air Injection AIR not bypassed during KOER 327 EGR EVP PFE DPFE circuit below minimum voltage 328 EGR EVP closed valve voltage lower than expected 332 Insufficient EGR flow detected 334 EGR EVP closed valve voltage higher than expected 335 EGR PFE sensor voltage higher or lower than expected during KOEO 336 Exhaust pressure high EGR PFE circuit voltage higher than expected 337 EGR EVP PFE circuit above maximum voltage Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 213 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions TRUCK DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 341 Octane adjust service pin circuit open 411 Cannot control RPM during KOER low RPM check 412 Cannot control RPM during KOER high RPM check 452 Insufficient input from Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS 511 PCM Read Only Memory ROM test failure 512 PCM Keep Alive Memory KAM test failure 513 PCM internal voltage failure 519 Power Steering Pressure PSP switch circuit open 521 Power Steering Pressure PSP switch circuit did not change states 522 Vehicle not in PARK or NEUTRAL during KOEO 528 Clutch Pedal Position CPP switch circuit
184. ed and page down when in DTC number screen Scroll left or right when in DTC list screen ID Scroll up or down when in DTC list screen or changes DTC information display 3 p Selects Key On Engine Running test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 147 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F5 FREEZE FRAME DATA FORD SCP The Freeze Frame Data mode displays diagnostic data information about the state of the vehicle EEC V systems when a Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC occurs Display of Diagnostic Data Information includes the DTC that caused the Freeze Frame and diagnostic data parameters per SAE J1979 Freeze Frame data is read from the EEC V Powertrain Control Modules PCM using Ford s Standard Corporate Protocol Ford SCP communication link This mode does not affect vehicle operation and diagnostic data information can be read from the PCM to allow for quick analysis of critical input and output parameter values Freeze Frame Data mode is not supported on 1995 96 7 3L VIN F powerstroke diesel powertrains Also 1997 and newer 7 3L VIN F powerstroke diesel powertrains support a limited freeze frame data list NOTE The diagnostic data parameters that are displayed in Freeze Frame Data mode are defined by SAE J1979 The parameter labels may appear 3j different that those displayed in Data List mode For definition of the parameters please refer to Appendix D of this Operator s Manual
185. een completed o Confirm that a test query is false Select Timing Check test SUBMODE F4 KEY ON ENGINE RUNNING TEST Performing the Key On Engine Running Test KOER Diagnostic Trouble Code read test causes the PCM to output key on engine running on demand DTCs For a KOER DTC to occur a fault must be present while performing the KOER DTCs test KOER DTCs are not stored in the PCM memory The Key On Engine Running Test Diagnostic Trouble Code read test should be the fourth EEC V powertrain Quick Test to be performed after the Check Timing Test The powertrain control system can output KOER DTCs when the ignition key is on and the engine is running which makes it valuable when diagnosing hard failures This is possible because the PCM is commanded to perform the Key On Engine Running Self Test NOTE Transmission Control Switch may be on the end of the gear shift lever which may not appear obvious at first glance To select KOER Test do the following 1 Press to select the Key On Engine Running test from the Select Test menu You are reminded to PERFORM F0 PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST Press 19 9 2 You are prompted to initiate the Key On Engine Running test Press to perform or Qs to exit to the Test Selection Menu 3 START ENGINE and press An information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Key On Engine Running test 4 Warm the engine to normal oper
186. ehicle Generally the tester remembers the previous vehicle under test if it has been less than 24 hours and you have not removed the 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain Application from the tester NOTE If you select a new vehicle or the same vehicle as before but not using any data saved from previous testing is erased This includes EH Snapshot Review Codes and EEC V SCP Custom List parameter information Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 74 4 Getting Started 3 The model year selection screen defaults to the current year The or arrow keys scrolls through the available model years NOTE EH Holding down or arrow key results in fast scrolling SELECT MODEL YEAR 2004 4 ENTER Scrolling Arrows The brackets to the right of the model year represent the 10 VIN digit year identifier for easier model year identification SELECT Vehicle 10th VIN Digit Model Year identifier 1 ENTER When the correct model year appears on the screen press the key to advance the software to the next vehicle selection screen Quick keys are also available for entering the model year From the SELECT MODEL YEAR screen select the last two digits of the model year from the key pad to advance to the next vehicle selection screen For example pressing and selects 1992 Pressing the Xl key returns the software to the SELECT MODEL YEAR s
187. election tables for those vehicles indicated as EEC V When using the Ford Powertrain application on vehicles with EEC V controllers you will notice a new test mode order and new KOEO KOER Continuous and Data List operations Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 1 Ford 1981 2004 Powertrain Application Features 1 Ford Powertrain Application Description FORD 1981 2004 POWERTRAIN APPLICATION FEATURES The Ford 1981 2004 Powertrain application and tester team up to become a tool far more powerful and easier to use than any similar tool on the market HIGHLIGHTS Contains datalist parameters for gasoline and diesel vehicles Provides diagnostic coverage for 1981 2004 vehicles that use EEC V enhanced OBD II or PTEC controllers Contains OBD Information for gasoline and diesel vehicles Contains Vehicle Information for gasoline and diesel vehicles Contains an extended set of OBD controls for EECV Gasoline Engine and Transmissions Provides Diagnostic coverage for 1995 2003 Ford 7 3L Powerstroke Diesel Output State Glow Plug Injector Buzz Cylinder Balance and Switch Test Output Control Tests Contains increased Data Communication Link DCL diagnostic data parameters 56 Reads data parameters on the Data Communications Link Uses prompts specific to the vehicle and engine being tested Can perform Snapshot on Data Communication Link Speeds up testing by reading fast codes when possible Decodes
188. ent specific systems on the vehicle The Ford EEC V system uses seven of ten available categories for DTC groups The groups are defined as 1xx Fuel and Air Metering 2xx Fuel and Air Metering 3xx Ignition System or Misfire 4xx Auxiliary Emission Controls 5xx Vehicle Speed and Idle Speed Control 6xx Computer and Output Circuits 7xx Transmission The information described in this section is further described in the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE recommended practice J2012 which outlines recommended uniformity for diagnostic trouble code and descriptions for manufacturer product lines that are equipped with OBD II systems Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 216 DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS INTRODUCTION The tester is capable of displaying a wide variety of diagnostic data parameters when displaying Data List The data list information is communicated to the tester using Ford s Data Communication Link DCL and Standard Corporate Protocol Ford SCP Using one of the two communication methods the EEC IV and EEC V Powertrain Control Modules PCMs send diagnostic data parameter information e g values of the system inputs and outputs to the tester The diagnostic data parameters displayed on the tester are the same data that the PCM is using to determine the system operation The tester then translates and displays this information in the form of diagnostic data parameters This section contains descr
189. ental F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford Mark VII F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford M 5 0L CFI H O EEC IV Ford Lincoln F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Topaz X 2 3L HSC BASE EEC IV Ford S 2 3L HSC PLUS EEC IV Ford Cougar TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 22 3 Vehicle Coverage 1985 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Capri A 2 3L FBC OHC EEC IV Ford TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F M 5 0L CFI H O EEC IV Ford Lynx 5 1 6L EFI EEC IV Ford 6 1 6L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford Marquis A 2 3L FBC OHC EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F M 5 0L CFI H O EEC IV Ford Grand Marquis F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC OHC MCU Ford Merkur TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 1985 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Ranger C 2 0L ISC E ISC E Ford A 2 3L EFI EEC IV Ford S 2 8L FBC EEC IV Ford Bronco Y 4 9L FBC EEC IV Ford F 5 0L FBC EEC IV Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC EEC IV Ford Bronco 11 S 2 8L FBC EEC IV Ford Aerostar A 2 3L EFI EEC IV Ford S 2 8L FBC EEC IV Ford E F Series Y 4 9L FBC EEC IV Ford F 5 0L FBC EEC IV Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC EEC IV Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 23 3 Vehicle Coverage 1986 VEHIC
190. er and the system software Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 69 4 Getting Started SETTING UP THE TESTER MTS 3100 Before operating the MTS 3100 tester perform the following steps 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Connect the DLC cable to the tester and tighten the screws 3 Insert the application cartridge into the slot at the top rear of the tester FIGURE 4 1 Inserting Cartridge into the MTS 3100 Application Cartridge or Mass Storage Cartridge MSC MTS 3100 4a EEC IV MCU ISC E IVSC ES Systems Attach the Ford 7 pin adapter to the vehicle end of the DLC cable Connect the 7 pin end larger end of the adapter to the vehicle quick test connector In addition if you are testing a MECS or 4EAT system you need to connect two jumper wires between the Ford adapter and the vehicle self test connector Refer to the wiring diagram s Using Jumper Cables to Connect MECS Vehicles to the Tester on page 253 of this manual for proper connection DLC Location On most vehicles the engine self test connector is located under the hood near the top of the firewall or around the left or right wheel well Refer to the vehicle service manual if in doubt 4b EEC V Systems Requires OBD II compliant MTS 3100 DLC Location On most vehicles the 16 pin DLC J1962 is located under the dashboard on the drivers side For Thunderbird it can be located under dash on the passenger side 5 If the vehicle ha
191. erm Mass Air Flow Manifold Absolute Pressure Microprocessor Control Unit An engine controller less sophisticated than the EEC IV Mazda Engine Control System Multiport electric Fuel Injection Malfunction Indicator Lamp Miscellaneous Used in the Ford cartridge in refer ence to Mitchell automotive manuals and their corresponding Pinpoint Tests Manual Lever Manual Lever Position Monitor Milliseconds Manual Transmission Not Available such as some Pin point Test information is not pub lished yet Neutral Drive Switch Natural Gas Vehicle Oxygen Sensor OBD II OCS OD OHC OL Output State Test PCED PCM PCV PF PFE PID Pinpoint Test PIP PNP PPT PREP PRES P S PSI On Board Diagnostics Phase II The California Air Resource Board CARB required that by 1996 all vehicles sold in California under 8500 GVWR contain a certain mini mum board diagnostic capabil ity to diagnose emissions related failures of the engine control system These diagnostic requirements have been designated as OBD II with a goal of monitoring all of the emis sions related components on board the vehicle for proper operation Overdrive Cancel Switch On Demand Overdrive Overhead Cam Open Loop A Quick Test available after all KOEO and Continuous Codes have been transmitted where depressing the throttle changes the state of an EEC IV s output control solenoids and relays
192. error 198 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Index 269
193. ers from the vehicle s DLC You may want to inspect the cable connector and cigarette lighter for any damage or corrosion 5 Store all hardware components in the tester storage case If the tester becomes dirty clean it by wiping it with a rag dampened with mild detergent or hand soap Avoid using harsh petroleum based cleaning solvents such as acetone benzene and trichloroethylene as they may damage the tester Although the tester 15 water resistant it is not waterproof so be sure to thoroughly dry off the tester prior to storage Do not submerge the tester in water NOTE Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 193 A VEHICLE NETWORK COMMUNICATION STATUS The Ford communication link supports communication error or status messages that may be displayed on the tester These messages can be caused by operator error the PCM vehicle wiring harness wiring connector or other electronic control modules that are connected to the communication link Status messages are responses to normal PCM responses and Error messages are responses to abnormal PCM responses COMMUNICATION MESSAGE DEFINITION MESSAGE DESCRIPTION NO DATA OR ECU RESPONSE CHECK IGN KEY ON DLC CONN OR PPT QAI Displayed if the tester receives no data from the PCM Most likely causes the ignition key is not ON The data link cable and 16 pin adapter are not firmly connected to the vehicle Data Link Connector DLC or the Standard Protocol
194. es the Check Timing test should be the third EEC V powertrain Quick Test to be performed after the Key On Engine Off test Before performing this test make sure that WARNING e all electrical loads are off engine is at normal operating temperature N drive wheels are blocked gear shift lever is in Park on Automatic Transmission Neutral for Manual Transmission To select Check Timing do the following 1 Press GJ to select the Check Timing Test from the Select Test menu The tester indicates the type of test DI or EI If an engine with DI has been selected you are informed that this test is for engines with DI and OBD If an engine with EI has been selected you are informed that ignition timing is not adjustable Press 2 Press 19 9 to advance through each screen Make sure that you follow the instructions on each display 3 For DI equipped engines the tester asks you if the timing changed from initial check Press Or Qo depending on your result 4 If there is a check timing problem the tester displays which section of the Ford s Powertrain Control and Emission Diagnosis manual to reference Press to return to the Quick Test selection menu s Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 145 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Return to Select Test menu Advance through display screens Confirm that a test query is true or that a prompt for action has b
195. es an indication to the ECA if the steering wheels are causing a load on the power steering pump In this case the ECA increases idle RPM to maintain smooth idle PARK NEUTRAL P N R DL The Park Neutral parameter is an indication of selected transmission gear range When in park or neutral gear range the display reads P N When in reverse drive second or low the display reads R DL PARKING BRK SW STATES ECA Parking Brake Switch is a switch used to determine parking brake lever position Expected values for this parameter are OFF when the parking brake pedal is not depressed and ON when the parking brake pedal is depressed PF EGR Volts 0 5 Pressure Feedback PF Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR is a measure of EGR flow as detected by the pressure feedback EGR sensor PF is an input to the ECA PSP SNSR V Volts 0 5 Power Steering Pressure Sensor PSPS Voltage provides a voltage signal to the PCM The power steering pressure signal is an indication of hydraulic pressure within the power steering system and the sensor is normally closed and opens as the hydraulic pressure increases The PCM uses PSP sensor data to compensate for loads placed on the engine Air Conditioning On at idle etc and electronic pressure control pressure adjustments Note that the V in parenthesis indicates the parameter is voltage related S TO U PARAMETERS S C CMD SW V Gasoline Engine Volts 0 5 Speed Control
196. g Test Modes F0 DATA LIST F1 QUICK TEST F3 SNAPSHOT SELECT TEST Ay y F0 PREP VEHICLE F1 CONTINUOUS F2 KOEO SCROLL UP Y SCROLL DOWN YESINO ANSWER EXIT QUIT DOES ENGINE START AND RUN YES NO YES CHECK VACUUM HOSES ELECTRICAL WIRING AND COOLANT LEVEL DOES ENGINE CRANK YES NO NO START CHECK VERIFY INERTIA FUEL SHUT OFF SWITCH IS SET APPLY PARKING BRAKE BLOCK ALL DRIVE WHEELS NO START CHECK VERIFY FUEL TANK LEVEL TURN ACCESSORIES OFF PLACE AIT IN PARK M T IN NEUTRAL WARM ENGINE RUN AT 2000 RPM FOR 2 MINUTES DONE PROCEED WITH F1 CONTINUOUS SELF TEST EXIT IS SPARK OBSERVED AT SPARK PLUG YES NO CHECK IGNITION PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CKT DO PPT A EXIT CHECK BATTERY OR STARTER CKT REF SERVICE MANUAL SECTION 3 EXIT CHECK FUEL DELIVERY SYST OR ENGINE MECH DO PPT A EXIT FIGURE 5 21 Prep Vehicle Gas Engine Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 139 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F1 CONTINUOUS DTC TEST Performing the Continuous Memory DTC test causes the PCM to output emission related DTCs those that cause Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL illumination or non emission related DTCs stored in the PCM memory The Continuous Diagnostic Trouble Code read test is the first EEC V and powertrain Quick Tes
197. has been captured you can view all of the stored data Data parameters are displayed in a manner identical to that of the Data List mode You can also specify the data sample you wish to display In addition the 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain Application can print the captured data providing a hard copy of any selected data sample Refer to the printer operator s manual and the tester operator s manual for printing instructions Some Ford PCMs indicate support of a diagnostic data parameter or PID in Ford terms to the tester but the data displayed is not correct Examples NOTE of incorrect data are voltages reading 0 00v Transmission Range Sensor Commanded Gear Park Neutral and other A T parameters displayed EH when the tester is connected to a vehicle equipped with a manual transmission Remember to check the vehicle s engine and transmission configuration for components that are in the data list but not actually on the vehicle under test On the 1995 and newer 7 3L VIN F diesel engines the PCM may not respond to data parameter requests When this happens the No data or PCM response is displayed Exit the mode that is currently selected and again select the mode This method then allows communications to the PCM for data display SELECTING SNAPSHOT MODE The operation of the SNAPSHOT mode is divided into two phases Setup and Data Replay The Setup Phase is illustrated in Figure 5 27 If a different vehicle is selecte
198. hat surround the sensor tip HIGH SPD FAN ON OFF For vehicles that have the high speed cooling fan High Speed Fan displays the state of the high speed fan control signal sent out by the ECA IAT V Volts 0 5 Intake Air Temperature sensor is a measure of the intake air temperature in voltage and 15 an input to the ECA The ECA uses this input to determine the fuel timing and idle strategies Normal operating voltage is 1 to 2 volts IAT UNITS RANGE 0 225 Intake Air Temperature sensor is a measure of the intake air temperature in degrees and is an input to the ECA The ECA uses this input to determine the fuel timing and idle strategies Normal operating temperature is 185 to 212 degrees F Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 228 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions IDLE AIR CONT UNITS RANGE Idle Air Control is a commanded output by the ECA Depending on the idling conditions of the engine ISC controls idle speeds for a smooth and adequate idle IDLE VALID SW IDLE OFF IDLE EEC V Idle Validation Switch is a switch used to determine the position of the idle validation switch which is connected to the throttle mechanism The Idle Validation Switch is an input to the PCM Expected values for this parameter are Idle when the throttle is at idle and Off Idle when the throttle is Off Idle IMRC MONITOR B1 IMRC MONITOR B2 Volts 0 5 Intake Manifold Runner Contr
199. have been run the display cycles between KOER CONTINUOUS and KOEO in ENGINE and IVSC KOEO and IVSC KOER in IVSC a In Star Mode if you want to decode another service code on the same line use and Qe to move the cursor left and right 7 In Star Mode if there is more than one line of service codes use the amp B and keys to move the cursor between lines Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 116 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 8 When you are finished reviewing and decoding press 48B to return to the Test Selection menu Pinpoint Test Exceptions Most Pinpoint Test decoding refers you to the actual Pinpoint Test recommended by Ford and Mitchell The following table lists Pinpoint Test results that do not point to an actual Pinpoint Test but try to direct you to the proper non pinpoint action or reference TEST ACTION OR REFERENCE RESULT Pinpoint Test not available DO KOEO Do KOEO test for this vehicle before performing IVSC tests A KOEO service code needs to be resolved BAD Be very careful that all other parts of the system have been examined Rarely do the ECAs EEC IV need replacement Also if battery voltage has been removed from the ECA and a Quick Test is attempted before running the engine a BAD EEC IV display may result PASS This means the tester has checked all overriding codes and conditions that would change the interpretation of a code 11 111 or code 62 in
200. he Test Selection Menu 8 If no messages are received within approximately 60 seconds an error message is displayed with a Pinpoint Test number to perform refer to error screen definition within this section of the manual Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 180 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 9 If operating properly the PCM runs through a series of glow plug circuit tests and then begins DTC transmission Return to Test Selection Menu Advance through test screens or change to DTC description display YES Confirm that requested test sequence has been finished and page down when in DTC number screen s Scroll left or right when in DTC list screen Scroll up or down when in DTC list screen or changes to DTC information display Select Injector Buzz Test SUBMODE F3 CYLINDER BALANCE TEST Performing the Cylinder Balance key on engine running On Demand test causes the PCM to perform a cylinder balance test to determine cylinder contribution If the PCM detects a problem with any cylinder then the PCM outputs key on engine running DTCs For a Cylinder Balance DTC to occur a fault must be present while performing the Cylinder Balance On Demand test Cylinder Balance related KOER DTCs are not stored in the PCM memory The Cylinder Balance test should be performed if a problem with any cylinder s fuel or mechanical systems is suspected The powertrain control system can output Cylinder
201. he applied force from the driver s foot This is a backup to the BOO switch for speed control deactivation Expected values for this parameter are OFF when brake pedal is not depressed and ON when the brake pedal is depressed BRAKE SWITCH Diesel Engine ON OFF The brake switch signals the ECA the position of the brake pedal ON depressed or OFF released This is used for idle and transmission drive strategies BRAKE SWITCH Gasoline Engine RELEASED DEPRESSED The brake switch signals the ECA of the position of the brake pedal depressed or released This is used for idle and transmission drive strategies CAM POS ADV 1 Degrees The camshaft position advance bank 1 displays the Variable Cam Timing position of the bank 1 camshaft CAM POS ADV 2 Degrees The camshaft position advance bank 2 displays the Variable Cam Timing VCT position of the bank 2 camshaft CAM POS CMD1 DC 0 100 The camshaft position command bank 1 duty cycle displays the duty cycle of the bank 1 VCT solenoid valve Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 220 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions CAM POS CMD2 DC 0 100 The camshaft position command bank 2 duty cycle displays the duty cycle of the bank 2 VCT solenoid valve CAM POS ERROR 1 Degrees The camshaft position error bank 1 displays the Variable Cam Timing VCT advance or retard error of the bank
202. he average fuel injector pulse width of group 2 fuel injectors The pulse width is the on time of the fuel injector and changes with engine operating conditions This parameter is typically found on V8 and V6 engines only J TO L PARAMETERS L T FUEL TRIM 1 0 100 Long Term Fuel Trim 1 is the measure of adaptive fuel correction strategy for group 1 fuel injectors Long Term Fuel Trim 1 represents the ECAs long term adjustment to fuel strategy determined from a lookup table in its memory This parameter is continually changing but slower that short term fuel trim and changes with engine operating conditions L T FUEL TRIM 2 0 100 Long Term Fuel Trim 2 is the measure of adaptive fuel correction strategy for group 2 fuel injectors Long Term Fuel Trim 1 represents the ECAs long term adjustment to fuel strategy determined from a lookup table in its memory This parameter is continually changing but slower that short term fuel trim and changes with engine operating conditions LONG TERM FT B1 LONG TERM FT B2 50 to 50 Long Term Fuel Trim Bank 1 or 2 is the measure of adaptive or feedback fuel correction strategy for the injection of fuel into the engine Long Term Fuel Trim represents the PCMs steady long term adjustment to fuel strategy determined from a lookup table in its memory This parameter changes slowly over time at a rate slower than short term fuel trim and varies with engine design and engine operating condi
203. he vehicle identification screens test menus and data screens are as described in this manual When this application is used with the MTS 3100 in conjunction with a program card vehicle identification screens test menus diagnostic trouble codes and diagnostic data parameters can be viewed in full screen Enhanced Mode displays Refer to the Enhanced Mode operating instructions in the program card operator s manual for further detail A Note about Tech 1 and Tech 1A Testers The Tech 1 was originally introduced as an OEM scan tool in 1984 The Tech 1 Series A Tech 1A was released in 1989 and is an updated version of the Tech 1 After 19 years of successful distribution Vetronix decided to retire the Tech 1 and Tech 1 A in 2003 This further established the MTS 3100 s foothold in the automotive service industry Please note that while every attempt has been made to ensure the cartridge based software applications work on the Tech 1 and Tech 1A testers Vetronix strongly recommends that Tech 1 and Tech 1A owners update to the MTS 3100 tester Tech 1 and Tech 1A owners now qualify for special discounts on any MTS 3100 tester purchase Please contact our customer support department for program details 800 321 4889 Ext 4 Important Please Read When you are using this manual to diagnose a vehicle take the time to determine the type of tester that you are working with and be sure you are using the correct cables and adapters Doing so may p
204. her controllers use to know who is sending data information How does this play a role in vehicle system diagnostics Previously not having data list information on Ford cars and trucks gave you less data to make an accurate diagnosis That has changed because now you have a diagnostic tester that has the capability to read and display powertrain diagnostic data parameters of the vehicle under test The tester software displays the necessary action for you to perform with prompts to guide you in reading displaying and taking a Snapshot of diagnostic data An example of data parameters include Engine Speed Throttle Position Sensor Voltage Throttle Position Sensor Angle and Brake Switch Since Ford SCP and DCL provide electronic communication of diagnostic data parameters between controllers it facilitates the diagnostics of vehicle systems via the Data Link connector You need to remember that Ford SCP and DCL are method for the vehicle controllers to share information from which you can use your tester to read this data on the Ford SCP and DCL which can increase your diagnostic capability Spend some time reviewing this and other service manuals that explain more about Ford SCP and DCL Doing so speeds up your diagnostic productivity and increases your knowledge of vehicle electronics E 3 FORD OBD II DRIVE CYCLE An OBD II drive cycle consists of following a specific vehicle driving pattern over time This requires the vehicle to be driven
205. hicle Speed Control IVSC Diagnostic trouble codes two digit are available on all vehicles that use IVSC system FORD MAZDA VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS Ford Mazda vehicles Aspire Probe Escort Tracer Festiva Capri have the MECS and 4EAT systems These systems are diagnosed using the 7 14 pin adapter To read DTCs from these systems the STAR mode must be used and set up see Appendix E When performing diagnostics on these systems please reference the proper service manual information VEHICLE SELECTION Certain model Ford vehicles may support DCL even if the exact vehicle powertrain configuration is not available for selection At first it may appear that the vehicle that you are working on does not support data list If this happens try a similar engine or engine transmission combination An example may be a California emission certified vehicle that supports data list while a Federal vehicle does not and there is no emission certification separation available This may be a result of vehicle production assembly or service part installation after the vehicle has been in use then comes in for repair Sometimes the under hood decal which describes emission certification is different than ECU calibration causing incorrect vehicle selection within the cartridge Remember to check the validity of the data parameters by comparing with other measurement devices e g compare engine RPM with dashboard tachometer VEHICLE COVERAGE 1981 1982 VE
206. hicles Configuration This gives the Calibration Identification number from the PCM It may not be supported on all vehicles Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 8 General Key Functions 1 Ford Powertrain Application Description GENERAL KEY FUNCTIONS The operation of this application is simple so once you ve read through the manual to get a general idea of how it operates you won t have to refer to it very often You simply sequence through the operation of the cartridge by pressing keys on the tester in response to messages displayed on the screen In general the and keys perform this sequencing function Refer to the following table for a summary of the basic key functions Each section in this manual contains a table indicating which keys are active for that mode of operation BASIC KEY FUNCTIONS NO Answer questions asked on the display EXIT Return to the previous step in the program Can go all the way back to the start Scroll through the test mode selection menus Also used to move the cursor during service code displays in STAR MODE and to cycle through Pinpoint Test displays in QUICK TEST MODE Function keys GT Select test mode 0 80 Numeric keys Enter the year of the vehicle ENTER Only used when a cursor is pointing to a service code in STAR MODE review and decode Pressing ggg causes Pinpoint Test of that code to be displayed Press
207. hrottle system rich Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 212 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions TRUCK DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 181 Fuel system at rich adaptive limit at part throttle system lean 184 Mass Air Flow MAF higher than expected 185 Mass Air Flow MAF lower than expected 186 Injector pulsewidth higher than expected or MAF lower than expected 187 Injector pulsewidth lower than expected or MAF higher than expected 188 Fuel system at lean adaptive limit at part throttle system rich Bank 2 189 Fuel system at rich adaptive limit at part throttle system lean Bank 2 211 Profile Ignition Pickup PIP circuit failure 212 Loss of Ignition Diagnostic Monitor IDM input to PCM SPOUT circuit grounded 213 SPOUT circuit open 214 Cylinder Identification CID circuit failure 215 PCM detected coil 1 primary circuit failure El 216 PCM detected coil 2 primary circuit failure El 217 PCM detected coil 3 primary circuit failure El 218 Loss of Ignition Diagnostic Monitor IDM signal left side 222 Loss of Ignition Diagnostic Monitor IDM signal right side 223 Loss of Dual Plug Inhibit DPI Dual Plug Input control 224 PCM detected coil 1 2 3 or 4 primary circuit failure or erratic IDM input to processor 225 Knock not sensed during dynamic response test 226 Ignition Diagnostic Monitor IDM signal not receiv
208. hrottle pedal 5 The tester reads and displays IVSC fast codes 6 Usually the next display is the service codes display The codes and associated Pinpoint Tests are automatically displayed one every 3 seconds until a key is pressed Refer to Submode F9 Review Service Codes Decode to Pinpoint Tests IVSC on page 115 NOTE A bad connection or not receiving codes condition results in an error display containing a Pinpoint Test designation Always recheck connections and repeat the test before performing the Pinpoint Test 7 When you finish reviewing and decoding service codes press 41 8 TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT is displayed Turn the key off then press again This takes you back to the Test Selection menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 109 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST yA F0 PREP VEHICLE F1 K ON ENG OFF F3 K ON ENG RUN WARM ENGINE ARE RADIATOR HOSES FIRM YES YES HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS YES YES START ENGINE PRESS SPEED CONTROL ON DONE YES YES ERROR NO CODES RETRY THEN DO EXIT AWAITING CODES FORD PPT QA1 MITCHELL N A AFTER ALL FAST CODES ARE TRANSMITTED IVSC koer 11 IVSC koer vA 1ST CODE 1 FORD PPT PASS MITCHELL PASS EXIT TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT FIGURE 5 8 IVSC KOER Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 110
209. ication 1981 2004 Page 150 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F7 CLR CONT DTC F8 REVIEW DTCs F9 PRINT CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC CLEAR TEST YES NO DTC FREEZE FRAME AND MONITOR INFO WILL BE CLEARED OK YES NO TURN IGNITION KEY OFF DONE YES TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN DONE YES No DTCs in PCM Affirmative Response M Memory from Negative Response from PCM DTCs CLEARED DTCs NOT CLEARED NO DTCs FIGURE 5 25 Clear Continuous DTCs ACTIVE KEYS Selects Clear Continuous Codes from the Select Test menu EXIT Return to Select Test menu YES Acknowledges that requested test sequence is done Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 151 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F8 REVIEW SERVICE CODES DECODE TO PINPOINT TESTS The Review DTCs mode provides a method to easily review diagnostic trouble code number description and applicable Pinpoint Test decoding after performing the Continuous KOEO or KOER diagnostic trouble code read tests All tests are year and vehicle dependent that is Pinpoint Test designations vary from year to year Therefore you must accurately NOTES complete the vehicle and engine selection process to be referred to the correct Pinpoint Test Please reference the appropriate year Ford or Mitchell Shop Manual for Pinpoint Test description and operating procedure Co
210. if a problem with any cylinder s fuel or mechanical systems is suspected The powertrain control system can output Switch Test DTCs when the ignition key is on and the engine is running which makes it valuable when diagnosing hard failures This is possible because the PCM is commanded to perform the Switch Test On Demand test NOTE Some 1995 96 7 3L Powerstroke Diesel engines may not support this test EH Consult Ford Service information for test application To select Switch Test do the following 1 Press to select the Switch Test from the Test Selection Menu You are reminded to PERFORM F0 PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST Press 1959 2 You are prompted to initiate the Switch Test Press to perform or Qe to exit to the Test Selection Menu 3 START ENGINE and press 3 An information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Switch Test 4 Warm the engine to normal operating temperature use temperature gauge on instrument panel Press when the engine is at normal operating temperature NOTE On a diesel engine it takes a while to get the engine up to normal operating EH temperature Ensuring that the engine is at normal operating temperature is vital for this test to operate properly 5 Turn off all accessories including A C and auxiliary RPM control Press when all accessories have been turned off 6 Block the vehicle s drive wheels to ensure that the vehicle does
211. ift error 72 Insufficient MAP change during Dynamic Response Test 73 Insufficient TP change during Dynamic Response Test 74 Brake On Off BOO circuit open not actuated during Self Test 77 Operator error Dynamic Response Test 81 Secondary Air Injection Diverter AIRD circuit failure 82 Secondary Air Injection Bypass AIRB circuit failure 84 EGR Vacuum Regulator EVR circuit failure 85 Canister Purge CANP circuit failure 87 Primary fuel pump circuit failure 91 Shift Solenoid 1 SS 1 circuit failure 92 Shift Solenoid 2 SS2 circuit failure 93 Coast Clutch Solenoid CCS circuit failure 94 Torque Converter Clutch TCC solenoid circuit failure 95 Fuel Pump circuit open PCM to motor ground 96 Fuel Pump circuit open battery to PCM 97 Transmission Control Indicator Lamp TCIL circuit failure Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 211 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions TRUCK DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 98 Hard fault present or Electronic Pressure Control EPC driver open in PCM 99 Electronic Pressure Control EPC circuit failure 111 System pass 112 Intake Air Temp IAT Air Charge Temperature ACT sensor circuit below minimum voltage 113 Intake Air Temp IAT Air Charge Temperature ACT sensor circuit above maximum voltage 114 Intake Air Temp IAT Air Charge Temperature ACT higher or lower than expected 116 Engine Coolant Temp ECT higher or lower than expected
212. igator U2 W 4 6L SOHC V8 PTEC SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF L E 5 4L SOHC 2V PTEC SCP OBD II C2 V8 SFI MAF R 5 4L DOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E Series C3 CA C5 2 4 2L V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 E1 E2 E3 MAF E4 52 W 4 6LSOHCV8 EECV SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF 6 4 6L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 5 4L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 SFI MAF M 5 4L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 NGV SFI MAF F 7 3L V8 TC EEC V SCP OBD II C2 DIESEL S 6 8L V10 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF F 150 FO F1 WO 2 4 2L OHV V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 XO X1 SFI L 5 4L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 EFI W 4 6L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 EFI 6 4 6L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 5 4L V8 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF Bi Fuel M 5 4L SOHC V8 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 EFI CNG Windstar A5 4 3 8L V6 SFI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 MAF F Series 150 FO 3 5 4L Super EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Lightning Charged V8 Harley Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 64 3 Vehicle Coverage 2003 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED BODY VIN ENGINE ECU DATA ADAPTER ENGINE MODEL 5th amp 6th VIN 8th NGEN TYPE LINK CONFIG F Super Duty F2 F3 F4 F 7 3L OHV DI EEC V SCP OBD II C2 250 550 F5 X2 X3 Turbo Diesel V8 X4 X5 W2 3 W3 W4 W5 L 5 4L SOHC EEC V SCP OBD II C2 V8 S 6 8L SOHC EFI EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 V10 Z 6 8L SOHC EFI EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 NGV F650 F750 F6 F7 X6 5 7 3L Navistar EEC V SCP OBD 11 2
213. ignition on depending on the ECA Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 248 E Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics The use of STI has evolved to other uses During the air suspension system s Service Bay Test STI also is used to select a shock absorber to vent or fill by floating STI when the desired identifier code is received during the Service Bay Test In the STAR MODE you control STI by pressing Gp to toggle between HOLD and TEST STI is floating when in HOLD STI is grounded when in TEST When using the QUICK TEST MODE of operation the control of STI is taken care of for you Self Test Output STO is the ECA code output line During testing STO is normally at battery voltage During a code pulse the ECA temporarily brings the STO line to ground Codes are never transmitted to the ECA Some vehicles use STO for other signals e g crank revolution pulses during testing and normal operation The tester distinguishes these signals from codes The tester looks for codes being transmitted by the ECA any time you are operating in one of the Quick Test modes When you are operating the tester in vehicle selection test selection code review or print summary mode Quick Test requests are disabled E 5 CODE DESCRIPTION Codes are transmitted from Ford s ECAs as sequences of pulses Each code is two or three digits long The length of time between pulses determines if it is a new digit a new code or a separat
214. in Application 1981 2004 Page 14 3 VEHICLE COVERAGE Use this section to assist you in operating your Vetronix tester and application software It covers everything needed to get your tester connected to the vehicle and begin performing the diagnostic functions It is suggested that you read this manual completely before operating the tester and the application software PTEC EQUIPPED VEHICLES Beginning in 2000 Ford equipped the Lincoln LS and Focus with the new PTEC Electronic Control Unit or Powertrain Electronic Control Module The PTEC system is Ford s new advanced powertrain management system The PTEC Electronic Control Unit is an updated design of the EEC V ECU and provides increased performance for the OBD II system The PTEC system supports diagnostic data parameters and five character diagnostic trouble codes for engine and transmission parameters EEC V EQUIPPED VEHICLES Beginning in 1994 Ford equipped passenger cars with the EEC V electronic control assembly or powertrain control module Starting in 1995 the EEC V system was used on light duty trucks The EEC V system is an advanced engine management system that outperforms earlier EEC IV systems and is used where compliance for OBD is required Diagnostic data parameters and 5 character diagnostic trouble codes are available on all vehicles that use the EEC V powertrain control system The 1995 and newer VIN F 7 3L powerstroke diesel engine is also controlled by EEC V H
215. ine engines and a high speed cooling fan and the EEC V powertrain systems Once the output test begins test commands the cooling fan relay to run in the key on engine off state This mode is described in Ford service information as Output Test Mode NOTE EH Use this mode to check high speed fan circuit condition CAUTION Cooling Fan Rotation Remember to check for and keep all body parts wire harness test leads and shop lamps out of the fan blades before the test is performed To select High Speed Fan do the following 1 Press G to enter the Controls mode from the Select Test menu 2 Press G to select High Speed Fan 3 Select one of the Data Lists Press G for ENGINE for TRANSMISSION for FUEL or for EMISSION Each Data List has different data parameters to view Select FO ALL DATA or F1 CUSTOM LIST from the select list menu If Fl CUSTOM LIST is selected choose the parameters for display and press 19 9 for more information on setting up data list see Mode F0 Data List on page 134 Once the tester displays the Data List you are ready to begin the output test The output control can be in one of two controlled states a Test enters with output off Press the key to override EEC V PCM control and turn the test on b Press the key to return the output test to normal EEC V PCMs control and turns the test off an If you leave the output test on indefinite
216. ing that some ECAs send a Dynamic Response code These pre service codes usually are markers for you to perform some action to the vehicle that help the ECA check out systems it cannot do by itself If you use the Quick Test Mode these codes are interpreted and a display requests the proper action In the STAR MODE you see the two digit code and you must interpret the action to take Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 249 Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics E 6 FORD MAZDA ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MECS CODES MECS codes are very similar to the Ford EEC IV system codes and the MECS tests are much like the Ford ECA tests The difference in MECS codes are The MECS controller only outputs SLOW codes Time durations for MECS code digits are 1 6 seconds for the first and 0 8 seconds for the second digit In addition the MECS codes are accessed through the MECS self test connector which is physically different from the EEC IV quick test connector To connect your tester to the MECS self test connector please refer to the wiring diagrams on page 253 of this manual The wiring diagrams show how to properly connect the Ford adapter to the vehicle self test connector After all connections have been made set the tester to read SLOW codes in the STAR MODE then press to erase any existing codes in the STAR MODE memory Begin the code retrieval process by turning the ignition key on and press Gp to TEST If a
217. ion code 11 or 111 is received you know that your repair has eliminated the cause of the service code Then advance to the next test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 255 Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics E 13 USING PINPOINT TESTS Service Codes are pointers to Pinpoint Tests When a service code is received it means a system within the ECA s control has been detected to be malfunctioning A Pinpoint Test is a sequence of directions that help you narrow a malfunctioning system down to the faulty unit that must be repaired or replaced There is a unique set of tables for decoding service codes to Pinpoint Test for every engine and model year There is also a different table for every test If two different engine controllers output the same service code they may have different Pinpoint Tests The tables determine the Pinpoint Test to be done from the year engine fuel delivery system test and service code The cartridge contains all of these tables for all vehicles from 1981 to 2004 When you press from a code display the indicated service code s Pinpoint Test is found in the appropriate table and displayed Often you are directed to start a Pinpoint Test somewhere other than at the beginning Before continuing you should always refer to the beginning of the Pinpoint Test You will find a list of other systems that can cause the ECA to transmit the service code for this Pinpoint Test These systems a
218. ion with a vehicle cartridge The cartridge gives RS232 capability to the Tech 1 so it can communicate with computers and printers Reserved Rear Wheel Drive Seconds Society of Automotive Engineers Super Charged Super Coupe Speed Control Standard Corporate Protocol Speed Control Vacuum Speed Control Vent Sequential Electronic Fuel Injection One fuel injector for each cylinder in the engine S T Self Test Input Self Test Output Service Codes SFI SHO SNAPSHOT SOHC SOL SPD SPECS SS1 ST STI STO SVO SYMPTM TC TCC TCIL TCM TCS TEST TFT Self Test ECA input line Grounding and float ing this line stimulate the ECA to do various Quick Test related opera tions ECA data transmission line Used for sending service codes to diagnostic test equipment Two or three digit numbers transmit ted after an ECA does a Quick Test that signify the results of doing the test Sequential Fuel Injection Super High Output Application cartridge function that lets you isolate and record an inter mittent problem by storing data parameters Single Overhead Cam Solenoid Speed Specifications Shift Solenoid 1 Short Term Self Test Input Self Test Output Special Vehicle Operations Symptom as in Ford s Diagnostic Section and Diagnostics by Symp tom Tables Turbo Charged Torque Converter Clutch Transmission Control Indicator Lamp Traction Control System Transmission Co
219. iptions of the diagnostic data parameters Every vehicle PCM has a set of supported diagnostic data parameters that are unique to the vehicle under test The tester reads and displays parameters that are supported by each PCM While the tester is capable of displaying any parameter described in this section all diagnostic data parameters may not be available on all vehicles There are two basic types of parameters discrete and analog Discrete parameters are bits of information and can be in only one of two distinct states high low energized de energized Switches and solenoids are examples of discrete parameters Analog parameters are used to represent quantities and are displayed as a value with appropriate units Examples of analog parameters include Engine Speed and Coolant Temperature To access the Data List function go to the Select Mode menu and enter F0 DATA LIST DESCRIPTOR FORMAT Following is a description of Ford diagnostic data parameters that can be displayed with the 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain Application Note that not all parameters are displayed on every vehicle that is equipped with DCL or Ford SCP see Chapter 4 of this manual 1989 2004 vehicle engine selection tables column titled DATA TYPE for a list of Ford vehicles that are equipped with DCL or Ford SCP In the data list and Snapshot modes all diagnostic Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 217 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions
220. ition Once the condition is removed A C operation is resumed to normal During non wide open throttle conditions WOT A C Cutoff displays the opposite on off status as A C Switch Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 242 Freeze Frame Parameter Descriptions D Data List Parameter Descriptions FREEZE FRAME PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS EEC V Powertrain Control Modules can store Freeze Frame data in memory This information can be accessed using Miscellaneous Test Mode F2 FREEZE DATA Each diagnostic data parameter that is displayed in Mode F5 FREEZE DATA is defined in the following information These parameters are defined by Society of Automotive Engineers SAE Recommended Practice J1979 and automobile manufacturer support of these parameters is required by California Air Resources Board OBD II regulation Some of the parameters are different that those that are available in Data List Mode but the definition for Freeze Frame parameters is included for the readers understanding Please note that not all of the Freeze Frame parameters defined below are available on every vehicle Consult Ford service material for additional service information ECT Degrees F 40 to 419 Degrees C 40 to 215 Engine Coolant Temperature ECT is an analog input to the ECU This parameter provides a temperature indication of engine coolant near the ECT sensor ECT sensors can be located in the intake manifold cylinder head
221. itude is typically 100 110Hz at idle warm engine MAP P Diesel Engine PSI 14 30 EEC V Manifold Absolute Pressure is a variable capacitance sensor that measures manifold pressure so that the PCM can determine manifold pressure which enables it to control smoke by limiting injection timing during acceleration until a specified boost pressure is reached Expected values for this parameter are 14psi KOEO and 14psi while driving with low to medium load Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter is pressure related MAF R UNITS RANGE 0 120 Mass Air Flow sensor is an input to the ECA and represents the amount of air entering the engine Typical value of Mass Air Flow rate gm sec is 2 to 7 warm engine at idle MISFIRE EGR DPFE Volts 0 5 Misfire EGR DPFE displays the EGR position at the time of a misfire event MISFIRE ENG LOAD 0 100 Misfire Eng Load displays the engine load percent at the time of a misfire event MISFIRE ENG OFF UNITS Misfire Eng Off displays the engine off soak time at the time of a misfire event MISFIRE ENG RPM RPM 0 6000 Misfire Eng RPM displays the engine RPM at the time of a misfire event MISFIRE ENG RUN Misfire Eng Run displays the engine running time at the time of a misfire event Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 232 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions MISFIRE IAT UNITS RANGE 0 255 Misfire IAT displays the In
222. ive manuals In most cases you will not need to use the manuals until the tester directs you to a specific Pinpoint Test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 4 Operating Modes 1 Ford Powertrain Application Description The most recent codes from each test are saved in the tester so you can review them at any time The codes are automatically converted to Pinpoint Tests and displayed in the order that the Ford manual recommends you perform first A printable summary is kept of the vehicle selection test procedures and results The diagnostic procedures and tests which you can perform in the QUICK TEST MODE are summarized in the table on the following pages Tests that are available in the QUICK TEST MODE are arranged in order of operation that is consistent with Ford Service information For example Ford service information begins with the prepare vehicle sequence For this reason the prepare vehicle test is the first selectable test in the QUICK TEST list followed by the test that should be performed next Note that EEC V systems have a separate mode for reading Continuous DTCs Per Ford Service procedure this test mode should be performed before KOEO and KOER tests With the EEC V systems Continuous DTCs are not read when the KOEO test is performed as was with earlier EEC IV engine control systems STAR MODE In this mode the tester operates like the Ford STAR Tester and is used for basic service code reading It allows yo
223. lack STI Red White Black 1990 92 2 2 EFI Non Tach Yellow Black Black Turbo STI Red White Black TABLE E 4 MECS Jumper Connection for Tracer Festiva Capri and Probe E 12 EXAMINING CODES FROM A TEST Ford systems that utilize Electronic Control Actuators ECAs include Engine ABS Cruise Control and Air Suspension Systems The automated test sequence s associated with each ECA is called Quick Test and the outcome of these test results is displayed in the form of service codes You should follow the Quick Test sequences designed for each ECA type to properly interpret and service the system under test Be prepared to test the vehicle at normal operating temperature drive the vehicle or warm for 3 minutes 3000 RPM and do not be afraid to rerun tests 1f you have doubts as to the resulting codes For example when diagnosing as EEC IV engine system the sequence should be as follows 1 Prepare the vehicle for testing 2 Perform KOEO 3 Run Timing Check 4 Perform KOER and 5 Repair Service codes that have not already been repaired And remember to diagnose the first code of each test if more than one service code is retrieved Using the tester you should diagnose the system under test until KOEO KOER pass code is received Thus the Pinpoint Test trouble tree should be followed and repairs made until a pass condition exists This requires you to rerun the test you used to find the service code When a pass condit
224. lays F1 TEST If you press aij again the STI line is floated and F1 HOLD is displayed You can see codes on the display as they are transmitted In addition you can watch the pulse sequences for all codes transmitted in the upper right corner by watching the asterisk When the asterisk is visible the STO line is low indicating a code pulse When testing EEC IV AS and Probe ABS the ignition key should be turned on before STI is grounded change F1 HOLD to F1 TEST When testing Ford ABS MECS and 4EAT systems the ignition key should be turned on after STI is grounded change F1 HOLD to F1 TEST Consult the appropriate service manual for further instructions on performing Quick Tests on the Ford system that you are working on In addition on vehicles equipped with the 1 8L and 1 9L engines and 4EAT transaxles it is important to note that the STI line is grounded within the 4 controller The tester begins to retrieve codes after all connections are made and the ignition key is turned on refer to Using Jumper Cables to Connect MECS Vehicles to the Tester on page 253 for wiring diagrams 4n Keypress STI LINE HOLD 12V TEST ov t gt FIGURE 5 14 Changing STI LINE State with F1 Keypress Causes DTC Output 5 Press to toggle between fast and slow service codes The type of codes you are currently set up to read can be determined by viewing the Help menu From the code display press to return to the Help menu 6
225. ll KOEO and KOER trouble codes have been corrected When a Code 11 PASS is present for both KOEO and KOER self tests perform repair procedures only on Continuous Codes that have not been corrected in KOEO and KOER modes There are exceptions where the Continuous Codes take precedence The tester looks for these exceptions and decodes them correctly NOTES Consequently it is recommended that you decode service codes in KOEO even though you have a code 11 PASS Continuous Codes generated during Wiggle testing can be read by performing the KOEO test You can erase these codes with the Clear Continuous Codes function of the tester To select Clear Continuous Codes do the following 1 From the Test Selection menu press to enter Clear Continuous Codes mode 2 Turn the ignition key OFF for at least 10 seconds then press the key 3 Turn the ignition key to run don t start the engine then press the key again 4 This display informs you that the tester is clearing codes When finished press 248 to return to the Test Selection menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 114 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST v F3 KOER F4 WIGGLE TESTS F7 CLR CONT DTC HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS YES TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN DONE YES TURN IGNITION Y OFF BEFORE EXIT CLEARING CODES EXIT RETURNS TO TEST MENU WHEN DONE FIGURE 5 10
226. ls mode 5 OBD II 246 OBD II monitor 187 output state test 129 177 outputs off 163 outputs on 160 oxygen sensor location 256 parking brake 13 pinpoint test 256 power input interruption error 200 precautions 12 prepare vehicle 96 prepare vehicle test 138 print summary 119 154 print summary IVSC 119 printing data 95 137 Q quick keys 75 quick test 96 138 check timing 103 145 clear continuous codes 114 clear continuous DTCs 150 continuous DTC 140 freeze frame data 148 key on engine off 98 142 key on engine off IVSC 101 key on engine running 106 146 key on engine running IVSC 109 OBD II monitor 187 prepare vehicle 96 138 print summary 119 154 print summary IVSC 119 review codes 115 review DTCs 152 wiggle test 111 quick test mode 4 R remove cartridge 13 return to first page error 198 reverse polarity 12 review codes 115 review DTCs 152 S screen with solid bars error 197 self test input 248 self test output 249 serial data communication 247 signal lines 248 snapshot 13 snapshot mode 5 125 156 data capture phase 126 data replay phase 127 159 setup phase 125 158 star mode 5 121 switch test 182 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Index 268 T test codes 255 tester induced DTCs 14 tester interruption error 200 timing intervals 251 V vehicle selection procedure F0 74 Fl or F2 77 voltage spikes 13 W wiggle test 111 wrong display
227. ly the relay is automatically turned off by the tester after 3 minutes prevent low battery condition Additionally the output test is turned off by the PCM after 10 minutes if the tester becomes disconnected from the DLC after the engine is started or after the ignition key is cycled Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 168 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 7 The data list parameters are displayed while the output control test is selected A three character message is displayed at the end of line 2 of the display HSF These characters serve as a reminder as to which output control is being performed The last three characters of line 4 of the display read ON if the PCM normal state is being overridden by the tester 8 Press or Qs to scroll through parameters all data list functions are available Refer to Mode F0 DATA LIST for instructions on viewing and printing the data list parameters 9 Press to quit the Output Test and return control of the selected output to the PCM Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 169 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION CONTROL TYPE Y F0 OUTPUT TESTS F1 ENGINE F2 TRANSMISSION SELECT CONTROL Ay F3 HI SPD FAN WAITING FOR DATA X 1074 SELECT LIST Ay F0 ENGINE F1 TRANSMISSION F2 FUEL F3 EMISSION SELECT LIST F0 ALL DATA F1 CUSTOM LIST
228. m the PCM to allow for quick analysis of critical input and output parameter values The diagnostic data parameter current value is displayed along with parameter units Some Ford PCMs indicate support of a diagnostic data parameter or PID in Ford terms to the tester In this case the parameter is listed but its data NOTE is not correct Examples are voltages reading 0 00v or transmission range sensor commanded gear park neutral and other parameters showing up in EH the data list when connected to a vehicle equipped with a manual transmission Remember to check the vehicle s engine and transmission configuration for components that are in the data list but not actually on the vehicle under test On the 1995 and newer 7 3L VIN F diesel engine the PCM may not respond to data parameter requests When this happens the No data or PCM response is displayed Exit the mode that is currently selected and again select the mode This method then allows communications to the PCM for data display FORD SCP DIAGNOSTIC DATA PARAMETER NOTES While viewing Data List parameters on vehicles which use the Cylinder Head Temperature CHT sensor for determining loop status the Engine Coolant Temperature sensor parameter values may appear incorrect ECT displays values of 34 F and 37 C and ECT V is greater than 4 50v This is due to a new EEC V strategy which uses a Cylinder Head Temperature sensor not the Engine Coolant Temperature sensor
229. may not be available on all vehicles with the EEC V system since it is new for 1997 vehicles Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter 1s pressure related FUEL PRESS V Volts 0 5V Fuel Injection pressure sensor Voltage is a voltage output of the fuel injection pressure sensor and input to the PCM The fuel injection pressure sensor voltage diagnostic data parameter is a gage measure of engine fuel rail pressure The fuel injection pressure sensor voltage parameter may or may not be available on all vehicles with the EEC V system since it is new for 1997 vehicles Note that the V in parenthesis indicates the parameter is voltage related FUEL PULSE WIDTH ms 0 5 EEC V Fuel Pulse Width is a measure of the on time for the group of fuel injectors The Fuel Pulse Width is an output controlled by the PCM Expected values for this parameter are 0 00sec KOEO just before engine start and 1 00 3 00sec while driving with low to medium load Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 226 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions FUEL PUMP DC UNITS RANGE ECA Fuel Pump Duty Cycle DC is output by the ECU for control of the Fuel Pump Fuel Pump Duty Cycle is typically 0 at key on engine off and 100 during key on engine running FUEL PUMP RELAY ON OFF Fuel Pump Relay is a state indication of the fuel pump signal commanded by the ECA FUEL TEMP V B1 FUEL TEMP V B2 UNITS RANGE ECA
230. models that must be done prior to running engine Quick Tests This is especially true of earlier model vehicles Therefore you will find that the checks in Prepare Vehicle are specific to the vehicle under service NOTE The Pinpoint Test for a vehicle that does not start is also displayed in Prepare Vehicle To select Prepare Vehicle do the following 1 Select Quick Tests by pressing from the Test Mode menu 2 Select Prepare Vehicle by pressing from the Test Selection menu It is important to do these setup procedures before doing the Quick Tests 3 You may now scroll up or down through the Prepare Vehicle steps The and keys are used for scrolling It is suggested that you use the key to scroll in the logical sequence of preparations and use the B key for looking backwards When you reach the last of the preparation displays the next key jumps back to the first display 4 When you are finished use the key to return to the Test Selection menu ACTIVE KEYS EXIT Return to Test Selection menu Scroll forward through the preparation displays Scroll backwards through the preparation displays NO Answers questions Selects Quick Test Mode Selects Prep Vehicle Test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 96 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Ay F0 DATA LIST F1 QUICK TESTS STAR MODE SELECT TEST Ay F0 PREP VEHICLE F1 KOEO
231. n one of two controlled states a Test enters with output off Press the key to override EEC V PCM controls and turn the test on b Press the B key to return the output test to normal EEC V PCM controls and turn the test off 6 If you leave the output test on indefinitely the relay is automatically turned off by the tester after 3 minutes prevent low battery condition Additionally the output test is turned off by the PCM after 10 minutes if the tester becomes disconnected from the DLC after the engine is started or after the ignition key is cycled 7 The data list parameters are displayed while the output control test is selected A three character message is displayed at the end of line 2 of the display AON These characters serve as a reminder as to which output control is being performed The last two characters of line 4 of the display read ON if the EEC V PCMs normal state is being overridden by the tester 8 Press or Qs to scroll through parameters all data list functions are available Refer to Mode F0 DATA LIST for instructions on viewing and printing the data list parameters 9 Press XI to quit the Output Test and return control of the selected output to the EEC V or PCMs Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 161 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Ay F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION CONTROL TYPE AY F0 OUTPUT TESTS F1 ENGINE F2 TRANSMISSION SELECT CONT
232. n Application 1981 2004 Page 262 Glossary and Abbreviations ES EVP EVR FBC FC FCC FED FEM FF FFV Float FMEM FPRC FT GEM gm sec Ground GVWR HEDF HEGO HFC HO HO2S Electronic Suspension System Used in this manual to refer to various Ford suspension systems including Com puter Controlled Suspension Shock Damping Control Air Suspension Automatic Ride Control and Elec tronic Variable Orifice Steering Evaporative Electronic Vacuum Regulator Feedback Carburetor The carburetor is controlled by a computer that uses engine sensor information to control air fuel mixture Fan Control Federal Communications Commis sion Federal Front End Module Flexible Fuel Flexible Fuel Vehicle Refers to allowing an electrical sig nal such as STI to return to its unin terrupted voltage level instead of grounding it Failure Mode Effect Module Fuel Pressure Regulator Control Fuel Trim Generic Electronic Module Grams per Second An electronic voltage baseline that all electronic systems in the vehicle refer to It is in common with the negative battery terminal Gross Vehicle Weight Ratio High Speed Electro Drive Fan Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor High Fan Control High Output Heated Oxygen Sensor Hold HSC HSF HTR Hz IABM IAC IAT ICM IDM I F IGN IMRC IMTV INJ ISC E IVSC IVSC KOEO IVSC KOER K KAM Key On Engine Off Test Key
233. n California are indicated by Ford as being NOTE equipped with a SFI or SEFI system but are actually equipped with the MFI system Make sure the engine that you are testing is equipped with EH SFIor SEFI before running the cylinder balance test verify injector wiring harness Invalid test results may result if the cylinder balance test 1s performed on a MFI system Once the Cylinder Balance test begins the engine idle speed is fixed When the engine has stabilized the RPM is measured and stored for reference Then one at a time each injector is turned off and the engine is allowed to stabilize The RPM is again measured and stored then the injector is turned back on The test can be run three times each time the EEC IV changes the PASS FAIL criteria Since the criteria has changed over the years you ll have to check the Service Manual for the test specifications for the year of vehicle being tested For any tests performed after the third test use the same criteria used for the third test Here s an example of how the Cylinder Balance Test works on a 1989 model To pass the first test the RPM drop for a cylinder must be at least 6596 of the RPM drop for the cylinder with the greatest RPM drop In the second test each cylinder must drop at least 43 of the cylinder that dropped the most And in the third test each cylinder must drop at least 20 of the cylinder that dropped the most If the RPM drop for one or more cylinders is
234. n and engine operating conditions The numeric character in SHORT TERM FT and SHORT TERM FT B2 define the cylinders that are grouped as a bank for fuel feedback correction Bank 1 is the bank which contains cylinder number 1 Expected values for this parameter can be 10 0 warm engine at idle or driving Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 237 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions SPARK ADVANCE UNITS RANGE o 100 Spark Advance is the amount of ignition spark advance that the ECA is currently using The amount of ignition spark advance is based on several inputs to the ECA engine load throttle angle engine temperature etc and a lookup table in the ECAs memory Typically spark advance increases with engine RPM 551 FAULT Diesel Engine YES NO Shift Solenoid 1 Fault displays if a fault has occurred in the operation of the first shift solenoid SS2 FAULT Diesel Engine YES NO Shift Solenoid 2 Fault displays if a fault has occurred in the operation of the second shift solenoid TCC APPLY STATES Torque Converter Clutch TCC Apply is an indication of the TCC system condition The TCC system can be on TCC engaged or off The conditions for lockup vary but likely TCC lockup happens in 3rd or 4th gear ranges TCC FAULT Diesel Engine NO FAULT FAULT Torque Converter Clutch TCC Fault displays if a fault has occurred in the engaging of the TCC solenoid TCC M
235. n screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Cylinder Balance test The message TEST IN PROCESS appears then the results of the test are displayed NOTE The PCM may take up to minute or more to complete this test The tester displays test results when the PCM is finished with the test If there are no DTCs to report you see NO DTCs and pressing EXIT or waiting 5 seconds returns you to the Test Selection Menu You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT If there are DTCs to report the tester displays DTCs in a column list format This screen shows the total number of DTCs and the DTC numbers read from the vehicle PCM Using the O and keys the cursor can be scrolled through the list of reported DTCs When the cursor is next to a DTC number pressing displays the DTC order as received from the PCM DTC number text description and applicable Pinpoint Test If there are multiple DTCs read from the PCM the and keys change the DTC information display saves time from exiting out selecting another DTC then entering back in Pressing returns you to the Cylinder Balance key on engine running On Demand OD DTC list screen Pressing again returns you to the Test Selection menu When you are finished decoding the service codes press You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT Turn the ignition key off then press 41 again to return to the Test Selection Menu If no
236. n the KOEO test to do the Output State test Similarly for the Timing Check and Cylinder Balance test KOER codes are updated and may be decoded In F0 STAR MODE code review codes read during the STAR MODE may be decoded When you choose to decode STAR codes from Review Codes STAR codes from all performed tests can be displayed on the code list screen Press to change the code type from KOER KOEO and CONTINUOUS Then use the and keys to place the cursor on the service code that you want to decode Then press to display the code title and Pinpoint Test Press to return to the code list screen Note that on ABS the code number title and Pinpoint Test are on one screen See the following procedure for more guidance Since there is no separation of the different codes you must know what test was performed for each code otherwise your Pinpoint Test designations is incorrect Always read the beginning pages of each Pinpoint Test e g read text for even if you are doing a 55 Pinpoint Test The first page always has a warning about which components in the system are diagnosed by the Pinpoint Test and which other components if not operating properly can result in the same service code Be sure these other components are operating properly before beginning the Pinpoint Test tests are year and vehicle dependent Pinpoint Test designations vary NOTE from year to year Therefore you must accurately complete
237. nates Low Fuel Tank Level Automobile manufacturers may disable OBD II monitors which can be affected by running the vehicle out of fuel example a monitor may become disabled when fuel tank volume is below 1596 of maximum fuel tank capacity Altitude Automobile manufacturers may disable OBD II monitors which can be affected by altitude example a monitor may become disabled when vehicle is operated above 8000ft elevation Ambient Temperature Automobile manufacturers may disable OBD II monitors which can be affected by ambient temperature example a monitor may become disabled when a vehicle is started below 20 F ambient Power Takeoff Unit Automobile manufacturers may disable OBD II monitors which can be affected by power takeoff unit operation example a monitor may become disabled when a vehicle power takeoff is engaged or active To select OBD II Monitor do the following 1 Press a to select INFORMATION from the Select Test menu 2 Press to select OBD INFO mode from the Select Information menu 3 Press GP to select OBD MONITOR from the Select Information menu 4 The message WAITING FOR DATA is followed by EEC V OBD II monitor status information If an error or reminder message appears perform the action that is presented by the display refer to Appendix B Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 187 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 5 Use the or keys to scroll through the display screen
238. nected to a compatible serial printer by pressing the G key For instructions on connecting a Vetronix printer to the tester and print the data parameters refer to the tester operator s manual if you are using the MTS 3100 or Tech 1A If you are using a Tech 1 refer to the RS232C I F operators manual 7 Press QA to return to the Test Mode Menu Operation of the Data List mode is summarized in the flow diagram in Figure 5 19 SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 QUICK TESTS F2 STAR MODE WAITING FOR DATA SELECT DATA Ay FO ENGINE TRANSMISSION UEL F EMISSION SELECT LIST F0 ALL DATA E CUSTOM LIST ENGINE SPEED SELECTED YES SELECT 1 NO DE SELECT BUILDING DATA LIST Additional parameter 2 seconds selection ENGINE SPEED 1962 RPM SPARK ADVANCE 34 2 YES V 2 06 VOLTS 100 F 38 C More Data List Parameters FIGURE 5 19 Data List Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 135 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS DATA LIST G Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs and select the Engine Data List Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs and select the Transmission Data List Select the Fuel Data List Select the Emission Data List Go to the next
239. nformation may include Vehicle Identification Number VIN and Calibration IDs If the vehicle does not support these modes a Not Supported message is displayed Submode FO VIN The VIN mode displays the Vehicle s Identification Number found in the vehicle s PCM The VIN mode is not supported on all vehicles To select the VIN mode do the following 1 Press a to select INFORMATION from the Select Test menu 2 Press to select VEHICLE INFORMATION mode from the Select Information menu 3 Press to select VIN mode from the Vehicle Information Select Information menu The tester displays the vehicle VIN 4 Press 8B to return to the Vehicle Information Select Information menu SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION SELECT INFO F1 DLC LOCATION F2 OBD INFO F4 VEHICLE INFO VEHICLE INFO F0 VIN F1 CONFIGURATION VIN ID 1FAFP33P81W 189596 FIGURE 5 38 VIN No VIN Or Data Received If the vehicle does not contain an electronic VIN the tester displays NO VIN DATA RECEIVED Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 191 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F1 CONFIGURATION The Configuration mode displays the Calibration ID found in the vehicle s PCM The Configuration mode is not supported on all vehicles To select the Configuration mode do the following 1 Press G to select INFORMATION from the Select Test menu 2 Press to select VEHICLE INFORMATION mode from the Sel
240. nformation on setting up data list see Mode F0 Data List on page 134 5 Once the tester displays the Data List you are ready to begin the output test The output control can be in one of two controlled states a Test enters with output off Press the key to override EEC V PCM control and turn the fan relay on b Press the key to return the output test to normal EEC V PCM controls and turns the fan relay off 6 If you leave the output test on indefinitely the relay is automatically turned off by the tester after 3 minutes prevent low battery condition Additionally the output test is turned off by the PCM after 10 minutes if the tester becomes disconnected from the DLC after the engine is started or after the ignition key is cycled Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 165 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 7 The data list parameters are displayed while the output control test is selected A three character message is displayed at the end of line 2 of the display LSF These characters serve as a reminder as to which output control is being performed The last three characters of line 4 of the display read ON if the EEC V PCMs normal state is being overridden by the tester 8 Press or 19 to scroll through parameters all data list functions are available Refer to Mode F0 DATA LIST for instructions on viewing and printing the data list parameters 9 Press to quit the Output Test and return control
241. nition switching cycles Other Possible Causes Tech 1 DLC cable power cable or Ford adapter plug is loose or bad Master Cartridge is loose or has dirty contacts Cigarette lighter power intermittent Battery voltage dipping below 5 6 volts during cranking Tech 1 is malfunctioning Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 198 Engine Selection Does Not Match Cylinder ID B If You re Having a Problem Recommendations Charge the battery Power tester by using battery adapter cable IfLocked Up cycle power to the tester unplug and replug the cigarette lighter adapter e Check cartridge socket and cartridge edge connector e Check DLC power cable and connector and the Ford adapter plug for wear or corrosion ENGINE SELECTION DOES NOT MATCH CYLINDER ID ENGINE SELECTION DOES NOT MATCH CYLINDER I D EXIT Most Likely Cause Vehicle being tested does not match the vehicle selected in the Model Year Make Model and Engine Selection process Other Possible Causes Loose cable connectors Engine ECA is not correct for this vehicle Recommendations Reselect Model Year Make Model and Engine Check VIN charts again Remember that even if this message does not appear the wrong ECA may still be selected Engine types are supported for years in which Pinpoint Tests were available in Ford H manuals In rare cases vehicles with carry over engines and 1 2 year model changes will hav
242. nnection to the vehicle is not required to use this mode To select Review DTCS do the following 1 Press Qa to enter Review DTCs mode from the Select Test menu The REVIEW and DECODE display appears If there are no diagnostic trouble codes stored in the tester the tester displays NO QCK TST CODES This is a result of not performing the Continuous KOEO or KOER DTC read Quick Tests m Press to review diagnostic trouble codes received in the Continuous KOEO KOER or Diesel On Demand Quick Tests from the Review and Decode Selection menu The order of DTC display is KOER KOEO Continuous or On Demand tests if the tester has read DTCs from each test as a result of performing the KOER KOEO Continuous or On Demand tests On Demand DTCs stored in the tester are the result of performing the 7 3L NOTE Diesel engine s Output State Glow Plug Injector Buzz Cylinder Balance or Switch Test with DTCs read from the PCM The tester always displays EB results from the most recent On Demand test performed and if no DTCs are received after performing an On Demand test the tester does not display On Demand DTCs in Review Codes mode The Review DTCs mode keypress functions screen is displayed This screen describes available keypress functions when in Review DTCs mode After viewing use the and keys to scroll through the DTC list if multiple codes of one type have been received and use the key
243. not roll when the parking brake switch is toggled Press when the drive wheels are appropriately blocked 7 To start the switch test snap accelerate the accelerator pedal Press when complete 8 Next cycle the parking brake transmission control A T applications or clutch M T applications switches Press when complete 9 Next cycle the cruise control on off set accelerate and resume switches Press when complete 10 To finish the test depress and release the brake pedal Press when complete 11 A tester key help information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Switch Test The message TEST IN PROCESS appears then the results of the test are displayed NOTE The PCM expects all the switches to be cycled within 1 minute Make sure that all switches are cycled within that time otherwise inaccurate results may be displayed Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 183 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes If there are no DTCs to report you see NO DTCs and pressing EXIT or waiting 5 seconds returns you to the Test Selection Menu You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT If there are DTCs to report the tester displays DTCs in a column list format This screen shows the total number of DTCs and the DTC numbers read from the vehicle PCM Using the and keys the cursor can be scrolled through the list of reported DTCs 12 When the cursor is next to
244. ns PASSENGER CAR DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 222 Loss of Ignition Diagnostic Monitor IDM signal right side 223 Loss of Dual Plug Inhibit DPI control 224 PCM detected coil 1 2 3 or 4 primary circuit failure or IDM failure 225 Knock not sensed during dynamic response test KOER 226 Ignition Diagnostic Module IDM signal not received 232 PCM detected coil 1 2 3 or 4 primary circuit failure 238 PCM detected coil 4 primary circuit failure 241 ICM to PCM IDM pulsewidth transmission error 244 CID circuit fault present when cylinder balance test requested 311 AIR system inoperative during KOER 312 AIR misdirected during KOER 313 AIR not bypassed during KOER 314 AIR system inoperative during KOER 326 EGR PFE DPFE EGRT circuit voltage lower than expected 327 EGR EVP PFE DPFE EGRT circuit below minimum voltage 328 EGR closed valve voltage lower than expected 332 Insufficient EGR flow detected 334 EGR closed valve voltage higher than expected 335 EGR sensor voltage higher or lower than expected during KOEO 336 Exhaust pressure high EGR PFE DPFE circuit voltage higher than expected 337 EGR EVP PFE DPFE EGRT circuit above maximum voltage 338 Engine Coolant Temperature ECT lower than expected 339 Engine Coolant Temperature ECT higher than expected 341 Octane adjust circuit open or in use 411 Cannot control RPM during KOER l
245. ntrol Switch Condition of STI line in a grounded state This is the typical level of the line when requesting and during Quick Tests Transmission Fluid Temperature Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 265 Glossary and Abbreviations TIMING CHECK TNK TOT TP TP B TPS TR TRANS TSS TURBO UNLCK VAC VCRM VECI VEH VIM VIN VPWR VREF VSS WOT ZP Refers to the Quick Test mode Com puterized Timing Check Test Tank Transmission Oil Temperature Throttle Position Secondary Throttle Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor Transmission Range Transmission Transmission Select Switch Trans mission Speed Sensor A turbine system that increases the air pressure in the intake manifold to make more oxygen available for com bustion Unlock Volts Vacuum Variable Control Relay Module Vehicle Emission Control Informa tion Decal usually located in the engine compartment around the radi ator and fan shroud Vehicle Vehicle Interface Module An in line interface that expands tester function ality Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Power Vehicle Reference Vehicle Speed Sensor Wide Open Throttle Zero Pressure Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 266 Numerics 4EAT codes 250 A adapter DLC cable to vehicle 253 B blank screen error 196 cartridge malfunctioning error 197 cartridge missing error 197 check timing 103
246. ntroller cycles the series throttle between open rest to full closed At that time the PCM updates its adaptive value for the STC from the Secondary Throttle Position sensor feedback signal After the adaptive learn sequence the Secondary Throttle Position sensor signal is used for diagnostic purposes Expected value for this parameter is 0 5 0 7 volts at idle or driving TCS not engaged Note that the V in parenthesis indicates the parameter is voltage related SHIFT SOLENOID 1 Gas Engine Diesel Engine ON OFF Shift Solenoid 1 tells the state of the first shift solenoid in the transmission SHIFT SOLENOID 2 Gas Engine Diesel Engine ON OFF Shift Solenoid 2 tells the state of the second shift solenoid in the transmission SHIFT SOLENOID 3 Gas Engine Diesel Engine ON OFF Shift Solenoid 3 tells the state of the third shift solenoid in the transmission SHIFT SOLENOID 4 Gas Engine ON OFF Shift Solenoid 4 tells the state of the fourth shift solenoid in the transmission SHORT TERM FT B1 SHORT TERM FT B2 UNITS RANGE Short Term Fuel Trim Bank 1 or 2 is the measure of adaptive or feedback fuel correction strategy for the injection of fuel into the engine Short Term Fuel Trim represents the PCMs dynamic short term adjustment to fuel strategy determined from a lookup table in its memory This parameter is continually changing over time at a rate faster than long term fuel trim and varies with engine desig
247. nx 4 1 6L EFI EEC IV Ford 5 1 6L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford Marquis A 2 3L FBC EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F M 5 0L CFI H O EEC IV Ford Mercury F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford 1984 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Ranger 2 0L FBC MCU Ford A 2 3L FBC OHC MCU Ford S 2 8L FBC EEC IV Ford Bronco Y 4 9L FBC EEC IV Ford F 5 0L FBC EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC EEC IV Ford Bronco Ila S 2 8L FBC EEC IV Ford E F Series Y 4 9L FBC EEC IV Ford F 5 0L FBC EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC EEC IV Ford a Includes 1983 Bronco II Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 21 3 Vehicle Coverage 1985 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1985 FORD PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Tempo x 2 3L HSC BASE EEC IV Ford S 2 3L HSC PLUS EEC IV Ford Thunderbird TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford Escort 5 1 6L EFI EEC IV Ford 6 1 6L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford EXP 5 1 6L EFI EEC IV Ford 6 1 6L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford Mustang A 2 3L FBC OHC EEC IV Ford TW 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford EM 5 0L CFI H O EEC IV Ford LTD A 2 3L FBC OHC EEC IV Ford 3 3 8L CFI EEC IV Ford F M 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford Crown Victoria F 5 0L CFI EEC IV Ford G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford 1985 LINCOLN PASSENGER CARS 1985 MERCURY PASSENGER CARS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Contin
248. ny MECS codes are stored in memory the tester retrieves them and displays codes on the screen You can now perform KOEO KOER and Switch Monitor tests Refer to Ford or Mitchell diagnosis manuals for more information To clear MECS codes from controller memory disconnect the vehicle negative battery cable and step on the brake pedal for 10 seconds Note that on some 2 2L MECS equipped engines the self test input STI connector 15 not found next to the self test output STO connector like most EEC IV systems Generally the STI connector can be found about 6 away from the STO connector on the main diagnostic wiring harness Consult a vehicle wiring diagram if you are unsure Failure to connect the tester to STI does not permit MECS code retrieval E 7 FORD MAZDA 4EAT CODES 4EAT codes are identical to MECS codes since only SLOW codes are produced by the controller and similarly service code time duration structure Note that depending on application this transaxle is used with Ford or Mazda engines and has its own transaxle controller vehicles with 2 2L non turbo and 4EAT have electronics integrated into one controller and share one diagnostic connector 4EAT codes are accessed through the 4 self test connector which is physically different from the EEC IV quick test connector To connect your tester to the 4EAT self test connector please refer to Using Jumper Cables to Connect MECS Vehicles to the Tester on page 253 The wiring di
249. ol FC Electro Drive Fan EDF circuit failure 565 Canister Purge CANP circuit failure 566 3 4 shift solenoid circuit failure KOEO 567 Speed Control Vent SCVNT circuit failure KOEO IVSC test 568 Speed Control Vacuum SCVAC circuit failure KOEO IVSC test 569 Auxiliary Canister Purge CANP2 circuit failure 578 A C pressure sensor circuit shorted 579 Insufficient A C pressure change 581 Power to Fan circuit over current 582 Fan circuit open 583 Power to Fuel pump over current 584 Power ground circuit open Pin 1 VCRM module 585 Power to A C clutch over current 586 A C clutch circuit open 587 Variable Control Relay Module VCRM communication failure 617 1 2 shift error 618 2 3 shift error 619 3 4 shift error 621 Shift Solenoid 1 SS1 circuit failure 622 Shift Solenoid 2 SS2 circuit failure 624 Electronic Pressure Control EPC circuit failure 625 Electronic Pressure Control EPC driver open in PCM 626 Coast Clutch Solenoid CCS circuit failure 627 Torque Converter Clutch TCC solenoid circuit failure 628 Excessive converter clutch slippage 629 Torque Converter Clutch TCC solenoid circuit failure 631 Transmission Control Indicator Lamp TCIL circuit failure 632 Transmission Control Switch TCS circuit did not change states during KOER 633 4x4L switch closed during KOEO Ford Powertrain Applic
250. ol IMRC Monitor Bank 1 and Bank 2 is monitor voltage indication which describes the position of the Hall effect switch in the IMRC When the IMRC motor is engaged the Hall effect switch in the IMRC closes This grounds the IMRC monitor voltage signal from the PCM and informs the PCM that the secondary throttle plates are open The IMRC uses two air intake runners primary and secondary that feed one cylinder with the secondary runner under control by throttle plates that are mechanically tied to the IMRC motor Although it varies between application the IMRC system actuates between 2700 and 3200 RPM The IMRC motor and linkage can generate substantial torque keep hands fingers and loose objects away from the IMRC actuator linkage Engine dependent normal values can be 5 0v low to moderate engine load 0 0v high engine load IMTV CONTROL 0 100 Intake Manifold Tuning Valve IMTV Control 15 an indication of the amount in percentage that the intake manifold tuning valve is currently being commanded open Normally closed at low engine speeds the PCM outputs the IMTV control signal to command open the IMTV for increased low speed engine torque The IMTV is used on engines that have dual plenum intake manifolds to control intake air flow Although it varies between application the IMTV actuates around 2500 RPM Normal values are close to 096 engine speed less than 2500 RPM and close to 100 engine speed greater than 2500 RPM INJ
251. on AXODE AX4S AODE 4R70W 4R100 and E4OD electronic transmissions that are used on selected Ford cars and trucks ENGINE LOAD 0 100 Engine load is derived by the ECU from a measure of current engine airflow divided by engine peak airflow Engine load directly increases with throttle angle and drive conditions and is an indicator of percent engine capacity in any given operating mode Engine load is typically 5 at engine idle and 8096 or greater during Wide Open Throttle warm engine ENGINE SPEED RPM 0 6000 Engine Speed is an indication of crankshaft revolutions per minute The ECA uses engine speed to make determinations about the operation of various engine management components EOT T Diesel Engine Degrees F 0 250 Engine Oil Temperature displays the temperature of the oil in the engine At oil temperatures below 50 122 F low idle is increased to a maximum of 900 RPM to increase engine warm up time engine oil temperature signal detected out of range by the PCM High or low causes the PCM to assume an engine oil temperature of 20 C 68 F for starting purposes and 100 C 212 F for operating purposes The malfunction indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated as long as the fault condition exists Note that the T in parenthesis indicates the parameter 1s temperature related EOT V Diesel Engine UNITS RANGE The Engine Oil Temperature sensor is a thermistor mounted to the oil
252. on screen 2 Select for Last Vehicle Continuation 3 Press if the vehicle selection displayed is correct 4 Select system that you are testing F0 ENGINE or F1 CRUISE CONTROL 5 Select F1 QUICK TESTS 6 From the Test Selection menu press to select PRINT SUMMARY Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 119 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 7 The tester should display NOW PRINTING while a summary of the tests that have been done on the vehicle is printed PRINTER IS NOT READY is displayed if the printer is OFF LINE if the power is turned off or if the RS232 Cable is not connected Just turn the printer on or put it ON LINE When the Print Summary is complete the tester returns you to the Test Selection menu SELECT TEST v F8 REVIEW CODES F9 PRINT SUMMARY RS232 CARTRIDGE NOT INSTALLED PRINTER NOT READY AN RS 232 AUX CARTRIDGE IS REQUIRED FOR PRINTING PRINTER IS NOT READY PRINTER READY NOW PRINTING RETURNS AFTER COMPLETION FIGURE 5 12 Print Summary Engine System Example ACTIVE KEYS Select PRINT SUMMARY from Test Selection menu Returns you to Test Selection menu if RS232 Cartridge is missing or installed incorrectly or if you do not want to print Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 120 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F2 STAR MODE IVSC MECS The STAR MODE is intended
253. only Snapshot 1989 98 only Quick Tests Prepare Vehicle Continuous DTC KOEO Check Timing KOER Wiggle Test KOEO KOER OBD Controls Output Control Output State Glow Plugs Injector Buzz Switch Test Cylinder Balance SFI Freeze Frame Data Clear Continuous DTCs Review DTCs Print Summary Information DLC Location OBD Monitors Diagnostic System VIN Configuration STAR Mode Review codes STI Hold Test Toggle Fast Slow Codes Toggle Erase Tester Codes Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 91 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECTING A TEST MODE Once the vehicle and system selection has been completed the tester displays the Test Selection menu which shows you all the test modes available for the selected vehicle Figure 5 1 is an example of this menu for an EEC IV engine controller SELECT SYSTEM F0 ENGINE F1 CRUISE CONTL SELECT MODE Ay F0 DATA LIST F1 QUICK TESTS F2 STAR MODE FIGURE 5 1 Example of Quick Test Mode Selection Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 92 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes EEC IV IVSC AND STAR TEST MODES MODE F0 DATA LIST The purpose of the DATA LIST mode is to monitor diagnostic data parameters which are being transmitted on Ford s Data Communication Link
254. ontinuous codes during Wiggle testing Other vehicles output fault pulses when none exist Read Continuous codes for these vehicles to determine problems To select Wiggle Test do the following 1 Press from Test Selection menu 2 From the WIGGLE TESTS menu select either F0 Key On Engine Off Wiggle Test or F1 Key On Engine Running Wiggle Test 3 Answer to the test initialization displays after the requested action has been done 4 You see the display INITIALIZING WIGGLE TEST for six seconds 5 The next display for some vehicles reads STO TRANSITIONS MAY NOT INDICATE FAULT CONDITIONS On these vehicles the STO line output goes from 12 volts to ground and back irrespective of a wiggle fault If you are diagnosing such a vehicle complete your Wiggle testing then refer to the Continuous codes for diagnosis 6 If no faults occur the tester displays WIGGLE TEST 00 IF DONE EXIT If faults occur the tester displays FAULT and the counter increases by one every time a fault 1s detected Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 111 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 7 When finished press 24489 The tester then displays DO KOEO TEST TO SEE FAULT CODES GENERATED FROM WIGGLE TEST 8 After 6 seconds the display 1s replaced with TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT or you can press immediately if you do not want to wait 6 seconds Pressing one more time takes you to the Test Selection men
255. option the Ford 1981 2004 Powertrain Application automatically includes the SNAPSHOT selection in the Select mode menu OBD CONTROLS MODE ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC OBD CONTROLS mode provides fast access to output controls supported by the vehicle OBD system Certain vehicle systems allow the tester to command an output or actuator device to turn on and off or allow for PCM memory resets and adaptive learn strategies The tester that is used with this software is capable of bidirectional communication which controls the device under test or it can cause the device under test to change state by controlling PCM input output electronics This mode provides quick and efficient diagnostic software tools Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 5 Operating Modes 1 Ford Powertrain Application Description INFORMATION MODE While performing diagnostic routines on the vehicle under test it may be necessary to be provided with quick access information Selecting INFORMATION MODE displays helpful information about the vehicle or system under test This information may consist of data link connector DLC location information PCM software identification or system identification information The DLC LOCATION mode is available on EEC V systems OBD II to give you quick data link connector location DLC information on the vehicle under test In some cases the DLC location is not obvious and using this mode shortens your time for making connection
256. or Bank 1 Bank 2 represents the current that 18 flowing through the oxygen sensor heater circuit O2S heater current information is displayed for upstream or downstream O2Ss and for Bank 1 or Bank 2 O2Ss Since this parameter is a monitor it is an indication of the actual current flowing through the oxygen sensor heater circuit V TO Z PARAMETERS VEHICLE SPEED UNITS RANGE MPH Vehicle Speed is an indication of vehicle speed in mile per hour The ECA uses vehicle speed to make determinations about the operation of various engine management and speed control components VPWR VOLTAGE Volts 0 25 Vehicle Power VPWR Voltage is the battery system voltage as read by the supply wire to the ECA This value is the same as charging system voltage VPWR VOLTAGE Diesel Engine Volts 9 5 16 Vehicle Power VPWR Voltage is battery system voltage as read by the supply wire to the PCM This value should be the same as charging system voltage VREF VOLTAGE UNITS RANGE Vehicle Reference VREF Voltage is the sensor circuit voltage as read by the supply wire from the ECA This value is output to the sensors that the ECA uses to get information about the engine management system WOT A C CUTOFF ON OFF Wide Open Throttle WOT Air Conditioning A C Cutoff displays the state of the ECAs decision to momentarily turn off the A C clutch during a wide open throttle condition This provides more power for the engine to use during the wide open cond
257. or V configuration engines with dual exhaust systems there may be separate upstream and downstream O2S for each bank This results in the following naming convention O2S 1 1 bank 1 upstream O2S 1 2 bank 1 downstream O2S 2 1 bank 2 upstream O2S 2 2 bank 2 downstream 02 Sensor 2 1 O2 Sensor 1 2 YO Of 02 Sensor 2 2 On some V configuration engines with 2 upstream O2S there may be an O2S 3 O28 3 is the downstream O2S after the catalytic converter This configuration may have a third O28 ahead of the catalytic converter and results in the following naming convention O2S 1 1 bank 1 upstream O2S 1 2 bank 1 upstream O2S 2 1 bank 2 upstream O2S 1 3 bank 1 downstream O2 Sensor 1 1 2 2 Sensor 2 1 2 Sensor 1 2 02 Sensor 1 3 YO Together these conventions are all used to identify the O2S that may be causing a DTC or producing a faulty signal The O2S naming conventions shown here are consistent with J1979 Please consult the appropriate service manual for more information on the vehicle that you are working on Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 257 1993 2002 MERCURY VILLAGER NISSAN This chapter describes how to manually read and clear Engine Electronic Control Unit ECU DTCs on the 1993 98 Mercury Villager 3 0L VIN W The engine ECU on this vehicle is manufactured by Nissan and requires a different method to automatically read and clear DTCs The 1993 95 Mercury Villager i
258. or between different code types such as KOEO and Continuous Codes If a second digit is not transmitted then it is considered to be a zero While the ECA is busy running a diagnostic test the STO line is at battery voltage Through most of the test you are waiting for the ECA to send its codes This test time may be a fraction of a minute to almost 4 minutes long Some ECA controllers transmit fast and slow codes Slow codes are always available Fast codes are available on EEC IVs ISC Es and IVSCs In the Quick Test Mode the tester reads fast codes when available except when a test occurs after all slow codes are transmitted An example of such tests are Output State Timing Check and Cylinder Balance In the STAR MODE you select whether you want to read fast or slow codes Slow Code examples are MECS 4EAT and ABS Fast codes precede slow codes Each fast code is transmitted once each slow code is sent twice before another unique code is transmitted Reading fast codes is a real time saver Typically all fast codes are transmitted in a second It takes 16 seconds for a controller to send two slow code 11s and a code 98 takes about 25 seconds to be sent There are other codes transmitted by ECAs in certain tests All of these extra information codes are transmitted in slow mode only For example KOER tests begin with a Cylinder Identification code This code identifies the number of cylinders or whether the vehicle is a diesel Follow
259. ord G 5 8L FBC MCU Ford Merkur XR4Ti Ww 2 3L EFI Turbo EEC IV Ford 1989 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Ranger A 2 3L EEC IV Ford T 2 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Bronco Y 4 9L EFI EEC IV Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV Ford H 5 8L EFI EEC IV Ford Bronco 11 T 2 9L EFI EEC IV Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 30 3 Vehicle Coverage 1989 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER Aerostar U 3 0L EFI EEC IV Ford E F Series Y 4 9L EFI EEC IV Ford N 5 0L EFI EEC IV Ford H 5 8L EFI EEC IV Ford M 7 3L Diesel EEC IV Ford G 7 51 EFI EEC IV Ford 1990 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1990 FORD PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Escort 9 1 9L CFI EEC IV None Ford J 1 9L EFI EEC IV None Ford J 1 9L SEFI M A EEC IV None Ford Tempo X 2 3L EFI HSC BASE EEC IV None Ford S 2 3L EFI HSC PLUS EEC IV None Ford Probe U 3 0L EFI CAL EEC IV DCL Ford Taurus D 2 5L CFI HSC EEC IV None Ford U 3 0L EFI EEC IV DCL Ford Y 3 0L SHO SEFI M A EEC IV None Ford 4 3 8L SEFI AXOD EEC IV DCL Ford Thunderbird 4 3 8L SEFI RWD EEC IV DCL Ford R 3 8L SC SEFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Mustang A 2 3L EFI OHC EEC IV None Ford A 2 3L EFI OHC M A CA EEC IV None Ford E 5 0L SEFI HO M A EEC IV None Ford Crown Victoria F 5 0L SEFI EEC IV None Ford F 5 0L SEFI M A EEC IV None Ford G
260. ord Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 172 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes AY SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION CONTROL TYPE Y F0 OUTPUT TESTS F1 ENGINE F2 TRANSMISSION SELECT CONTROL Y FO Idle Speed F1 EGR F2 EVAP PURGE F3 O2 B1 1 HTR F4 O2 B1 S2 HTR F5 O2 B2 1 HTR O2 B2 52 HTR WAITING FOR DATA SELECTLIST F0 ENGINE F1 TRANSMISSION F2 FUEL F3 EMISSION SELECT LIST F0 ALL DATA F1 CUSTOM LIST EGR VACUUM REG 30 DC EGR EVAP PURGE DC 0 DC 30 EGR VACUUM REG 40 DC EGR EVAP PURGE DC 0 DC 40 EGR VACUUM REG 30 DC EGR EVAP PURGE DC 0 DC 30 EXIT ENGINE SPEED SELECTED YES SELECT 1 NO DE SELECT Additional parameter selection FIGURE 5 32 Submode F1 Engine Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 173 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F2 TRANSMISSION Transmission tests are available on many 1996 and newer gasoline engine vehicles with EEC V powertrain control systems CAUTION These tests should only be performed with the Key ON Engine OFF KOEO or Key On Engine Running KOER with the vehicle in park To select Transmission Tests do the following 1 Press G to enter Controls mode from the Select Test menu 2 Press GJ to select TRANSMISSION 3 Select the Transmission component that you wish
261. ored snapshot data TRIGGER POINT AT F0 BEGINNING F1 CENTER or F2 END of data MANUAL TRIGGER PRESS ENTER EXIT or F9 TO TRIGGER ENGINE SPEED 1 750 RPM SPARK ADVANCE 10 INTAKE AIR TEMP 6 VOLTS ENG COOL TEMP 0 6 VOLTS w More Data Parameters FIGURE 5 16 Snapshot To select Data Replay Phase of Snapshot Mode do the following 8 The Data Replay phase is indicated with a number initially zero in the lower right hand corner of the display Select the data parameter to be displayed using and 9 Use and keys to select the desired sample An index is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the tester display Sample 0 corresponds to the trigger sample sample 1 is the sample immediately proceeding the trigger sample 1 is immediately after the trigger and so on The index range may be less than the maximum number of samples if enough time was not allowed for data capture before or after the trigger The following keys can be used to move about more quickly in the data samples Display first earliest sample G9 Display Trigger sample Display last most recent sample 10 Pressing causes the sample time to be displayed instead of the sample index Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 127 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ENG COOL TEMP 40 40 F ENGINE SPEED ORPM 16 ENTER ENTER
262. orming the Injector Buzz key on engine off On Demand test causes the PCM to run a test of all fuel injectors and fuel injector circuits The Injector Buzz test allows you to check the operation of the fuel injector driver outputs within the diesel engine EEC V system Performing the Injector Buzz key on engine off test On Demand test causes the PCM to output key on engine off DTCs For a Injector Buzz DTC to occur a fault must be present while performing the Injector Buzz on demand test Injector Buzz related DTCs are not stored in the PCM memory The Injector Buzz key on engine off test should be performed if a problem with the fuel injector s or fuel injector circuit s are suspected The powertrain control system can output Injector Buzz DTCs when the ignition key is on and the engine is off which makes it valuable when diagnosing hard failures This is possible because the PCM is commanded to perform the Injector Buzz On Demand test NOTE Some 1995 96 7 3L Powerstroke Diesel engines may not support this test Consult Ford Service information for test application To select Injector Buzz Test do the following 1 Press to select the Injector Buzz test from the Test Selection Menu You are reminded to PERFORM PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST Press Cuz 2 You are prompted to initiate the Output State test Press to perform or I to exit to the Test Selection Menu Perform the instruction TURN IGNITION KEY OFF
263. osition TP sensor noisy harsh on line 34 EVP voltage above closed limit 35 EVP circuit above maximum voltage 41 System indicates lean or No HO2S switching detected 42 System indicates rich 43 Throttle Position TP sensor below idle spec 44 Secondary air system inoperative 45 Secondary air upstream during Self Test 46 Secondary air not bypassed during Self Test 47 4 x 4 switch is closed 49 1 2 Shift error 51 ECT indicated 40 C 40 F circuit open Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 210 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions TRUCK DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 52 Power Steering Pressure PSP switch circuit open or PSP circuit did not change states 53 TP above maximum voltage 54 IAT indicated 40 C 40 F circuit open 56 Transmission Oil Temp TOT indicated 40 C 40 F circuit open 59 2 3 Shift error 61 ECT indicated 123 C 254 F circuit grounded 62 Torque Converter Clutch error 63 TP circuit below minimum voltage 64 IAT indicated 123 C 254 F circuit grounded 65 Transmission Control Switch TCS circuit did not change states 66 Transmission Oil Temp TOT indicated 143 C 290 F circuit grounded 67 Park Neutral Position PNP switch circuit open A C ON Manual or Manual Lever Position MLP sensor out of range A C ON 68 Transmission Oil Temp TOT transmission over temp overheated 69 3 4 Sh
264. ou are ready to begin controlling the Engine component Depending on the component that is selected it can either be turned on or off or the component can be adjusted through its range See Table 5 1 Engine Controls for a list of Engine components and their available adjustment ranges a Press the key to turn the component ON or to adjust it up through its range b Press the key to turn the component OFF or to adjust it down through its range The data list parameters are displayed while the Engine control is selected A three character description of the selected component is displayed at the end of line 2 of the display These characters serve as a reminder as to which control is being performed The last two characters of line 4 ofthe display indicate the commanded value of the component 10 Press or Qs to scroll through the displayed parameters all data list functions are available 11 Refer to Mode F0 DATA LIST for instructions on viewing and printing the data list parameters Press 4I to quit the Engine Control and return control of the selected component to the PCM ACTIVE KEYS Turn the component ON or to adjust it up through its range Turn the component OFF or to adjust it down through its range CG Scroll through displayed diagnostic data parameters G Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Exit from test and return control to PCM F
265. out 10 seconds to reach 45 MPH 6 Drive vehicle between 30 and 45 MPH for 4 minutes if stop and go conditions occur total cumulative time must be within 20 and 45 MPH with no wide open throttle WOT conditions 7 Maintaining steady throttle position drive vehicle between 30 and 40 MPH for a minimum of minute 8 Decelerate stop vehicle and idle engine for a minimum of minute 9 Accelerate from 0 to 55 MPH at 1 2 throttle take about 10 seconds to reach 55 MPH 10 Maintaining steady throttle position drive vehicle between 40 and 65 MPH for a minimum of 80 seconds being sure to follow local speed limit laws for your area 11 Decelerate stop vehicle and idle engine 12 Check Continuous Memory DTCs If DTC P1000 is read from EEC V controllers memory check the OBD II readiness test s results and repeat the drive cycle If no DTCs are in memory then all EEC V controllers monitor tests were successfully completed E 4 SIGNAL LINES Ford Electronic Control Assemblies ECA with Quick Test capability use two signal lines STI and STO to communicate between a diagnostic tester and the ECA under test A common ground is also needed Self Test Input STI initiates and terminates Quick Tests in Electronic Control Assemblies During normal operating conditions the STI line is at approximately battery voltage To force the vehicle to enter a Quick Test STI must be grounded Grounding must occur before or just after turning the
266. ow RPM check 412 Cannot control RPM during KOER high RPM check 415 Idle Air Control IAC system at maximum adaptive lower limit 416 Idle Air Control IAC system at upper adaptive learning limit 452 Insufficient input from Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS 453 Servo leaking down KOER IVSC test 454 Servo leaking up KOER IVSC test Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 206 EEC IV DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions PASSENGER CAR DTCs CONTINUED DTC DEFINITION 455 Insufficient RPM increase KOER IVSC test 456 Insufficient RPM decrease KOER IVSC test 457 Speed control command switch s circuit not functioning KOEO IVSC test 458 Speed control command switch s stuck circuit grounded KOEO IVSC test 459 Speed control ground circuit open KOEO IVSC test 511 PCM Read Only Memory ROM test failure KOEO 512 PCM Keep Alive Memory KAM test failure 513 PCM internal voltage failure KOEO 519 Power Steering Pressure PSP switch circuit open 521 Power Steering Pressure PSP switch circuit did not change states 522 Vehicle not in PARK or NEUTRAL during KOEO PNP or NDS switch circuit open 524 Low speed fuel pump circuit open battery to PCM 525 Indicates vehicle in gear A C on 527 Park Neutral Position PNP switch circuit open A C on 528 Clutch Pedal Position CPP Clutch Engage Switch CES switch circuit failure
267. owertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 164 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Ga Select All Outputs Off output control test Turn test ON Turn test OFF G Scroll through displayed diagnostic data parameters G GD Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Exit from output control test Submode F2 Low Speed Fan This test is available on all 1994 and newer vehicles with gasoline engines and a low speed cooling fan and the EEC V powertrain systems Once the output test begins test commands the fan relay to run in the key on engine off state This mode is described in Ford service information as Output Test Mode NOTE EH Use this mode to check low speed fan circuit condition CAUTION Cooling Fan Rotation Remember to check for and keep all body parts wire harness test leads and shop lamps out of the fan blades before the test is performed To select Low Speed Fan do the following 1 Press G to enter OBD Controls mode from the Select Test menu 2 Press a to select Low Speed Fan 3 Select one of the Data Lists Press Gf for ENGINE for TRANSMISSION for FUEL or G for EMISSION Each Data List has different data parameters to view 4 Select FO ALL DATA or F1 CUSTOM LIST from the select list menu If F1 CUSTOM LIST is selected choose the parameters for display and press 19 9 for more i
268. owever 1995 96 VIN F 7 3L diesel powertrains are not required to be OBD II compliant and may not support all diagnostic test modes or OBD controls Similarly 1997 and newer VIN F 7 3L diesel powertrains are required to be OBD II compliant but may not support a lengthy freeze frame data list EEC IV EQUIPPED VEHICLES Beginning in 1983 Ford equipped passenger cars with the EEC IV electronic control assembly or powertrain control unit Starting in 1984 the EEC IV system was used on light duty trucks Diagnostic trouble codes two and three digit are available on all vehicles that use EEC IV powertrain control system Additionally diagnostic data parameters are available from the EEC IV system starting in 1989 for passenger cars and 1990 for light duty trucks Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 15 3 Vehicle Coverage DIAGNOSTIC DATA TYPE To determine if the vehicle you are testing supports diagnostic data parameters refer to the DATA TYPE column in the following vehicle and engine charts DCL in the column indicates that the vehicle is equipped with Ford s Data Communication Link DCL SCP in the column indicates that the vehicle is equipped with Ford s Standard Corporate Protocol SCP and NONE indicates no diagnostic data parameter information is available Review the table footnotes for additional application information IVSC EQUIPPED VEHICLES Beginning in 1986 Ford equipped passenger cars with the Integrated Ve
269. plication on page 73 SELECTING THE APPLICATION 1 Once the tester is powered the following screen is displayed Vetronix Corp Vetronix Corp High Capacity Ford 6MB MSC Diagnostics 2004 vX X ENTER 2004 vX X 16MB Mass Storage Ford Diagnostic Cartridge MSC Cartridge 2 Press or wait two seconds to proceed to the Applications menu screen If the display is not correct refer to Appendix B The available software applications are displayed APPLICATIONS l FORD P T FORD CHASSIS FORD BODY 3 Select the application If your application is on a MSC use the P and keys to move the cursor then press 19 9 If the application is on a MAC select the function key next to the desired application 4 If data from a previously tested vehicle is stored in the tester memory you can press GP to go to the previous software application 5 The Ford Powertrain identification screen is displayed See Perform Vehicle and or System Selection on page 74 for vehicle and system selection POWERTRAIN 1981 2004 V2 0 ENTER 6 If the display is correct please read Operating Precautions on page 12 before proceeding to Perform Vehicle and or System Selection on page 74 7 operate in MTS 3100 Enhanced Mode refer to the Program Card Operator s Manual Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 73 4 Getting Started ACTIVE KEYS ENTER Confirm displayed information is correct Adv
270. rd 7 5L V8 SFI F L Series J 7 0L V8 MFI MAP EEC IV DCL Ford Windstar U 3 0L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 4 3 8L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 CAL FED emissions and II calibration less than 8500165 GVWR CAL FED emissions and I calibration greater than 8500165 GVWR CAL FED emissions and OBD I calibration CAL emissions and II calibration less than 1400016 GVWR CAL emissions and I calibration greater than 1400016 GVWR FED emissions and OBD I calibration m gt Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 49 3 Vehicle Coverage 1999 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1999 FORD PASSENGER CARS 8TH DATA VEHICLE ENGINE ECA ADAPTER VIN NGINED LINK Escort P 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD 11 2 Escort ZX2 3 2 0L DOHC 16V SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 ZETEC Contour GFP 2 2 0L DOHC 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Contour 3 2 0L 14 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 L 2 5L V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Contour SVT G 2 5L DOHC V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Taurus 1 3 0L 2V V6 FFV SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 2 3 0L 2V V6 FFV SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 U 3 0L 2V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 S 3 0L 4V V6 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Taurus SHO N 3 4L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang 4 3 8L V6 EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang GT X 4 6L 2V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD II C2 Mustang Cobra V 4 6L 4V V8 SFI MAF EEC V SCP OBD
271. re not checked in the Pinpoint Test It is your job to guarantee that they are in working order before beginning the Pinpoint Test The beginning of a Pinpoint Test also mentions switch settings and manipulations that you should have done during the Quick Test so make sure that you follow these necessary steps before starting your pinpoint diagnosis E 14 OBD OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATION INFORMATION OBD II compliant engine management systems use a new naming convention for Oxygen Sensors O2S The need for this sensor convention was required because of the OBD II system s use of a downstream O2S O2S location information is divided into cylinder bank and 2 location Bank 1 contains the sensor that is downstream from the engine cylinder bank which has number 1 cylinder Bank 2 contains the sensor opposite the cylinder Bank 1 Additionally O2S location is separated into upstream and downstream relative to the catalytic converter For in line engines and V configuration engines with Wye exhaust systems and two O2S ahead of the catalytic converter O2S 1 is the upstream sensor and 2 2 is the downstream sensor This results in the naming convention bank location Examples are O2S 1 1 bank 1 upstream O2S 1 2 bank 1 downstream O2 Sensor 1 1 02 Sensor 11 X O2 Sensor 1 2 O2 Sensor 1 2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 256 Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics O2 Sensor 1 1 O F
272. res manifold pressure so that the PCM can determine boost pressure in the intake manifold Expected values for this parameter are 0 0psi KOEO 0 0 1 0 PSIG Idle hot engine and 1 0 14 PSIG while driving with medium to high load Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter is pressure related MANIFOLD VACUUM in Hg 0 30 Manifold vacuum is a measure of the pressure within the intake manifold relative to atmospheric pressure Manifold vacuum is the value of manifold absolute pressure subtracted from atmospheric pressure VAC ATM MAP Manifold vacuum decreases with engine load and depending on altitude is typically 17 19in Hg at idle warm engine This parameter is available on MAP sensor equipped vehicles only MAP F Diesel Engine Hz 95 165 The Manifold Absolute Pressure MAP sensor is a variable capacitance sensor that supplies the PCM with the intake manifold pressure Note that the F in parenthesis indicates the parameter is frequency related Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 231 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions MAP F Gasoline Engine UNITS RANGE 0 160 Manifold Air Pressure sensor is a measure of the pressure within the intake manifold relative to atmospheric Ford MAP sensors output a signal that is measured in frequency Atmospheric pressure equals the addition of manifold and vacuum pressures MAP frequency increases with engine load and depending on alt
273. revent misuse of application cartridges and incorrect vehicle diagnosis Refer to Chapter 4 for complete information on the correct cables and adapters to use depending on which tester you have and the vehicle you are diagnosing Using This Manual Reading through this manual before putting your MTS 3100 to work introduces you to all of its capabilities and tell you how to use them immediately The application software is designed to reduce time consuming reference to manuals as much as possible Once you are familiar with the software and its operation you ll be able to spend more time diagnosing and less time reading Later if questions arise a quick glance at the flow chart for the test you are performing is probably all you need The flow charts in this manual consist of screen displays enclosed in boxes The displays are arranged in the order in which they appear while using the software Keys on the tester keypad are shown in the manual as white letters in small black boxes At the end of each test mode description there is a list of the active tester keys and their functions in that particular test Note that if you are using the MTS 3100 the display will look different for vehicle selection and data list software Otherwise the diagnostic routines are the same Tech 1 1A displays as those shown in this manual Refer to the MTS 3100 Operator s Manual for examples of MTS 3100 displays Most display screens require input from you such as
274. reviously captured Snapshot While the tester is waiting for a trigger Powertrain diagnostic data is continuously being stored in its memory The data is organized as a number of data samples The value or state of each parameter is saved for each sample Once the maximum number of samples has been recorded the oldest data 1s discarded The data display indicates the waiting for trigger condition with a flashing W in the lower right hand corner of the display While waiting for the selected trigger the GD CUAB or keys must be pressed to begin manual trigger data capture Once the trigger occurs the tester beeps and then continues to save data samples until its memory 15 full The data display indicates that the trigger has occurred by replacing the flashing W with a fixed T As soon as the memory is full the data capture terminates automatically and the tester advances to the Data Display phase Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 158 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 8 Pressing 24 after the trigger has occurred terminates the Data Capture phase early and advances to the Data Display phase ACTIVE KEYS SNAPSHOT SETUP PHASE Set trigger point at beginning or select all parameters to display Ga Set trigger point at center or select custom list parameters to display Set trigger point at end Select Snapshot mode GJ Select trigger point and start manual trigger
275. ride CCO solenoid circuit failure 631 Transmission Control Indicator Lamp TCIL circuit failure 632 Transmission Control Switch TCS circuit did not change states during 633 4x4L switch closed during 634 Manual Lever Position MLP voltage higher or lower than expected 636 Transmission Oil Temp TOT higher or lower than expected 637 Transmission Oil Temp TOT sensor circuit above maximum voltage 40 F indicated 638 Transmission Oil Temp TOT sensor circuit below minimum voltage 290 F indicated 639 Insufficient input from Transmission Speed Sensor TSS 653 Transmission Clutch Converter Control Switch TCS did not change states during KOER test 654 Manual Lever Position MLP sensor indicating not in PARK during Self Test 655 Manual Lever Position MLP sensor indicating not in NEUTRAL during Self Test 656 Torque Converter Clutch slippage error 998 Hard Fault Present DTCs DTCs displayed are not applicable to the vehicle being tested NOT LISTED EEC V DTCS The 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain Application supports displaying Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs for 1994 and newer Ford vehicles equipped with the EEC V system The EEC V system can output Powertrain or Network Standard Corporate Protocol DTCs Because the EEC V system is designed to detect and identify emission related problems in great detail the number of EEC V DTCs exceeds several hundred code numbers and desc
276. rimary input to the ECU for fuel control Once the O2S is warmed up 7500 degrees its output voltage fluctuates above and below a threshold of 0 450 volts Values greater than 0 450v indicate a rich condition while values less than 0 450v indicate a lean condition If the O2S has not achieved its normal operating temperature its value may remain at 0 450v The up or down stream O2S parameter label also defines the cylinder bank that is feeding the O2S Part of the label is a term Bx and Bx refers to engine cylinder bank 1 or 2 Refer to Appendix E for a more complete description of the O2S naming convention UP O2S HEATER B1 UP O2S HEATER B2 DN O2S HEATER B1 DN O2S HEATER B2 OFF ON Up or Down O2S Heater Bank 1 or Bank 2 describes the state of O2S heater The PCM commands the O2S heater ON or OFF depending on current engine operating conditions The EEC V system uses heated oxygen sensors to allow for starting the fuel control process earlier in the engine start up cycle Proper operation of the oxygen sensor heater is necessary for the fuel control system to reduce tailpipe emissions during cold starts or prolonged idling Normal values are On KOER or Off KOEO UPO2S HTR MON B1 UPO2S HTR MON B2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 241 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions DNO2S HTR MON B1 DNO2S HTR MON B2 Milliamps 0 5000 EEC V Upstream or Downstream Oxygen Sensor O2S Heater Monit
277. riptions The 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain Application is capable of reading and displaying DTC number and descriptions read from the EEC V Powertrain Control Module PCM DTCs that are output from the EEC V Powertrain Control Module are 5 characters in length a two character alphanumeric identifier followed by a three digit numeric diagnostic trouble code Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 215 EEC V DTCs C Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions PO 103 two character E three digit alphanumeric numeric code identifier The two character alphanumeric identifier can have a P U B or C for its first character Each letter is defined as P Powertrain System U Network System B Body System Chassis System The two character alphanumeric identifier can have a 0 or 1 for the second character Each number is defined as 0 Society of Automotive Engineers SAE defined DTCs 1 Manufacturer defined DTCs Referring to the above a DTC with 0 for the second character e g P0102 defines a DTC that has been defined by the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE and whose definition should be uniform for all automotive manufacturers A DTC with 1 for the second character e g P1023 defines a DTC that has been defined by the vehicle manufacturer and whose definition may not be uniform for all automotive manufacturers The three character numeric diagnostic trouble code is separated into categories that best repres
278. riven at wide open throttle or coasting OLDRIVE Open Loop due to a Fault with the OBD II system OLFAULT Closed Loop with only one oxygen sensor being used for fuel control and a fault with at least one oxygen sensor CLFAULT or a display of a Reserved status RSRVD which is used for future support FUEL PRESSURE kPaG 0 765 EEC V Fuel Injection Pressure diagnostic data parameter is a gauge measure of the engine fuel rail pressure Note that the P in parentheses indicates the parameter is pressure related LONG TERM FT B1 LONG TERM FT B2 UNITS RANGE 100 to 100 Long Term Fuel Trim Bank 1 Bank 2 is the measure of adaptive or feedback fuel correction strategy for the injection of fuel into the engine Long term fuel trim represents the ECUs steady long term adjustment to fuel strategy determined from a lookup table in its memory This parameter is changes slowly over time at a rate slower than short term fuel trim and varies with engine design and engine operating conditions The numeric character in LONG TERM FT B1 and LONG TERM FT B2 define the cylinders that are grouped as a bank for fuel feedback correction Bank 1 is the bank which contains cylinder number 1 Expected values for this parameter can be 10 0 warm engine at idle MAP P kPaA 0 255 EEC V Manifold Absolute Pressure is a variable capacitance sensor that measures manifold pressure so that the PCM can determine manifold pressure which enables it to
279. rquis W 4 6L SFI M A AOD E EEC IV DCL Ford 1993 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Ranger A 2 3L MFI OHC M A EEC IV DCL Ford U 3 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford X 4 0L MFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Bronco Y 4 9L EFI Manual Trans EEC IV DCL Ford Y 4 9L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford Explorer X 4 0L MFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Aerostar U 3 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford X 4 0L MFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 38 3 Vehicle Coverage 1993 FORD LINCOLN MERCURY TRUCKS VANS CONTINUED DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK E F Series Y 4 9L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford N 5 0L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford H 5 8L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford R 5 8L MFI HO EEC IV DCLP Ford J 7 0L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford M 7 3L Diesel EEC IV None Ford G 7 5L MFI EEC IV DCL Ford a E4OD Transmission only b F Series trucks only 1994 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1994 FORD PASSENGER CARS DATA VEHICLE VIN ENGINES ECA ADAPTER LINK Escort J 1 9L SFI EEC IV DCL Ford Tempo X 2 3L SFI HSC EEC IV DCL Ford U 3 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford Probe A 2 0L SFI M A CD4E EEC IV DCL Ford A 2 0L SFI EEC IV None Ford Taurus 1 3 0L FF SFI EEC IV DCL Ford Y 3 0L SHO SFI M A EEC IV None Ford U 3 0L SFI M A EEC IV DCL Ford 3 2L SHO EEC IV DCL Ford 4 3 8L SF
280. rst display is a Help menu showing the active keys that may be used and their current state The second display shows you all codes transmitted including service code code separator and dynamic response codes Up to 24 codes are held in the STAR MODE before you are prompted to review and record any codes you want to save on paper Then you need to erase codes before any more codes may be read Codes received in the STAR MODE can be decoded under Quick Test press aj G in the Quick Test Selection menu and a STAR CODE Print Summary can be performed under Quick Test press in the Quick Test Selection menu To read Air Suspension Ford ABS MECS 4EAT and Mazda ABS slow service codes the tester should be set up to read slow service codes NOTE For 1988 Thunderbird and Cougar ABS systems use the tester to initiate the Quick Test using the key in the STAR MODE and read the ABS codes on the amber ABS lamp on the dash Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 121 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes F0 DATA LIST F1 QUICK TESTS F2 STAR MODE F3 SNAPSHOT SELECT SYSTEM TYPE F0 EEC IV MCU 1 MECS REVIEW CODES TEST gt HOLD UNUSED ERASE CODES REVIEW CODES TEST gt HOLD F0 REVIEW CODES F1 HOLD gt TEST F2 FAST gt SLOW F3 ERASE CODES SLOW gt FAST ERASE CODES ERASE CODES YES NO STAR F1 HOLD PRESS AND A TEST BEGINS TRANSMITT
281. rtrain Application 1981 2004 Page 79 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 5 Ford Configuration for MTS 3100 MTS 3100 DC POWER CABLE DLC CABLE FORD 7 14 DLC ADAPTER 2 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 80 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 6 Ford Configuration for Tech 1A DLC CABLE TECH 1A DC POWER CABLE APPLICATION CARTRIDGE FORD 7 14 PIN DLC ADAPTER Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 81 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 7 Ford Configuration for Tech 1 12 15 ALDL CABLE TECH 1 TECH 1 14 12 PIN VIM ADAPTER APPLICATION P N 02001198 CARTRIDGE Z 7 A e FORD PIN Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 82 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 8 OBD II C2 Configuration for MTS 3100 MTS 3100 OBD COMPLIANT 0 lt pos NTROLLER AREA EV aa NETWORK VIM P N F 00K 108 115 DLC CABLE 16 24 PIN DLC ADAPTER CABLE P N 02001744 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 83 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 9 OBD II C Configuration for MTS 3100 MTS 3100 OBD II COMPLIANT CAN VIM P N 02003211 DCL CABLE ADAPTER CABLE P N 02001744 or 3000081 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 84 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 10 OBD II Configuration for Tech 1A OBD II INTERFACE CARTRIDGE P N 02002178 DLC CABLE APP
282. s 6 The first display screen indicates the vehicle s monitoring capability for Continuously monitored systems Misfire Monitoring Fuel System Monitoring Comprehensive Component Monitoring The status for Continuous monitors is displayed as CONT for Continuously Running or N A for Not Available e g PCM does not support The next three display screens indicate the vehicle s monitoring capability for Non Continuously monitored systems Catalyst Monitoring Heated Catalyst Monitoring Evaporative Monitoring Secondary Air System Monitoring A C System Monitoring O2Sensor Monitoring O2Sensor Heater Monitoring Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR System Monitoring The status for Non Continuous monitors is displayed as YES for monitor is currently supported and has completed NO for monitor is currently supported and has not completed or N A for Not Available e g PCM does not support 7 Press IB to return to the Test Mode Menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 188 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION SELECT INFO F1 DLC LOCATION F2 OBD INFO F4 VEHICLE INFO SELECT INFO F0 MIL STATUS F1 OBD MONITOR F2 DIG SYSTEM MONITOR STATUS Misfire CONT Fuel Syst CONT Component CONT MONITOR STATUS Catalyst S Heated Cat N A Evap System YES MONITOR STATUS i Secndry air YES
283. s this test allows control of PCM ENGINE outputs For gasoline engines the test modes are All Off All On Low Speed Fan High Speed Fan Idle Speed EGR Evap Purge O2 S1 O2 S2 Htr O2 B2 S1 O2 B2 S2 Htr Shift Sol 1 Shift Sol 2 Shift Sol 3 Shift Sol 4 and TCC Lockup For diesel engines the test modes are Output State Glow Plug Injector Buzz Cylinder Balance and Switch Test Freeze Frame Data Specific to the EEC V systems this mode allows display of PCM ENGINE stored Freeze Frame data based on the moment the PCM detected the fault Output State Test This test allows you to toggle turn on and off EEC IV control ENGINE devices such as solenoids and relays The tester will instruct you when to increase decrease the throttle to change the state of the outputs Cylinder Balance Test This checks the fuel injectors on the SEFI engines The codes received ENGINE from the EEC IV are interpreted by the tester and displayed on the screen Wiggle Tests These tests assist you in locating loose or faulty wires and connectors ENGINE in the ECA Clear Continuous Codes ENGINE This allows you to erase EEC V or EEC IV Continuous Codes from ECA memory Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 7 Diagnostic Summary 1 Ford Powertrain Application Description QUICK TEST MODE CONTINUED TEST PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION Review Codes ENGINE IVS Allow
284. s D Data List Parameter Descriptions CONTINUOUS DTCS UNITS RANGE ECA Continuous Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs is a numeric count for number of Continuous DTCs that are stored in the PCM Continuous DTCs can be used to determine if the PCM has Continuous DTCs stored in memory without performing the Continuous DTC read test Expected values are 0 for no Continuous DTCs stored and 1 or higher for Continuous DTCs stored in the PCM CTP VOLTAGE Volts 0 1 25 Closed Throttle Position CTP Voltage is a voltage range valid for idle conditions only CTP voltage has increased accuracy than TP Voltage and the ECA uses this data for determination of TPS operation CUMUL MISFIRE Counts 0 65535 Cumul Misfire displays a count of the cumulative number of misfire events CURRENT GEAR STATES Current Gear displays the gear that the automatic transmission is currently in The ECA controls the shift strategy and commands gear operation during normal drive conditions CYL HEAD V Volts 0 5V Cylinder Head Temperature CHT Voltage is an analog input to the ECU This parameter provides a voltage indication of the engine cylinder head temperature sensor The CHT sensor is designed to alert the PCM of a possible engine over temperature condition CHT sensors can be located in the aluminum cylinder head Typical CHT voltage is 0 60v warm engine at idle ECT 200 F Note that the V in parenthesis indicates the parameter is
285. s Mode Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 186 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F1 OBD II Monitor The OBD II Monitors mode displays OBD II Diagnostic Monitors Status Readiness Test information Ford s EEC V systems are capable of identifying the likely area of a malfunction within the electronic engine control system and some vehicle problems can be determined by checking the status of the OBD II monitors The status of the OBD II monitors is the information that is displayed in this mode Automobile Manufacturer support for the OBD II monitors are part of the California Air Resources Board OBD II regulation and Ford s EEC V systems supports OBD II monitors on all vehicles that are OBD II certified OBD II Monitors mode is not supported on 1995 96 7 3L VIN F powerstroke diesel powertrains There are two types of OBD II monitors Continuous and Non Continuous Continuous monitors are performed by the PCM all the time and never complete The following options are part of the OBD II regulation and are available to the automobile manufacturer for vehicle PCM development In the case of some of these monitors a manufacturer may have determined that a monitor is unreliable or not complete when certain conditions exist therefore not enabling proper operation MIL Operation When excessive tailpipe emissions or powertrain component failure is detected by the OBD II system the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL illumi
286. s OBD I certified and illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL when there is a system fault If the MIL is on perform the manual DTC tests as outlined in this section The 1996 2002 Mercury Villager is OBD II certified and illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL when an emission related fault occurs in two consecutive trips If the emission related malfunction is not present for three or more trips then the engine ECU turns the MIL off Also the MIL is illuminated or flashed during the first trip when tailpipe emissions misfire catalytic convertor or closed loop operation problems exceed the federal limit If the MIL is on perform the manual DTC tests as outlined in this section For DTC descriptions and Pinpoint Tests refer to manufacturer service information MANUALLY READING DTCS ON 1993 2002 MERCURY VILLAGER 3 0L VIN W To manually read DTCs do the following 1 Locate the Diagnostic Jumper Connector under hood below MAF sensor on bracket bolted to transaxle 2 Turn the ignition key to ON 3 Disconnect the Diagnostic Jumper Connector DJC 4 Referring to the illustration use a jumper wire to short the Blue White wire and Grey Blue wire between the DJC halves Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 258 1993 2002 Mercury Villager Nissan 1993 95 Mercury Villager 1996 2002 Mercury Villager 5 Wait 2 seconds 6 Disconnect the jumper wire and reconnect the DJC 7 Record th
287. s an EEC IV engine or IVSC system there will be a small STI connector pigtailed off of the Ford 6 pin Self test connector Insert the small STI connector into the open slot on the Ford adapter Continue to Powering Up the Tester on page 73 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 70 4 Getting Started TECH 1A Before operating the Tech 1A tester perform the following steps 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Connect the DLC cable to the tester and tighten the screws 3 Insert the application cartridge into the Master Cartridge slot on the bottom rear of the tester FIGURE 4 2 Inserting Cartridge into the Tech 1A Tech 1A f y Application Cartridge or Mass Storage M Cartridge MSC 4a EEC IV MCU ISC E IVSC ES Systems Attach the Ford 7 pin adapter to the vehicle end of the DLC cable Connect the 7 pin end larger end of the adapter to the vehicle quick test connector In addition if you are testing a MECS or 4EAT system you need to connect two jumper wires between the Ford adapter and the vehicle self test connector Refer to the wiring diagram s Using Jumper Cables to Connect MECS Vehicles to the Tester on page 253 of this manual for proper connection DLC Location On most vehicles the engine self test connector is located under the hood near the top of the firewall or around the left or right wheel well Refer to the vehicle service manual if in doubt 4b EEC V Systems Install the OBD II
288. s you to retrieve the latest codes from each test performed A maximum of 24 codes can be saved for each test including STAR mode At the press of a button the codes can be translated one code at a time to Pinpoint Test designations in the Ford and Mitchell service manuals DATA LIST MODE TEST PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION Print Summary ENGIVE IVSC If you have a printer you can print a summary of the year model components tested diagnostics codes and test results all listed in sequential order This provides you with a printed copy for reviewing test procedures and for assistance in maintaining customer and business records Data List ENGINE EEC V EEC IV Displays diagnostic data parameters in pre selected or user selected pairs Snapshot ENGINE EEC V EEC IV Records data before and after the occurrence of an intermittent fault condition Selected manually by pressing either or INFORMATION MODE TEST PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION DLC Location This gives you quick data link connector location DLC information on the vehicle being tested MIL Status This indicates if there is an emission related DTC in the vehicle s PCM and if the MIL is being requested to illuminate OBD II Monitors This mode allows display of PCM monitor test status according to the OBD II requirements VIN This mode displays the Vehicle Identification Number It may not be supported on all ve
289. some instances and the immediate test has passed with no problem detected NO TEST Some Mitchell codes decode to NO TEST This is because there is no corresponding Mitchell Pinpoint Test for the Ford Pinpoint Test NO STRT This service code decodes to a NO START TEST instead of a Pinpoint Test RERUN Repeat the KOEO test The ECA needs the test repeated to run Quick Tests properly KOEO SECTXXX Go to the indicated chapter in the H Manual SYMPTM Refer to the part of the manual that covers Diagnosis by Symptoms to continue trouble shooting Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 117 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST YA F8 REVIEW CODES F9 PRINT SUMMARY REVIEW amp DECODE F0 STAR CODES F1 QUICK TEST CODES EXIT KOER vA 1ST CODE 22 MAP BP SENSOR PINPOINT DF1 KOER YA KOER vA 1ST CODE 22 23 SYSTEM CHECK 1 10 PINPOINT 52 FO NEXT EXIT EXIT IS THE ENGINE lt gt KOEO vA ENTER KOEO RUNNING ROUGH OR 0 gt 22 1ST CODE 22 IDLING ROUGH 1 10 MAP BP SENSOR YES NO F0 NEXT EXIT EXIT PINPOINT DF1 KOEO YA CONTINUOUS YA ENTER CONTINUOUS Y 15 CODE 15 0 gt 22 15 23 1ST CODE 22 CONT MEMRY SERVC 1 10 11 SENSOR PINPOINT QB3 FO NEXT EXIT EXIT PINPOINT DF90 MOVES CURSOR LEFT MOVES CURSOR RIGHT 1 er ONTINUOUS MOVES CURSOR DOWN MOVES CURSOR UP PINPOINT PASS DISPLAYS NEXT CODE T
290. st is out of the PCM expected data message format range Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 195 IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM Although the testers were designed to give you years of trouble free service occasional problems may occur that require special attention Some of these problems may be corrected with a few simple steps Examples of most of the displays which you might see under abnormal conditions are shown In addition the most likely cause for the condition is given as well as other possible causes and recommendations on how to isolate or eliminate the problem If the problem appears to be in the tester perform the tester Self test BLANK SCREEN Most Likely Cause Faulty cable Blown power cable fuse replace with 3A fuse Other Possible Causes No power is applied to the tester Tester power supply is malfunctioning Recommendations Plug the tester into another vehicle to verify proper operation Check the 12 volt power at the cigarette lighter Check for proper polarity of 12 volt power center conductor should be positive Check DLC cables and Ford adapter for continuity Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 196 Screen Displays Solid Bars B If You re Having a Problem SCREEN DISPLAYS SOLID BARS Most Likely Cause Two master cartridges are installed Other Possible Causes Master cartridge is malfunctioning
291. st or change to DTC description display Return to Select Test menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 153 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F9 PRINT SUMMARY Print Summary is a tester feature not a Ford Quick Test While you are in Quick Test mode a record is kept of all tests performed and the results of Diagnostic Trouble Codes received in each test When a summary is printed you get a chronological record of all tests that were performed and a selected vehicle header message If you are using a Tech 1 tester the optional RS232C Interface Cartridge and a Tech 1 printer or equivalent serial printer are required for printing Refer to the RS232C I F Cartridge Operator s Manual for printer setup instructions When using a Tech 1 or MTS 3100 tester refer to the tester and printer operator s manuals for printer setup NOTE Selecting a new vehicle erases the contents of the print summary record for EH the previously selected vehicle Tech 1 Users Only NOTE Be sure the Tech 1 power is off before installing the RS232 Cartridge The RS232 Cartridge can remain in the Tech 1 during normal operation In this case you may always plug into the TECHI Printer with the power on Installation of a cartridge while power is applied often causes abnormal operation of the TECHI To select Print Summary do the following From the Power up screen Press to get to the Model Year sel
292. systems Once the output test begins the test commands selected output actuators except for cooling fans and fuel injectors to run in the key on engine off state If an output actuator is normally in the OFF state running this test changes the output actuator to the ON state This mode is described in Ford service information as Output Test Mode NOTE EH Use this mode to check output actuator and fuel system circuit condition Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 160 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes CAUTION Remember to check for and make sure that the fuel system is intact and its fuel lines or fittings are not open or loose Keep all areas of the vehicle and e shop work space free of combustible materials and sparks before the test is performed To select All Outputs On do the following 1 Press to enter OBD Controls mode from the Select Test menu 2 Press Qai to select All Outputs On 3 Select one of the Data Lists Press Gf for ENGINE for TRANSMISSION for FUEL or aj for EMISSION Each Data List has different data parameters to view 4 Select FO ALL DATA or F1 CUSTOM LIST from the select list menu If F1 CUSTOM LIST is selected choose the parameters for display and press 19 9 for more information on setting up data list see Mode F0 Data List on page 134 5 Once the tester displays the data list you are ready to begin the output test The output control can be i
293. t to be done after preparing the vehicle for testing Continuous DTCs should be read before performing the KOEO and KOER tests to ensure that Continuous DTCs are not lost while performing diagnosis or service procedures The powertrain control system can store Continuous DTCs at any time which makes it valuable when diagnosing intermittent failures This is possible because the PCM is always actively performing the Continuous Self Test Additionally during the Continuous Self Test the PCM is performing all OBD II monitors which when failed or incomplete due to component driveability or emission problems cause a Diagnostic Trouble Code to be set in the PCM memory NOTE Reading Continuous Memory DTCs is no longer done using the KOEO test unlike earlier Self Test systems To select Continuous DTC Test do the following 1 Press Gp to select the Continuous Memory DTC test from the Test Selection Menu You are reminded to PERFORM F0 PREP VEHICLE BEFORE RUNNING TEST Press GUD N You are prompted to initiate the Continuous Memory DTC test Press to perform or QI to exit to the Test Selection Menu Perform the instruction TURN IGNITION KEY OFF then press TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN and press An information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Continuous Memory test UC If there are no DTCs to report NO DTCs is displayed Press 24 or wait 5 seconds to advance to the next displa
294. t to the STO connector the connector closest to the STO connector contains a Tach circuit which can cause a tester malfunction Reminder on 1991 93 Escort Tracer and 1993 Probe the STI and Tach circuits are integrated into a 17 pin DLC There are no single wire connectors for the STI and Tach circuits CAUTION Do not connect the STI jumper to the engine Tach test connector Refer to Table E 4 to prevent this from occurring NOTE Source for information contained in following table is Ford TSB 93 2 4 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 254 E Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics CONNECT MODEL YEAR ENGINE CONNECTOR WIRE COLOR OR COLOR CONNECTOR LOCATION Tracer 1988 89 1 6 EFI Yellow Black White At ignition coil STI Yellow Green Left rear corner of engine compartment Festiva 1988 89 1 3L Carb Tach None None Left rear corner of STI Yellow Black White engine compartment 1988 89 1 3L EFI Tach Yellow Green Black STI Yellow Black White 1990 93 1 3L EFI Tach Yellow Green White STI Yellow Green Black Capri 1991 93 1 6L EFI Tach Yellow Black White At ignition coil Turbo Non STI Yellow Green Right rear of engine Turbo compartment Probe 1989 2 2L EFI Turbo Tach Yellow Black White Left rear corner of STI Red White Black engine compartment 1989 2 2L EFI Non Tach None None Turbo STI RedWhite Black 1990 92 2 2L EFI Tach Yellow B
295. take Air Temperature at the time of a misfire event MISFIRE NOCALL Counts 0 65535 Misfire NOCALL displays a count of the misfire events MISFIRE STATUS YES NO Misfire Status displays the status of current engine misfires If an engine misfire exists the Misfire Monitor identifies the misfire condition and Misfire Status displays YES Otherwise Misfire Status displays NO During a misfire the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL may blink or turn on constantly Type A misfires blink the MIL while type B misfires turn the MIL on In both cases a DTC can be stored Expected values are NO for no misfire and YES for current engine misfire MISFIRE TPS UNITS RANGE Misfire TPS displays the throttle position at the time of a misfire event MISFIRE VEH SPD MPH 0 100 Misfire Veh Spd displays the vehicle speed at the time of a misfire event ML POSITION MAN1 MAN2 DRIVE O D NEUT REV PARK Manual Lever Position sensor is an indication of the gear selector chosen by the vehicle operator This signal is input to the ECA for information about transmission or transaxle gear selection MLP VOLTAGE Volts 0 5 Manual Lever Position Voltage is an analog indication of the gear selector chosen by the vehicle operator This signal is input to the ECA for information about transmission or transaxle gear selection NET ENG TORQUE lb ft 0 500 EEC V Net Engine Torque is a calculated measurement of engine output torque
296. ter NOTE If you select a new vehicle or the same vehicle as before but not using any data saved from previous testing is erased This includes EH Snapshot Review Codes and EEC V SCP Custom List parameter information 3 The model year selection screen defaults to the current year The or arrow keys scrolls through the available model years SELECT MODEL YEAR 2004 4 e Scrolling Arrows ENTER NOTE EH Holding down the or arrow key will result in fast scrolling The brackets to the right of the model year represent the 10 VIN digit year identifier for easier model year identification Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 77 4 Getting Started SELECT Vehicle 10th VIN Digit Model Year identifier When the correct model year appears on the screen press the key to advance the software to the next vehicle selection screen Quick keys are also available for entering the model year From the SELECT MODEL YEAR screen select the last two digits of the model year from the key pad to advance to the next vehicle selection screen For example pressing and selects 1992 Pressing the key returns the software to the SELECT MODEL YEAR screen peg Press F1 CAR or F2 TRUCK depending on your application the software flow is similar for each selection method Select the vehicle model by pressing Qe until the correct vehicle model and engine config
297. ter and the vehicle self test connector Refer to the wiring diagram s Using Jumper Cables to Connect MECS Vehicles to the Tester on page 253 of this manual for proper connection DLC Location On most vehicles the engine self test connector is located under the hood near the top of the firewall or around the left or right wheel well Refer to the vehicle service manual if in doubt 4a EEC V Systems Attach the OBD II Vehicle Interface Module and the 16 24 pin adapter cable to the vehicle end of the DLC cable Connect the 16 pin end of the adapter cable to the vehicle 16 pin DLC J1962 DLC Location On most vehicles the 16 pin DLC J1962 is located under the dashboard on the drivers side For Thunderbird it can be located under dash on the passenger side 5 Ifthe vehicle has an EEC IV engine or IVSC system there will be a small STI connector pigtailed off of the Ford 6 pin self test connector Insert the small STI connector into the open slot on the Ford adapter Continue to Powering Up the Tester on page 73 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 72 4 Getting Started POWERING UP THE TESTER Plug the DC power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter or connect the optional battery adapter cable to the battery then plug the power cable into the adapter You need to plug into the rear seat cigarette lighter during some ABS and Air Suspension tests or use a cigarette lighter cable extension Continue to Selecting the Ap
298. tes Press to replay data from a previously captured Snapshot Once Manual trigger is selected the tester starts saving diagnostic data in its memory while displaying the data list While the tester is waiting for a trigger it is continuously storing engine data parameters in its memory The data is organized as a number of data samples The value or state of each parameter is saved for each sample Once the maximum number of samples has been recorded the oldest data 1s discarded The data display indicates the waiting for trigger condition with a flashing W in the lower right hand corner of the display While waiting for the selected trigger the CUAB keys must be pressed to begin manual trigger data capture 6 Once the trigger occurs the tester beeps and then continues to save data samples until its memory is full The data display indicates that the trigger has occurred by replacing the flashing W with a fixed T As soon as the memory is full the data capture terminates automatically and the tester goes on to the data display phase 7 Pressing 341 after the trigger has occurred terminates the Data Capture phase early and the Snapshot mode moves to the Data Display phase Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 126 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE yA F3 SNAPSHOT F4 OBD CONTROLS SNAPSHOT OPTIONS F2 MANUAL TRIG F3 REPLAY DATA F9 TRIG POINT Displays st
299. the information is explained in Chapter 4 Once the information is entered a Select Mode menu is displayed showing the test modes available for the selected vehicle Only test modes available for the selected vehicle are displayed in the menus Not all test modes described in this manual are available for every vehicle The Ford Powertrain application allows you to select between six basic Test Modes DATA LIST QUICK TEST STAR SNAPSHOT OBD CONTROLS and INFORMATION DATA LIST MODE The DATA LIST mode displays engine sensor and actuator data which can inform you about the condition of critical powertrain controls Throttle Position Engine RPM and EGR Feedback Voltage are three parameters that are available for display Note that not all Ford Motor Company vehicles support DATA LIST This function is available on selected cars starting in 1989 and selected trucks starting 1990 If the vehicle under test supports the DATA LIST option the Ford Powertrain application automatically includes the DATA LIST selection in the Select Mode menu QUICK TEST MODE In the QUICK TEST mode you are provided with much more assistance in your diagnosis First you are guided through the vehicle selection process pre test vehicle preparation and the QUICK TEST sequences All codes received from the vehicle are automatically decoded by the tester into prompts for action test results or referrals to Pinpoint tests in the Ford Service manuals or Mitchell automot
300. the vehicle and engine selection process to be referred to the correct Pinpoint Test You EB must also refer to the appropriate year Ford or Mitchell Shop Manual for the Pinpoint Tests Unfortunately consistency has not been maintained for all tests in the manuals through the years To select Review Codes do the following 1 Press from the F1 Quick Tests Test Selection menu to use Review Codes 2 Press af to review codes obtained from using Star Mode or press to review codes obtained from the Quick Test mode If no codes are available in either mode the display tells you Press B to return to the Test Selection menu The first codes displayed are KOER for ENGINE or KOEO for IVSC if available If you are using Star Mode the first code received in the test is indicated with the cursor If you are decoding codes obtained in the Quick Test mode the first code that was received in the Quick Test is displayed This is the recommended code from which to start Pinpoint Testing In Star Mode Review and Decode whatever code is currently indicated is the one that is decoded toggles you to the Pinpoint screen and toggles you back to the code list In Quick Test mode Review and Decode use the and keys to move through additional codes that were received in the Quick Test If you want to look at codes obtained from another ENGINE or IVSC Quick Test press until you find the codes you want to review If all tests
301. then press TURN IGNITION KEY TO RUN and press An information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Injector Buzz test A UC A tester key help information screen is displayed which outlines available key presses when in the Injector Buzz test The message TEST IN PROCESS appears then the results of the test are displayed If there are no DTCs to report you see NO DTCs and pressing EXIT or waiting 5 seconds returns you to the Test Selection Menu You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT If there are DTCs to report the tester displays DTCs in a column list format This screen shows the total number of DTCs and the DTC numbers read from the vehicle PCM Using the and keys the cursor can be scrolled through the list of reported DTCs 6 When the cursor is next to a DTC number pressing displays the DTC order as received from the PCM DTC number text description and applicable Pinpoint Test If there are multiple DTCs read from the PCM the and keys change the DTC information display saves time from exiting out selecting another DTC then entering back in Pressing returns you to the Injector Buzz Key On Engine Off On Demand OD DTC list screen Pressing again returns you to the Test Selection menu 7 When you are finished decoding the service codes press 44 You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT Turn the ignition key off then press B again to return to t
302. tification Code First code transmitted in KOER test 20 4 cylinders 30 6 cylinders 40 8 cylinders 50 diesel engine Duty Cycle Data Communication Link Depress Release Distributor Ignition Refers to the liquid crystal display LCD Diagnostic Jumper Connector Data Link Connector DLC Cable DPF DOHC DPFE DPI DTC DVOM Dynamic Response Code ECA ECS ECT ECU EDF EEC IV EEC V EFI EGR EGRT EI EIC ENG EO EPC ER Standard connector cable to vehicles Uses adapter plugs to modify for use on different manufacturer s vehicles Delta Pressure Feedback Dual Overhead Cam Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Valve Dual Plug Inhibit Diagnostic Trouble Code Digital Volt Ohmmeter If transmitted it is the second code in KOER test Its value 10 It is a sig nal to fully depress and release the throttle once Electronic Control Assembly Electronic Crash Sensor Engine Coolant Temperature Electronic Control Unit Electro Drive Fan Electronic Engine Control version 4 Electronic Engine Control version 5 Electronic Fuel Injection Exhaust Gas Recirculation An emis sions pollution control strategy where exhaust gas is recirculated to the combustion chambers Exhaust Gas Recirculation Tempera ture Electronic Ignition aka Distributor less Ignition Electronic Instrument Cluster Engine Engine Off Electronic Pressure Control Engine Running Ford Powertrai
303. tions The numeric character in LONG TERM FT B1 and LONG TERM FT B2 define the cylinders that are grouped as a bank for fuel feedback correction Bank 1 is the bank which contains cylinder number 1 Expected values for this parameter can be 20 0 warm engine at idle or driving Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 230 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions LOOP STATUS OPEN CLOSED OL DRIVE OL FAULT CL FAULT ERROR Loop Status represents fuel control status of the feedback loop between the vehicle ECU and the oxygen sensor The states of Loop Status can be Open Loop OPEN Closed Loop CLOSED Open Loop due to vehicle being Driven at wide open throttle or coasting OL DRIVE Open Loop due to a Fault with the OBD II system OL FAULT or Closed Loop with only one oxygen sensor being used for fuel control and a fault with at least one oxygen sensor CL FAULT LOW SPD FAN ON OFF For vehicles that have the low speed cooling fan Low Speed Fan displays the state of the low speed fan control signal sent out by the ECA M TO O PARAMETERS MAF V UNITS RANGE Mass Air Flow MAF sensor is an input to the ECA and represents the amount of air that the engine is taking into the manifold in voltage voltage increases with engine load and 15 typically 0 5 1 5 volts at idle warm engine MANIFOLD P PSIG 0 140 EEC V Manifold Gauge Pressure is a variable capacitance sensor that measu
304. to change the DTC type Continuous KOEO or KOER If there are only DTCs of one type available for review pressing does not change the code type An keypress only changes DTC type if other types of DTCs are available to review This operation ensures that you are decoding the proper DTC type for the current vehicle that you are working on AR DTCs received as a result of performing the Continuous KOEO or KOER DTC read Quick Tests are displayed Use the O and keys to scroll the cursor through the list of reported DTCs When the cursor is next to a DTC number pressing displays the DTC order as received from the PCM DTC number text description and applicable Pinpoint Test If there are multiple DTCs read from the PCM the and keys change the DTC information display saves time from exiting out selecting another DTC then entering back in Pressing returns you to the DTC list screen Pressing again returns you to the Review and Decode Selection menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 152 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Always read the beginning pages of each Pinpoint Test e g read text for NOTE DC1 even if you are doing a DC9 Pinpoint Test The first page may contain specific diagnostic information about which components in the system are diagnosed when following the Pinpoint Test procedures Plus it may describe which other components if not operating properly can result
305. to test from the Transmission Control list TRANSMISSION CONTROLS KEY DESCRIPTION RANGE FO Shift Sol 1 Toggles Shift Solenoid 1 ON OFF F1 Shift Sol 2 Toggles Shift Solenoid 2 ON OFF F2 Shift Sol 3 Toggles Shift Solenoid 3 ON OFF F3 Shift Sol 4 Toggles Shift Solenoid 4 ON OFF F4 TCC Lockup Toggles the Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid ON OFF TABLE 5 2 Transmission Controls NOTE Component coverage is vehicle dependent If a component is not EH supported the tester will display an error message 4 Select one of the Data Lists Press for ENGINE for TRANSMISSION for FUEL or for EMISSION Each Data List has different data parameters to view 5 Select FO ALL DATA or F1 CUSTOM LIST from the select list menu If F1 CUSTOM LIST is selected choose the parameters for display and press 1959 for more information on setting up datalist see Mode F0 Data List on page 134 6 You are prompted with a message that identifies the vehicle conditions that must be met for the Transmission control to be performed safely and accurately 7 Select at the conditions screen to begin the Transmission control test 8 Once the tester displays the data list you are ready to begin controlling the Transmission component Depending on the component that is selected it can either be turned on or off or the component can be Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 174 5 Selecting and Operating Test
306. to the vehicle Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 6 Diagnostic Summary 1 Ford Powertrain Application Description DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY The following table gives a summary of the diagnostic tests and procedures available on the Ford Powertrain application QUICK TEST MODE TEST PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION Prepare Vehicle for Testing ENGINE IVSC The tester takes you through a checklist of component settings and other steps necessary to prepare the vehicle for testing Continuous DTCs ENGINE Specific instructions guide you through reading Continuous DTCs from EEC V systems 5 character DTCs are displayed and decoded to the proper Pinpoint Test Key On Engine Off KOEO Test ENGINE IVSC Specific instructions take you through reading KOEO and continuous diagnostic codes The fast codes are used for this test to save time except on MCU systems The Pinpoint Test for each code received can be displayed Timing Check ENGINE This test tells you how to set up the engine to do a timing advance test on the EEC IV engine controller You are directed to the appropriate follow up tests after any pass fail condition Key On Engine Running KOER Test Like the Key On Engine Off test this test offers specific instructions ENGINE IVSC and fast code reading except on MCU systems The Pinpoint Tests for each code received can be displayed Output Control Specific to the EEC V system
307. train Control Module PCM If you are trying to capture an intermittent problem on the EEC V systems using the Snapshot mode while in the service bay or on a road test helps to isolate the problem The Snapshot can be replayed for review at a later time or a hardcopy of the data can be printed The Snapshot mode monitors diagnostic data parameters available from the vehicle Powertrain Control Module PCM on Ford s Standard Corporate Protocol Ford SCP communication link This mode does not affect vehicle operation and diagnostic data parameters can be read from the PCM to allow for quick analysis of critical input and output parameter values The diagnostic data parameter current value is displayed along with parameter units the sample frame number and a time stamp The 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain Application allows you to specify a trigger condition on Any DTC ona Single DTC or with a Manual Trigger Triggering on Any DTC allows you to trigger on an event when any DTC in the PCM has been set Single DTC allows you to select a specific DTC for the Snapshot to occur on Manual Trigger allows you the command to trigger with a single key press Also the 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain Application has the capability to start a Snapshot sequence at the beginning center or end of data capture If you set up the trigger point to match the type of driveability fault that you are observing this function can be a great diagnostic time saver After the data
308. transmission control switch the Transmission Control Indicator Lamp lights when the transmission control switch is pressed to disengage overdrive This parameter indicates 1f the lamp 1s commanded ON or OFF Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 240 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions TRANS CNTRL SW STATES ECA Transmission Control Switch TCS describes the state of the TCS The TCS information is input to the PCM so the PCM can make determinations about vehicle operator desired transmission range selection The EEC V system uses the TCS to allow transmission overdrive operation TRANS CNTRL SW Diesel Engine ON OFF Transmission Control Switch TCS describes the state of the TCS The TCS information is input to the PCM so the PCM can make determinations about vehicle operations The EEC V system uses the TCS to allow transmission overdrive operation or not TURBINE SPEED RPM 0 6000 Turbine Speed is the speed at which the transmission input shaft is turning in revolutions per minute Turbine speed is important for transmission operation as commanded by the ECA UP O2S BANK 1 UP O2S BANK 2 DOWN O2S BANK 1 DOWN O2S BANK 2 UNITS RANGE 010 1 Up or Down Stream Oxygen Sensor UP O2S or DOWN O2S Bx is the output voltage of the heater O2S that is input to the ECU The O2S signal is a measure of the oxygen content in the exhaust emission gases that surround the sensor tip and is a p
309. trolled by the PCM and it controls the current flow to the glow plugs Expected values for this parameter are 1 1 5sec KOEO just before engine start and Osec while driving with low to medium load Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 227 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions GLOW PLUG DC UNITS RANGE ECA Glow Plug Duty Cycle is measure of the percent open time for the Glow Plug Duty Cycle The Glow Plug Duty Cycle is an output controlled by the PCM and it controls the current flow to the glow plugs Expected values for this parameter are 5 15 KOEO just before engine start and 0 while driving with low to medium load GLOW PLUG LAMP son 0 10 EEC V Glow Plug Lamp represents the ON time that the glow plug relay is energizing the glow plug lamp The Glow Plug Lamp is an output controlled by the PCM and it controls the current flow to the glow plugs Expected values for this parameter are 1 1 5sec KOEO just before engine start and 0 sec while driving with low to medium load HEATED O2S 1 Volts 0 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor is the output voltage of the HO2S that is input to the ECA The HO2S signal is measure of the oxygen portion of the exhaust emission gases that surround the sensor tip HEATED O2S 2 UNITS RANGE Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 is the output voltage of the HO2S that is input to the ECA The HO2S signal is a measure of the oxygen portion of the exhaust emission gases t
310. u 9 Remember to perform the KOEO test for any new service codes that are a result of Wiggle Tests Wiggle Test Notes When performing the KOER Wiggle Test on selected EEC IV vehicles the FAULT COUNTS may appear as counting up after a wiggle fault is detected This occurs only when certain wiggle faults are stored as DTCs example MAF Sensor The fault count may be observed to go over 50 fault counts Certain On Demand tests check component or circuit failures and set DTCs depending on the results If a DTC is stored the EEC IV PCM begins to issue DTCs on the STO line rather than toggling the STO line to indicate a fault normal Wiggle Test operation The DTCs are then decoded by the tester as STO circuit high to low to high etc signal transitions as they are being transmitted which cause the fault counter to count up This is tied to the EEC IV PCM calibrated strategy and is considered normal operation ACTIVE KEYS Select Wiggle Test Select engine off Wiggle Test Ga Select engine running Wiggle Test Indicate test initialization action has been done Terminate Wiggle Test and return to the Test Selection menu Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 112 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F3 K ON ENG RUN F4 WIGGLE TESTS F7 CLR CONT DTC WIGGLE TESTS F0 K ON ENG OFF F1 K ON ENG RUN HAS IGNITION KEY BEEN OFF FOR 10 SECONDS YES
311. u to directly control the Self Test Input STI line to read and display all slow or fast codes as they are received from the Self Test Output STO line You can record fast or slow codes Up to 24 codes are maintained for viewing You can then translate the codes into Pinpoint Tests so you can follow the step by step diagnostic procedures in the Ford Service manuals and Mitchell automotive manuals The STAR mode of operation must be used to test vehicles with the Mazda Engine Control System MECS and the 4 speed Electronic Automatic Transaxle 4EAT In addition the MECS or 4EAT system outputs slow codes only therefore MECS or 4EAT codes must be read with the tester in the slow codes mode SNAPSHOT MODE The SNAPSHOT mode works in conjunction with the DATA LIST mode giving you the capability to save data list information The SNAPSHOT function uses three different ways to trigger on Any DTC on a Single DTC or with a Manual Trigger Triggering on Any DTC allows you to trigger on an event when any DTC in the PCM has been set Single DTC allows you to select a specific DTC for the Snapshot to occur on Manual Trigger allows you the command to trigger with a single key press In addition you can choose the trigger point begin center end of data which provides more flexibility in vehicle diagnosis You also have the option to replay Snapshot data on the tester display for later diagnostic analysis If the vehicle under test supports the DATA LIST
312. under specific conditions The Ford OBD II drive cycle must be performed so the EEC V controllers can perform all trip monitor tests Once the Ford OBD II drive cycle is complete the EEC V or PTEC controller should clear DTC P1000 Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 247 E Ford Mazda Powertrain Modules and Diagnostics Use the Ford OBD II drive cycle to help identify any problems with the OBD II system and clear DTC P1000 Individual monitor completion status on board readiness tests can be checked at any time with the tester during the Ford OBD II drive cycle If DTC P1000 is present in EEC V controllers memory then all OBD II monitors have not been successfully completed and a Ford OBD II drive cycle must be performed Ford OBD II compliant vehicles support the following monitors Exhaust Gas Recirculation Heated O2S Catalyst Efficiency Misfire Detection Fuel System Comprehensive Component and Secondary Air Injection For more information on the Ford OBD drive cycle please refer to the Ford Powertrain Control Emissions Diagnosis On Board Diagnostics II Car Truck manual To run the Ford OBD II Drive Cycle do the following 1 Start the engine 2 Drive the vehicle in any practical manner for 4 to 6 minutes 3 Drive the vehicle until the engine coolant temperature check parameter ECT is greater than 180 F 82 C 4 Idle engine for 45 seconds 5 Accelerate from 0 to 45 MPH at 1 4 throttle take ab
313. up A maximum of 30 data parameters can be selected in Custom List VIEWING PCM DIAGNOSTIC DATA PARAMETERS In order to maximize the information that can be seen at one time the Tech 1 displays data parameters in preassigned pairs The first data pair is displayed after you press a You can scroll through the Data List with the and keys See Create Your Own Data Pairs for creating your own data pairs with the and keys To see other preassigned pairs press either the or key The key scrolls forward through the list of preassigned pairs while the 19 key causes scrolling backwards Appendix D contains descriptions of all engine data parameters Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 136 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Create Your Own Data Pairs You can create data parameter pairs which are different from the preassigned pairs Any two parameters can be displayed as a pair by simply scrolling either the bottom or top display parameter while the other display parameter is fixed To fix the top parameter press a9 an asterisk appears by the fixed parameter Press ai to fix the lower parameter The Tech 1 does not allow both the top and bottom parameters to be fixed at the same time As an example let s say you wish to create a pair with ENGINE SPEED and BRAKE SWITCH To do so scroll through the preassigned pairs with the and key until you find a pair with ENGINE SPEED Fix the ENGINE SPEE
314. uration is displayed then press to enter your current model and engine configuration Note look at the display carefully as the differences can be subtle In the example if there was more than one Ford model equipped with the 3 0L engine you would have pressed Qe once or more to select the correct model with the 3 0L engine Remember that gets you to the next selection and chooses the current selection 6 Once the year model and engine size have been selected the tester may display a Select System menu In certain year model engine configurations there are additional systems other than the Engine system An example is Cruise Control The 1981 2004 Ford Powertrain software displays the system options for your current vehicle under test Press the appropriate function key to select Engine or Cruise Control tests If Cruise Control is not available Engine system is automatically selected me When the appropriate system has been selected the tester displays the Test Selection menu of tests available for the vehicle you have selected In the example you would be ready to begin testing a 1992 Ford Taurus Sable with a 3 0L SEFI MA engine Different tests are available for different models so the Test Selection Menu varies from vehicle to vehicle If there are more than three tests available within the chosen system press the arrow key to view all of the tests available for the selected model configuration oo To select
315. urge Solenoid The Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid is an output controlled by the PCM and it controls the flow of vapors that are purged from the carbon canister in to the intake manifold various engine operating modes only Expected values for this parameter are 0 KOEO or idle hot engine and 0 50 while driving with low to medium load EVAP PURGE FLOW Volts 0 5V Evaporative Purge Flow is a measure of evaporative canister purge flow when the Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid is allowing vapors to flow Based on the Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid open flow or closed no flow status the Evaporative Purge Flow Sensor monitors the vapor flow through the evaporative system and is an input to the PCM Expected values for this parameter are 0 0 1 volts KOEO or idle hot engine and 0 1 4 9 volts while driving with low to medium load EVAP SOLENOID ON OFF Evaporative Purge Solenoid is used to control the vacuum signal that operates the evaporative purge canister On some Ford vehicles canister purge operates off idle engine at normal operating temp EXH BACKPRES P PSIA 0 60 EEC V Exhaust Pressure Absolute is a variable capacitance sensor that measures exhaust back pressure so that the PCM can properly and timely control the exhaust back pressure regulator Expected values for this parameter are 0 PSIA KOEO and 0 20 PSIA while driving with low to medium load Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter
316. voltage related CYL 1 8 MISFIRE CNT Counts 0 65535 Displays the number of misfire events on a particular cylinder CYL HEAD UNITS RANGE Cylinder Head Temperature CHT is an analog input to the ECU This parameter provides a temperature indication of the engine cylinder head near the CHT sensor The CHT sensor is designed to alert the PCM of a possible engine over temperature condition CHT sensors can be located in the intake manifold or cylinder head Typical CHT is 325 F warm engine at idle ECT 200 C Note that the in parenthesis indicates the parameter is temperature related Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 222 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions D TO F PARAMETERS DESIRED FUEL VOL WPC 0 250 EEC V Desired Fuel Volume is a PCM calculation of fuel volume for the current diesel engine operating conditions Expected values for this parameter are 0 0mm KOEO 7 10 0mm at idle and greater than 10mm while driving with low to medium load DESIRED MASSFUEL UNITS RANGE ECA 0 250 EECV Desired Mass Fuel is a PCM calculation of fuel mass for a particular fuel volume for the current diesel engine operating conditions Expected values for this parameter are 0 0mg KOEO 7 0 12 0mg at idle and greater than 12 0mg while driving with low to medium load DPF EGR Volts 0 5V Delta Pressure Feedback DPF Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR is a measure of EGR flow as detected
317. when the switch is ON or OFF Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 218 Data List Parameters D Data List Parameter Descriptions A C SWITCH STATES The Air Conditioning A C switch informs the ECA when the air conditioning has been turned on by the operator Once the A C Switch has been turned on A C Switch cycles on off with the A C clutch In some cases the ECA can increase engine idle speed to compensate for the additional compressor load on the engine AP MODE Diesel Engine CLOSED PARTIAL WOT Accelerator Pedal Position AP Mode displays the operating mode of the accelerator pedal position sensor the sensor range is divided up into three modes The three modes are closed partial and wide open throttle WOT ARC ACCEL SW ON OFF When the vehicle is under acceleration an acceleration switch signal is sent to the Automatic Ride Control system from the engine ECA This informs the ARC system that vehicle speed is changing BARO F UNITS RANGE Barometric Pressure sensor is a measure of outside ambient pressure Information from the barometric pressure sensor is used by the PCM to determine fuel and exhaust gas recirculation strategies The barometric sensor is an input to the PCM and the sensor itself outputs a frequency value Barometric pressure is normally above 150Hz sea level Note that the F in parenthesis indicates the parameter is frequency related BARO P Gasoline Engine in Hg 0 106
318. y You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT If there are DTCs to report the tester displays TEST IN PROCESS and then displays DTCs in a column list format This screen shows the total number of DTCs and the DTC numbers read from the vehicle PCM Using the O and keys the cursor can be scrolled through the list of reported DTCs 5 When the cursor is next to a DTC number pressing displays the DTC order as received from the PCM DTC number text description and applicable Pinpoint Test If there are multiple DTCs read from the PCM the and keys change the DTC information display saves time from exiting out selecting another DTC then entering back in Pressing returns you to the Continuous DTC list screen Pressing again returns you to the Test Selection menu 6 When you are finished decoding the service codes press You are prompted to TURN IGNITION KEY OFF BEFORE EXIT Turn the ignition key off then press 24M again to return to the Test Selection Menu 7 If no messages are received within approximately 60 seconds an error message is displayed with a Pinpoint Test number to perform refer to the communication error message screen definition within this section of the manual 8 If operating properly the PCM goes through a series of tests and then begins DTC transmission Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 140 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE 5 F0 DATA LIST F1 QUICK
319. yed at the end of line 2 of the display AOF These characters serve as a reminder as to which output control is being performed The last three characters of line 4 of the display read ON if the EEC V PCMs normal state is being overridden by the tester Ford Powertrain Application 1981 2004 Page 163 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 8 Press or Qs to scroll through parameters all data list functions are available Refer to Mode F0 DATA LIST for instructions on viewing and printing the data list parameters 9 Press to quit the Output Test and return control of the selected output to the EEC V or PCMs SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS F8 INFORMATION CONTROL TYPEAY F0 OUTPUT TESTS F1 ENGINE F2 TRANSMISSION Y SELECT CONTROL FO ALL ON gt F1 ALL OFF F2 LOW SPD FAN WAITING FOR DATA SELECT LIST Y F0 ENGINE F1 TRANSMISSION FUEL EMISSION SELECT LIST F0 ALL DATA F1 CUSTOM LIST ENGINE SPEED SELECTED YES SELECT 1 NO DE SELECT ENTER Additional parameter selection IDLE AIR CNTRL 1 A LOOP STATUS OPEN OFF If engine is started IDLE AIR CNTRL IDLE AIR CNTRL 100 AOF LOOP STATUS LOOP STATUS OPEN ON OPEN OFF IDLE AIR CNTRL 9 ENGINE RUNNING 1 OR OUTPUT CONTRL LOOP STATUS TEST NOT AVAIL OPEN OFF EXIT FIGURE 5 29 All Outputs Off Ford P

Ford Powertrain Application 1981-2004

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents